4381_MI_vol_A07_Oct84 4381 MI Vol A07 Oct84
User Manual: 4381_MI_vol_A07_Oct84
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 224
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
....
•• ••••
• •• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
o
::.)
:.....:
;.-": :-...: :--..'!
:--:
;-.:
: ...-:
.~..::
:-;:::: ::r.::
.::. ::-::::
::;~:
=:<:
:~::.:
i,.·: =: ,,:: i,_': ::.:: ::..,::
'-'i ..... i - ...; ...-;
:>'::
::'-.i r..'::. ::....: ::.') ::. ~ -: '::
::.,~
-< . .< -< -.:: .-::: . . :': . . :
::'" i.···f
- i --. ......:
.....: "':
.~:.:: <~': ::~:o <~': <~::
::::::.
!".:: :".:. .....
(:::
c.j
r- :.... r' C"· r- r. . · r- r'- ::. :: (.:.: :;:::: .;,.::
c::: :::: c:: ::::
I:::: :- . .:
~-:
I::: C: C::
-.: 'OO<
::....i ~ '} ::.,,:: :.••~ :: 'J :.. ':: :...••: ::..,:: ~"'l :::-: :7': :7: :;-': ::;"': ::;-": r. -:
:~-:.
(:,: (.:: <:.:
(~::
::;::: : : :
;"'oi
::;'' ; :::.:.. :j:,= J:-- 1.;r.. ~ C": :T':
<::~
: : .-:
:'Z': .::~:: <~':
....... ;.:: '·0 ::'" .J;... ::....:
:;-: r;"':
:::-J r·,,:: ... .
o
':
. ..:.
1:: J ::. J ,:
;~''': ~""
r- r:1 P"1 f1"~ r:1 t: ~ in r:~ !":": r:'1 ::C: ... j .,r.:., t··J. ::',,; ....:.. ::!:.
r,••J ~"J ~ ': r. ::.» :"": ~•••~ r... :: ~"'! i...ri i.)1 ;...'1 i.. :1 -!'. i.)':
J> --i ......~ _..; ......; ......; .. ·i -; _... -"'i
t-
0"":: i~--:i ::::. -::: :.:: ;('i ...t. =
:.....: :-~ :".... :~:: ::::' ~i 1
.-..:
_. ' :'::: :-:':',
:: ::: ..;~: c::
<~:
~~::
"'.1
'.)1
::::
.t.=:.
:"~::
~::::,
C':
t'
:"o~:
....!••
•
t..;"! •••.:"f :...r; ·•• ·f :.:f :.. =1 :...:1 t.t1 i...i1 :,.,:: ....:~ :.. =1
<:::.
<~.:
rn
~'''.
.::::::
~ :::
~~:: f':"~
c:: . ':',
o:::~:
::-2:
- ".
~~::
<:> ::: :.
.:~~::
:.._:
:,,, :
r·.J ._... :::::
::::: :::0
:.:~.:
::-~~i
...; r..·· :..... :" - :" r" r- to r.... r- :...... : . t . · r'" r"
:::: .:::: .::: :::: :::: c:: C: C:: C: i :::.
.:..:: ['J r~: ..... r:: r ': rOO') c--:: r:: ::-: :" : CO:.
;:'" :;: i
r:"; :-:. ;-:1
3:. :.:~ :i::
::~) C~:.
:::..::
:: ~ (': ( ':: ::';::: .::::: () :~..:: <) (:::: :'::: .: : ::~::
.:~:;
:, "::
-.J .... : ::::" 0·· ;.. :1 :...r~ J.:.: -f',:·
:.,.::
:..-:
.:!:. <:::.
'~r~:
.:::. <:::: .::..: .::::: ('::
...) .::: t:,t:: ::C:
......! - "'. :.....:1
:.)'~
_ ..;
:D
.. ,::
.:~~
( ) ::' :': ~.::
...J.
• :_:
:...r; -.: . . :..r:
- '. Ct'·,
r- () (':: (,:: ;:.:'::
;, r; -:..
I ..:'
: ••:~
=1
: ..
.~.::
J.:::. ::':..i ::. ~
~'.J ~.. ::
n ....:.. :.. fi ...!.. :. J'i ._:.. :...:! - ..'
too: :
::.:: r·.J ....: .........:~:::
... i
.'.!
....
:3>
.........
:"
:.....:
' ••
:"i:.:
r.•...:
i :':
.:.,:.
::;:':': :)1 :,.=1 t,:1 :.fi :...1 :.. =1 : ...=1
••.• J
':~,.'
:.~'. :'::': :':::: :.:': <:;:
.~::- ::~.: '.::> :.::: '.::.:!
::~'. :::> ::::: :::~': f.~::
c·· D'· .).. :::" :)"
;"~~.
~..:
"::".
G',
:::': :::': .::::'. :::': :~~:: .::=::.
(;) <~.: <~.: :.~: ·:r..: '~:.:
:~~': <:'. ~::::. :~:;: <::: .:E::
:'.:~::
::;'" C,'· t::'" ::'" :j" C;'" .J.::.
{: .(: . c: . .:: ·. t:::
:...:'~ :.. t! ·..r: :...:0: ... ,
:.....: ~•••J
:)'~
::::;. Cr·.
..::: ...) '''C ..•(:
..1:.· .:';. f·::
...::!
::;',
'0.::: ,..::: r·...::
:)'" 0'" ::.... :::'"
::i'"
:'.)
:.:~.t
;~::
=.:;-::
.:":,'.
:
..::::
:~~~~ :~:~ 'ili~
':.:':. :.::.:
:-::': :::::'; ::::::.
(~':
:::::::
::~::
::::,:.
Co,
:.:~.:
0'" (:-.,
.::-~:.
i::-' ::;"
_:" ·l.:."
:::'.. :)." 0'0 C:" c:· C:'" C'" (;'. J..::. (i'" :3'" :)... G'" :::'" :)"
..:::: •.:) ..:::: ,.. :;: .. ::; ,.~: ....:: ..C: :::'" ...::: -..::: ..:) ,,,::: ',·0 ...::;
C:·; C:.~ (: ,j : ,'·.E ::: J c:,.~ C·.i ::':·.i :"'~: :..:.J ;.:..~ ::':w.i (:..i ::...~ :":-.i
"'~:: ..(: ...::;
o:~ :::; ::':: c::: ::::! _01. =:::i ::::: (:) =:i:: ::0 C'::
(:.i :....; -.:. :;_:.: •::. (.) no.J ::;" 1,.:or :...E1 .J:::- ::~J i\) ....:.. ::::.:
_I.
-.!.
--:-. . . ..:.
--:'.
_':',
''':'.
--t. -:0.
....:-. ...,:..
~:.:.
.::::. <:>
'.:~:. :~:)
:::!.:.
::::::
(~.:
:::::. ::::;:
<~::
:::.:..:::::.
.j..::. .. .:..
<":.':
'~:,:'
.~~::
:,!:. <::.
0" 0·"
.-:.. ...,:..
~:.:,
(:'" .J~ 0'" 0 00. i)'" :::'" ::::'" ::':'" G', :)" (:'" (:... 0'" :::'" :).. (:'" D'" c~, 0'" (:... ~ Ci'" ..~. 'J'
...::: 0'" .•.::; "'::; ...::: ·..C: ' ..(: ..::) .. ..:~: ...=) '..::: •.. ·.::i '..0 ...(: '..0 ...::: ...::! '··0 !)" "C! ::~•..() '''Ci "::: '..0
,,:~:- ..i::... J.:;. .J:::. .J:::- i ....J. ::,;.J :"':·.i C:·J t;-.~ :::·.i _.... ~::.. .••:.. :...=-= :.)1 :..:: t.n
:...:..! r·.,; -!:::. ":'::. ..i:::. ..::::.
....!o.
J:::. ......
<~:
c:
-..
<:::: .:::,::
·. i)
0::
::_:: ::::: :::': :::) J:::
'::!.:' ::!: :.:~.: -:::> ::::::
:.!::
·..Ct -··0 '..0 ..(: ....::: ,,,:::
:::::
.:~;.
.':::'.
:::~;
.~:::-
(:.~
:'..) -':" .:::::. ·..Cr CO - ..j G'" :...e'! ..~~. :":.i
::~::
:
.:;'" 0'" () 0'" -!
.::'"
"-0
:... f!
.....~
::i
:::
-.J ::::::: ...:-.
:,:::. <:::: <:) ::!: :::
:::~.:
':.::r ;:;::; ::.:;:
;::;::. :::)
=:;'" 0'" Cr·.
(::':
...!-•
:'~::
...,:.. (:) -..J '-·.1 -..~ -..j
-'oj -:-. :::-" :•.•=: "::::. (:.~
G'"
...;)
:../i
- ..;
::C: ....J
.J::-
n·· z
...,:.
CC
......
: -.. =
::.... ..:.,: :......
....:.. C;o.: :i::
.,! .......
1:'
......=
. :. :
..~-::.
::",:
:D' :I::. J> :3> J> J>
i".) hJ :::!::. ~·.:i .::;::: :'..)
;'~~
8; l: .i: ;~ ~:;~ ;~ ;~ ;:~~ ;:;~ ;;; f.:.i: ~~~ ;::;~ 5~ ;::.~
;?;; :~~ ;:
.::.; .....:.
t.::.: : ::::
:
~':
~~:.:.
':'~:
:..:::: ::;.
c···· :"':'" ::-.
'::::':
(:) ::~::, :~::::
C:-" i)·.
-.•~ -.j ....j
c. · c:", .). C:'" 0'"
::"o~ ::...! ::.: :::o.f i::..j
.:.:: ::::: Xi ::0 fJ.::
:':::.: .:::.: :'::. :.!:' :::!:::
....,i ...·.1
.:~-: :~~:
<:::: :.::') :.:::: .::::::
() : :~::
::::;:
:8:
:Z;
:~~::
r.>. -:-:'" :::" :::-.. (:'" :::'"
r"_~
::2 :::~ t~ ::2 22 :::~;
::!:: :8:
(~':
C:'"
-"i ....j .....j - ..j - ..~
C:'" :::-.. Ci*·· ;:=" (:...
~:-" (;'" (:'" 0"00'" C:'"
:":·.i =:t-J :::.J (:-.! (t-.i C;.~ (:.! i::·.i C·.! G·.; (:-.i :":.•~
0:: CO CC: ::0 CO C::: OJ 0:.: ::t:: CO ::0 !:C:
:::,:::: :~r:: ::::.:.: ::::::. :.!:: :.:~:: :::::- <~.: : : : : C: ::::: :.~:
-.j ·....1
.....j
.....j ....J
-.1
C:-"
::~::
::::.: :::;::: :::::::
:8: <:::: ::!::
i··.J i··.J i ") ~\.::
:~~.:
~; ~: ::;i :~:~
::I::
<~.": :~~::
:..:; :...:'i :..;1
22 ~~~;
:Z: ::.;:::
to!':
::D
::::::: t'::::;
:.)1 :...~ :"'~ :..•!1
=...=1
:••.:1
r·. ::
·Z·
i"~!
::0
..:~. t•••)
..:::: .::;::: :::::::
....!:: :~:::; :-':::::
<£.': .:::;. ;81
c:-·· :::'"
(:':
:'
:::~::
.::;:::
0'"
::.~:
::::::.
:::~::
r·..) r·.) t·.,:;
-'. i .....1 -·.1 .....J ....j
C:-" 0'··
.....1 -..~ - ..j
0'" C:-"
::':'.i
OJ 0:::
:':::.: 'S"::
ii~iii~~i~ii
- ..J
...... i
-.J - ...~
- ..J
-.j - ..J
t1.~
C·.!
:).. !:"
:./! :..r:
-:" ~••=1 Ci'"
..;::: ::; (::::
:..':": (i'" ........
0'·· :::-..
.::;::: :'!=:
.::;::: :::;:::
::J,:: G:
:::0.
i)",
<::::
:)" ;::'" ::£'"
r..;..~
:::.; :.....i (:-wi
:;!::
::::::: :8:
::0
1~::'
.:.!::
c::;
::!:t
:::~::
C::; OJ
:S': ::;::-
::!::
~)':
:::~
c:
......
:..;;.
.~=.
.
:-...:
' :.'
r·.::
~'.)
h..i i·· ...:
!....) r'.~:
::t-. t:-·· Ct·, C;.·· :::'" :)" ;::".
- •.J - ..1 .-.J
(:oJ. (;-.1 (: ~ (;••; :oo:,,!
::c:
.:C () . i~
<:::
::::)
- ...: -",,: .....,:: -.J -J
0-· ::;-'" ~:" =::'" :) •. (:"
0:; (:)
:::.:
(i'"
f·.) :.:: Z
:'.J :...::. :.)1
....
::.::.: ::~> :,D :::':t ::!::
::'::': .:::::; :8: ::.~: ::~)
t·..:: i' .~: i··..:; t·.J i"'~'
-.j - ..1
(;·.i
r·..:: :..~: r·.:;
::':::. :8: ::.:::.
:)'0 C'"
-.~
~> J.>
r·.J :...~ i·,.J :...:"; :.":1 !.':1 :...:1
t,,:; .,..:.. ::; ..
~~; ~)~i ~~ ~~ ~:8 ~:~ ~~
J>
r·.::
t·..:: ;',,:;
i:: '. (:-.. (:...
r":: ?..::
i··.. :
:....:
tt:
.::. :~;'" !::... :)" .......
.....: ...·.1 ..... ;
::;.. 0", C,"
(;.,'
~;·.i
':C: CO =:0
::~::
C:J
:~::::
.~::.
::::.:
~'.'::
:,."..
......
::.~:
:.:.:::
~:::
(:1
.:~'.
..-::
~
.. ::
:
J.:..
J
~
i
,
~
(,
Y
~
;
!
II~
~,
,
)
J
,',I
~
f
~
Y
"\
)
o
•• ••• •••
o
o o o o
0
•
o
0
..':,.:
::;
0000000000000000D
;.;".:
~~~~~~--00~~~~~WG
~0~0~0~0~W0~0~0~m
::"'"
......:
::;::::
::!
::..
::•..
:~~ i---!
~'
....:.. _"', ....:.. ....:-.
.....J !.)1 :::..~ ....:..
<~:: ::~::: :::~:: <::::
::~::: <:::: :::~::
...!:! - ..J :')1 C:·.; '''':''
:::!:::
(~::
(:)
C·) :::~:; :::~:: <~:: <;::; (:)
·..·..i 0'" :.":1 t..ri .J:::. ..i:::·
;..-: ....f..
n ._:',
!...
t)1 ....:..
<:::
._-!
r"rn
(~·.i
:...: !
J>
-..J
,~
...•:::
~
..<
::...
~
;::
::~::
::...
~
J>
:.: :
........
:::t.:
::;:::
J>
:::r::
:;::::
..
: :,.:
:J>
::~::
::..
:::;:::
,:~
···c:
::::::;
:::::::
A:::::
(): <:::: ;:::,::
::::::
.:::)
<~::: ·8·
::::::: ::::::i ::::::: :;r]
0'" i)" (:'" 0'" ....-1
.......
:::~::
::~::
c:!...
,:..
J>
:
........
::~:::
: .......i
......:
if;
'."..:
--i
_...:
: ::
PO'!
:::~::
~<:
:::::::
<:~:
._.
Pi
:.--:
........
.......
:...n
(0
.......
~
f
~,'
lJ
... .,..
f
'1-.,
)
'c.:. . if"
f
"-
'I
'1·.1
",'0, ..I'
l'
'1\
fi.J
-J'
,,.-
'"
"'<._Y·'
I
/
"
y
/
.(
'tl
"
~"
;"
"'~
..}I/
'tl
'<.. J'
/'
I
. )i
"
)Ir
c~,.
tlP'
-~1
.J!
~.
II
\,U'
:-l,:
',~,~J"
),
)\
,I
>'
t,
l
\LjJ
)c
'.,
'UJ
,
'WH"d" , I
L
"!
\·'"9'.1$
." . ·t-
"!lL
U
M"!
f 'I 'ft#tJ
dr
"¥M"ra
W'Mlffi . .·"" "ct
Ilf*",
j".r
wflw..';";'iw!M!~;'I" .. ILly"..... ' '6'"_"" www""!dtd'b4t" "".
,j'4"n1LWWi "d"'b:+')TUl"qWHPWDtlMiII"rtT';nrflT"HI''F'D'''IPl''
nT'
H d i!"!IU
M
'.'
"
H'
!II 'tWlt'L
'",''''d''
II
"@W:4L!I4I!W'''±d±''
!"i
"0"' 'Ull
",,""',,\
Itrir......"'1 "M"h"I'..
, ...~
",
"'.,im"'•• ' ../.....,..... *8' +";,,
';"I'MY""
'\"!~' '"++"
+hr' # LltJ"
0000000000000000000000000000000000
----- - ------.. --- - - ----•
4381-3
-
.
I 4381-3
I~
MI: MI
. MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
I
I
I
I
I
I
---l
.==-=-=
-"_.....------ ---== -"---E
--=---"-.
-= -=- -=-.-=
VOL A02
1984
I
I
I
I
I
:~
..
I~
MI IMI: MI
I MAINTENANCE I MAINTENANCE
I INFORMATION ,INFORMATION
I PWR REPAIR· I PWR REPAIR
PWRREPAtR
(PROC)I
PR 1001
THRU
PR 13 XX
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
(PROC)
PR 1401
THRU
PR 18 XX
I
SIN
4381-3
SIN
Processor
Maintenance Information
4381-3
SIN
MI
MI
MI
MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
MAl NTENANCE
INFORMATION
MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
SERVICE AIDS
LOCATIONS
TOOLS
REMOVALI
REPLACEMENT
PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE
DIAGNOSTICS
LOGS
SYSTEM TEST
INSTALLATION
SAFETY INSP
CONSOLE
FUNCTIONS
(PROe)
PR 1901
THRU
PR 5001
I
I
I
t
VOL A03
I
I
4381-3
MESSAGES
1 _ __
VOL A04
VOL AOS
VOLA06
VOL A07
6
.-.
o Copyright IBM Corp.
~
I MAINTENANCE I MAINTENANCE
I INFORMATION I INFORMATION
SAfETY
IPWR REPAIR
INDEX
(HWS AND
MBC)
TERMSI
PR 001
ABBREVIATIONS
INTROPUCT!ON
PR ~~:u
START
PUREPAIR
CHNL REPAIR
MSSREPAIR
END OF REPAIR
VOL A01
I 4381-3 I 4381-3 I 4381-3
Maintenance Information
®
VOL AOS
The drawings and· specifications contained herein shall not be reproduced·in
whole orin part without written permission.
IBM has prepared this maintenance manual for you in the use for installation,
maintenance, or repair of the specific machine indicated. IBM makes no
representation that it is suitable for any other purpose.
Information contained in this manual is subject to change from time to time.
Any such change will be reported in subsequent revisions or Technical
Newsletters.·
.
It is possible that this material may contain referEtnce to, or information
about IBM products (machines and programs), programming, or services
that are not announced in your country. Such references or information
must not be construed to mean that IBM intends to announce such IBM
products, programming, or services in your country.
Publications are not stocked at the address below; requests for IBM
publications should be made to your IBM representative or to the IBM
branch office serving your locality.
.
A form for reader's comments is provided in Volume A01. Introduction. If
the form has been removed, comments may be addressed to IBM
Corporation, Processor MIM Development, Department X65, P.O. Box 6,
Endicott, NY, U.S.A. 13760. IBM may use or distribute whatever
information you s'upplyin any way it believes appropriate without incurring
any obligation to you.
.. ""'ft4
... .;JOt
81M 2676380
I ••.
I ~II
~
GA005
I
PN6i 693i8
2 of 2
II
I
ECA20558
01 Oct 84
.
~ Copyright IBM Corp. , 984
0000
)0.
() (J
OOOO()
-~
(y
o
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DC), 0 0
1
()O 0 0 () 0 0 0 0
J
o
irl-.....
t· ·z+oIIIIIIIIW._+
..............._~...............................................
" ........
'· '11...·...
·' W'.......-"""'"""'"'''"'"'''""'.,.....
' ""'"'....
11...
" ....
t"·""'frW'...
!!Hh"""f'"·""""W""",",""'"·....
·'''.....
lfIf.'±U
. ........
, ...
'H"' ........
• ....
u .....
',W....
yw
...
·""""m...
•............' _ _..........'...
' ,.......,W.........'·....
'!LJOOij'''''Uj··'lIlllW''*''''"·
1I""'""....
""""""'................""'"'"""""""'....
"ri"'"'...
2,'_"""''''·....
'''M...................
· ._
.....
,'/I!t.bt!IN
...................
_...' ....
'......
"'W..........
*:....j!!:MW'tllll.i
. . . . .6lJ.'Mb,I'ddtthlti&w.w
....
IltiltdO'LtyL.t!ht'&4b
Io:.-...'W...
' ..........
±w.IdIlIIO_...'...
I ...
w......
±HH..........
Ie.1i&tU
...'.....
,hW
...
"·"IoW
......
rl",iU...
--..:.w:.'II:I!"MWW,"oWI'!Wdll"""".....
' ' w '..,.'UNg!!....
' .....
IYfIlN...
HW"'"'HOW"',...
u "....
'M'WN...
' ....
whP...1.t .iioil'_......
" .....
·_y
......
w .
'!lu
..
.. .W
. .....
!
e . .,. . .N.w1rJlolllJllI',_ILHlimlIIJPWl"lP
...
·IfW....
!K..,nITo.wpn_i1'"""·H·_'W_/
.......
, .....
' ","",'",,,,,,,'....
' ....
t
O· 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 •
IJ
"'\ Ill!,hI!.4JU\iJUY'!!NN (,iwI
'l'lijllLlil!!j,y!
LUq""L·'M'i"lI"i"'''''UM''''iHY,,'ei'''W,,'''f'''1
00 • • • 0 0 0 0
LOC 011
LOCATIONS
Contents
.............................. .. .
lOC 012
Gate layouts •..••....••.. ••••.•••••.••..••••.••.•••.
Gate 01A ...........•.•....••••........•........•.....
Front View .............••.•......•.........•....••..
Right-Side View ••••...•.•••.........••....••••...••..
Rear View ....••.....•.•...............•••••.•.•••..
Gate 01B ...........................••...••••••.•..••.
Right-Side View •........••••..•..•••..•.••••••.•.•..•.
Rear View/Gate 01B Open ....••...•.•••..••.•••.•.••.••.
Gate Ole •................•.........•....•..•.........
Front View ...................•••••.•.••.•......•.....
Rear View ............•.....••••..•.•.•.............
Gates 010, 01F, 01G. and 01H •••.......................•..
Gate OlE ................•••.•..•....•....•.....•••...
lOC 015
LOe 015
lOe 015
LOe 015
lOC016
lOe 021
LOe 021
lOe021
lOe 022
LOe 022
LOe 022
LOe 025
LOe 026
Board layouts •..•••.••••••••••••••••• .•••••••••••••.
Board 01A-A 1 ............•......................••....
Functional Locations ..••••...............••....••.•.. ..
Board 01A-A2 .................•........••.............
Functional Locations ............•...•..••.••......•.....
BOCird 01 A-A3 •.........................•••... ...•. .' ...
Functional Locations ...........•...••.•••.....••.......
Board 01 A-A4 (1 Megabyte Cards) ..•..•....••.•..... ......•.
Functional Locations ..........•.....•.........•... ...•.
Board 01A-A4 (2 Megabyte Cards) .•..........••.......•.....
Functional Locations .......••............... .....••.•••
Board 01 A-A4 (1 and 2 Megabyte Cards Intermixed) ......•..•..•.
Functional Locations .......•................•••... ..•••
Board 01B-A 1 . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . . . . . . . .
Functional Locations ..............•...•.. ...•..........
Pin Layout for Boards 01 A-A 1 to 01 A-A4 and 01 B-A 1 .•..........
Board 01A-B 1 or 01A-B2 ................•................
Functional Locations ............•...... .•...............
Board 01A-B 1 or 01A-B2 Resistor Pin Layout ..•••........•.....
Board 01A-B1 or 01A-B2 Module Pin and I/O Signal Pin Layout ..... .
Board 01A-B 1 or 01A-B2 Terminals ........................•.
lOC 031
LOe 031
LOe 031
Loe 032
lOe 032
LOe 035
lOe 035
LOe 036
lOe 036
LOC 037
LOe 037
LOC 038
LOe 038
lOe 041
lOe 041
LOC 042
lOe 045
LOe 045
LOe 046
LOe 047
LOe 048
, "
Machine layout
Connectors
"
" "
."....................................... .
lOC 051
Top Card Crossover (TCC) Connectors •...•••.•••••••••••.• lOC 052
Service Panel
........................................
lOC 055
Operator Control Panel (OCP) •.••••••••••.••••••..•••.••• lOC 056
Power Supplies
.•••.•.•••••.•••••.•••... •••••••••••.• lOC 061
Sense Capacitors ...•.•.•••••••••.. ...•..•••..••••.••• lOC 062
Transformers •.•••••••.•••..•••...••..••••••••.•.•••. lOC 065
Primary Control Compartment (PCC)
• • • • • •••••
~
• • • • • •• I. • • • lOC 066
Relays and Circuit Protectors (CPs) ...•••..••..•......••... lOC 071
4381-3
B/M2676380
I~~g
C> Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GA010
LOC 011
LOC 012
Machine Layout
AFS107
B1
AMD
107
and
PS
Plenum Glte
111
PS
105
PS
10511PS II
106
AFS106
B2
and
PCC
Plenum Gate
Front View
Left Side View
4381-3
81M 2676380
IMI
1Seg
IPN
GA010
12
of
6169577
2
II
II
I
EC A20558
EC A20560
01 Oct 84 1·18 Feb 85
I
I
LOC 012
Cl Copyright IBM Corp, 1984
o
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1
(y
"),
>('J
0 000
nT!"!¥![llIDEVY·!!!'lP
'Pi·..··'ME'PI1DJ
WE....... 'f'.tm]]&¥lI M! . . ~mjliljlr
·.jIILJ!BV!PElII.JessnnmMm
,
"
,.
'.'
',,'''H
II'
'I'
..... ,,'''"
11.1.
In •
.Ii"''''''''''''
,Hd." ..··d
h
ml.l!,'"
,
E,.L
'h'
'ndirl
+m
"dJdU
d·"""·!']{
"t'WH·'d"'·!iW'U' ·f"Hf"·"·
c.•
~
frl'·!IjIi1i'NIHL·' l£IdWlIlIY"un ......... ,,'··AH
.. b±' ·r ·I!
'd,AA"!'
··'l!"ijUI'!J'"
. . .,.
1,+!lIUJ{'~
i
H
•
'H ·'ffi"!I'H"I1"I,.·.? ..,',' •• ' I
N!i,..¥'+,,,u·
.JlI,IIoI.,., Li"
'Lil# d..
Kffl!tl¥l!,bIlr!,M*4:f4.il
·h,
Ii
Ii
"iu'n"
TN
k",pn.tt.. *ieIHt b'U...! .......~J.A.LrlIl':
'yt·,t!"","C'YI£II
·oW' HI!
}II!"II [
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
LOC 015
Gate Layouts
Gate 01A
Front View
Right-Side View
It
--
]
-
..:--:
p
:-")
)
~
>
Al
~
,I
Al Board
II
II
--r'
A2 Board
>
IL,-
,-
--
- - -
:J[
I
;....r-
~
-
~
_I
I~
B2 Board
I
I
• I
I
I
1
~
1
II
~
A3 Board
-~
~N
~~
\!ltD
<{<{
~~ ~C;
...A3
J
'.~
!' ~
!I >
"
.. - -
II
>
II
>
I~)
]
AMD 103
<{ <{
~
~
I_I
A4 Board
I[ -
n
c
=
I--.J
-
-=
A2
I
•
- - - ][ -
I
C""-
~
,
~
>
J
]
II
]
)
--
I'
II
I~
---1
I(
106
I~ ~
>
~
c:
AMD
>
II
II
LJ,
=
:--2
)
r .-
~
II
L..-l
Bl Board
Gate 01 B
II
-
Gate Ole
-
,.....t:::;::::::===;;;::::::1~
oe-Air---O
Sensor
AMD : AMD
103
: 104
Gate OlA
sa ~l£ ~m ~~ u[) 0(3 BlS u
,...
CI)
CI~
NM
~tn
to ..... CX)CI
u uO 00 00 o 0 00
01 E Gate
Gate 01A Pin Side
(Behind Gate Ole)
4381
B/M 2676380
IMI
IPN
6169578
II
EC A20558I
~~~e~g~G~A~0~1~5__~.~1~of~2~__~.L.~0~1~O~ct~8~4~~.________L -______~______~______~
't CopYright IBM COtp. 1984
LOC 015
LOC 016
Gate 01A
Rear View
A 1 Board
AMD 107
c""I.
~Bl
A2 Board
.
Board
Interlock
PS104
A3 Board
0~
8280ard
I ........
A4Board
lnterlOck
PS105
AMD 104
AMD 101
AMD 102
4381
81M 2676380
I MI
~ GAOlS
I
PN 6169578
.20f2
II
EC A20558I
. ~.~0~1~O~ct~8~4~~.____~____L-__~____~________~______~~
lOC 016
~ Copynght IBM Corp , 984
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 (
'
y
O()OOOOOOO
··.""·'"HWtI'''Hf,'tttIHNHIf
M;WHi'·
fW..;wI'
· ..
··J.i/wIT--t'Bh·
''"j.''''',"8+z'" "'·· ..··,.riiL@Tt--:r"Y-'-':rl-o[Ij!hrrf441J4JL,IJ'·r ·,;W·'jC-fflU....
·[Jl!1"r U
!IlI'iDiWIHTMNIF"If.Jrrfl""H 1..T"[mg,,'rmm U F"ffTJ3K'w'UpDfm,mr"T'
+
.g
rtt4tri4H4
'
"
d,,'1t
"r
,
nl
I n WWtlLl'¥" r
[
I
HI!"'". H" ';'Hew' 'dld±mnl,wi.'/I."Y'dl{''''t .:'!4'"
III',
',up
'Iy¥
"
=44Hi+d'OM,II
1 ",'
Wilt' "
,I
If!
'tN' 101HI'Oi!
'HW'.,.'e .............. "rlriw..;!....4..~
"6hiilHHtttHeltl4:ld' ++W!4th*n'4't4dHilhY , til''' '"tit
'I,·
It"
tllt1""4dIW1H1(ldft!¥l!"'\""M""t"
'V"]J'Wd,t'JKoiHW
*
,j
"1,,1'
000000000000000000000000000.000000
LOC 021
Gate 018
Right-Side View
Rear View/Gate 01 B Open
AMD 106
Gate Ole
0"" Ai r--Q
AMD
103
Sensor
: AMD
I 104
Gate 01A
4381
81M 2676380
-e
I
MI
I
PN 6169579
II
EC A20558I
~S=eg~G~AO~20~.~1~of~2_ _~.~.0~1~Oc~t8~4~.~_ _~_ _ _ _~_ _ _ _~_ _ _ _~
COpyrIght IBM Corp. 1984
LOC 021
L
LOC 022
Gate 01C
Front View
Rear View
~,.
III
nge
Not Used
PS109
PS107
PS108
HingeTrI-------
-r-----~
t- I-~
r-+-+-
PS109
Not Used
PS108
PS107
Service Panel
AMD 105
AMD 105..
Service Panel
[
* CP2
,.----- ----- ---.----
-1-
TR102
Diskette
2
~
9~:a:J
I
I
A
. L __ ...1
I
(,--,
*TR104
I
I B I
L __ .J
I I
PS103
PS102
PS10l
PS103
Q TR102 *CP2
r-'
Diskette
1
PS102
Located Behind
Hing~
PS10l
l- t-
inge
I
(--1I
*TR104
I
C
I
L __ J
8
L _______________ _
*TR104A, B, C, and CP2
Only on all 50 Hz and 60 Hz Japan machines
I
B/M2676380Seg
-- - 4381
I _ __
MI
C Copynght IBM Corp. 1984
I
I .
. ~~
PN 6169579
GA0202~2
II
I I
I
__
.
I
EC A2055B
I
I
~~O~'~O~c~t~8~4~~~.~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
LOC 022
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000
""j!+iIM"trlW'IW' "',i!'!!'lllf"""LtI!Id'd""·'.u.l",u'''WffflW!5Lfi!~ "
'
Jr..
fWWHwe&-9uW"!!IL'
..
!
e 'I' "
!!
'"
t
l;!Jd'd'''!!
II!! '
11""
"
'!!""kIM,..".!
""t, I' .'
If ' , .
11 II, !!, 1"" !!N"JlH'"'''''' II'.. ""h""IIM. . . . . .;''' .. ". W"' .....'Mi+..y.!!J!.",,!'U!y .. ;:e,.,ji, .. "'q' .... ,.' •. ,
..
~;w!..L.W'1
'.UlJrlt.JIlW+..Li' ,,:;wMN#i!MIH!!WWw , r 4+)''' 'r 'II'
"witt lot
'&
!
l#llWl'w!i,* HI"
"1
i UUWli [
"'~I!qIH
1U'lepw,,,, ..' IN'''f''f''if''Rnr
II!
, !!'1M''''''''''
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
LOC 025
Gates 010, 01F. 01G, and 01H
EPO
0
1
0
Display
Console
Gate 01G
01G-CCA1
Optional
Displays
or Printers
Ext Int
EPa Plug
EMC Grounding Stud
4381-3
81M 2676380
CI Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
1 of 2
I
I
EC A20558
EC A20560
01 Oct 84 . 18 Feb 85 .
K03
K04
DD
0 DD
DDD
2:J
K05
K06
K07
K08
K09
K10
I
D
Con 0
8
Gate 01 F (Local Displays)
6169580
K02
4
0
6
PN
K01
0
Con9
5
ocP Cable
Front View
D D
DO
Gate 010 PCI Panel
LOC025
LOC 026
Gate 01E
AMO
107
PS
111 'PS
112
':"--"':;.::.,:~
Front View
Left Side View
II
r--------.;.--------pu 0
Channel
o
A2
A1
Channel
1
A3
A4
Channel
2
Channel
3
AS
A7
A6
A8
Channel
4
A9
B1
Channel
5
Channel
6
B2
84
B3
B5
Channel
7
B6
B7
PU 1
Channel
8
Channel
Channel
Channel
o
1
2
B8
C1
B9
C2
C3
C4
C5
Channel
3
C6 C7
C8
Channel
4
C9
01
Channel
5
Channel
6
02
04
03
05
Channel
7
Channel
8
06
08
07
09
Bus Tag Bus Tag Bus Tag Bus Tag Bus Tag Bus Tag Bus Tag Bus Tag Bus Tag Bus Tag Bus Tag Bus Tag Bus Tag Bus Tag Bus Tag Bus Tag Bus Tag Bus Tag
Gate 01 E (Channel Interface)
4381-3
B/M 2676380
r
IMI
L§!g GA025
I
fiN 6i 69580
2 of 2
ii
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
EC A20560
18 Feb 85
LOC 026
o Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
,OOOOOOO()OOOOOOO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OJ C 0 0 0 0 0
O).
Ji
\
\Ijl
'!!tiH4It&!t #'''''u''rr1ffW
*'" ,. 'H#*i"J¥*H'
... ' 5' "'itWM! \.,
.!H.L.
N't '1 til.
1,
,t&'Pt' .. ''if' 1ft" #tit trltrwtdtrH"
f
IfWIIHH
,"hi
, 't
! . 'e4t!tt¥k'\1\"5W.W"Lt .. tt-··
. h±?"' ..Y\u.,... ··bHffsnp·"wmFfff' UKnmJ'W"M'IW-REWV¢ .'"
""i!'MIIt\ftli.Mtjh,1
",
II '"
"s'Sror'. %,',,'
11"
tit! ..
,,'W""'M"
,I
"t'
l
«'W
II
··!""'d"."UWM',=riW'u'r:Hiw·"p ,.... '.
ct"
I"
'1*",'*'\
tr
"d"Il!1"I''''tf"'='
I"
*
b'I'! ..'.....I!IiIl:i!mkh..w'w"fh"t'
t, t'ttw#H;w, ", dtet
HI
It o'wid
I••• '
1.,l.Huft±!lHdW
I
!"I
"lb
.''U' ',,,,''
'1' "N""
1,,'.-••••
7"."'&'
t'.,
0 • • • • 0000000000 00.0000000 0 • • • 00000
LOC 031
Board Layouts
Top Card Connectors
Board 01 A-A 1
Position
BW/CW
BX/CX
BY/CY
Functional Locations
Channel To Channel Adapter (CTCA)
Card Locations:
82
C2
CTCAX
CTCAY
A
VA
II
VB
yJ
II
yl(
B
C
II
II
E
0
F
YC
YL
G
II
II
H
YO
YM
I(
L
II
II M
YE
YN
N
II
II
P
II
YF
II
YP
a
R
s
II
YG
ya
T
II
U
V
YH
YR
W
X
Bl/Cl
VW
VX
VY
Vl
Part Number
8645658
8645658
8645658
8645658
8645678
8645678
8645678
8645678
BW/CW
Maintenance Bias Control (MBC)
2
Cable Plug Pos.tions
3
YA
YB
YC
YO
Card Locations:
Reset Card
MBC
U2
V2
BX/CX
Card Plug Positions
A2
A3
A4
A5
B2
C2
02
E2
F2
G2
H2
J2
K2
L2
M2
N2
P2
Q2
R2
S2
T2
U2
V2
W2
X2
X3
X4
X5
X Bus I/O Cable
X Tag I/O Cable
Y Bus I/O Cable
Y Tag I/O Cable
CTCA X
CTCA Y
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Reset Card
MBC Card
Terminator Card
PPCCable
Service Panel Cable
Service Panel Cable
Operator Control Panel
4381
elM 2676380
I~~g
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GA030
BY/CY
4
vz
BZ/CZ
5
,--_ZA_--JI I
ZB
II
zc
II
zo
II
Note: Highlighted areas show the locations of Top Card
Crossover (TCC) Connectors.
I
PN 6169581
.10f2
II
.
ZE
II _ZF_...J11 _ZG_--JI I
I..-
L..
ZH
Channel X Bus I/O
Channel X Tag I/O
Spare
Spare
YE Spare
YF Spare
YG PS 10 1 Control
YH Airflow Sensor (AFS)/P.S 102
YJ Spare
YK Spare
YL Spare
YM Power Control Lines and MBC
YN Reset and T Lines
YP Spare
YO Spare
YR Spare
ZA Channel Y Bus I/O
ZB Channel Y Tag I/O
ZC CTCA Voltage Sense to/from PCC
ZO Spare
ZE Spare
ZF Volt Sense to MBC
ZG Spare
ZH Spare
EC A20558 \
~.~0~1~O~c~t~8~4~~.________~________~________~________~
LOC 031
LOC 032
I
I
Board 01 A-A2
YA
YJ
II
I!
~I
~I
c
A
DE
Functional Locations
YC
VL
II
II
YO
YM
II
II
GH
YE
YN
MN
II
II
VF
I~
II
VH
yp
I~
J
I
VR
a
.~~
DW/EW/FW
Diskette Drive Adapter (DDA)
Card Locations:
K2
L2
Card Locations:
ZA
02, R2
I
J
ZB
II
zc
II
ZD
II
ZE
ZH
ZF
Note: Highlighted areas show the locations of Top Card
Crossover (TCC) Connectors.
Cable Locations:
YN
Power Control Adapter (PCA)
Serial Number Card
Latch Display Card
Card Locations:
Card Locations:
Card Location:
Local Channel Adapter (LCA)
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
Card Locations:
Cable Locations:
G4
Isolation
Isolation
Sense
Sense
Interface
C2
C4
02
E2
F2
A2,A3,A4,A5,
B2,B3,B4,B5
V2
X2
W2
F4
Support Bus Adapter (SBA)
Card Locations:
SBA 2
SBA 1
Convert Card
S2
T2
U2
Cable Locations:
Remote Support Facility Adapter (RSF)
Cable Locations:
YE,YF,YG,YH
Card Locations:
from CH/SP
to CH/SP
Tailgate
Tailgate
Part Number
8645778
8645779
8645777
8645776
8645777
Card Plug Positions
L....I L....I L-
LCA
LCA
LCA
LCA
YA
YB
YC
YD
YE
YF
YG
YH
YJ
YK
5
Device Cluster Adapter (DCA)
LCA 1
LCA2
LCA4
Card Location:
Position
DW/EW/FW
DX/EX/FX
GY/HY
KX,LX,KY,L Y,SX,TX
VX/WX, VY/WY, VZ/WZ
ZD
ZF
Ports
Cable Plug Positions
Top Card Connectors
Cable Locations:
Drive 1
Drive 2
Support Processor Storage (SPS) (Volume 1)
J2
~~
OlClElC/FX
Drive 1
Drive 2
I
I
YO
YR
ZG
ZH
P2,04
Support Processor (SP) and SP Storage
(Volume 0)
Cable Locations:
Card Locations:
ZE
H2
A2
A3
A4
A5
B2
B3
B4
B5
C2
C4
D2
E2
F2
F4
G4
H2
J2
K2
L2
M2
N2
P2
02
Q4
R2
S2
T2
U2
V2
W2
. X2
PCA Cable
PCA Cable
PCA Cable
PCA Cable
PCA Cable
Spare Digitals Term
Not Used
PCA Cable
PC Isolation Card
PC Isolation Card
PC Sense
PC Sense
PC Interface
Serial Read Card
Latch Display Card
Support Processor
Support Processor Storage
DDA 1
DDA 2
Reserved
Reserved
Common Communication Adapter (RSF)
DCA
38LS (RSF)
DCA
SBA 2
SBA 1
Convert Card
LCA 1
LCA4
LCA 2
MBC
Reset
Volt Convert to PC
Volt Sense
SBA EXT
SBA EXT
SBA EXT Processor
Spare
Volt Sense
Spare
Yl Spare
YM Spare
YN DCA
YP SPA Spare
YO LCA from CH/SP
YR LCA to CH/SP
ZA Spare
ZB Spare
ZC SP Display/Service Panel
ZD DDA 1
ZE RSF
ZF DDA 2
ZG LCA Tailgate
ZH LCA Tailgate
iI''l
i:.1
A .... n ..
"~Ol
81M 2676380
IMig
Se
GA030
,i PN 6169581
,I ,i
.20f2
.~.=0~1=O=ct~8~4~.____~~~______~__~__~____~~
EC A20558
I'
II
LOC 032
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
o c'
( '~ ()
.'....
)"
(~jy'
..
()OOOOOOOOO O()OOOOOOOO
o
0 0 0-0 0 0 0 0
"" , , ( '., III I MIM t"W' fUM dlHllf•
o
0 •
...,*'t'..W .. 'f.MIININ" ''''''IM! '"
"9""*".
't
i"',.
!++Ilij',I',!!fi'"k'I'.6
I'd
Hrl'
at!
"mn'h'fNf"&W!
'[WNW,.".",
L"
'.'
""LS' it/dttEy'"
"'id'e#' I
rif"it+4hd4t
'jPm.!l.:*zrlltitdMftr'z ±h
''it',
tlWt"erdtcwb"ct",'W''''r1t4''·"~Lzt!!,,".,it:*,=M'':Mre'dW"W+MttM"fHtfl! fl W, u 'UW'='H'IN"M'oW u lw
1,t'W'rlilltfz '\
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0" 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
000000000
LOC 035
Card Plug Positions
Board 01A-A3
VA
VJ
Functiona/Locations
II
II
C
VB
VK
II
II
vc
VL
F
0
"
VM
II
m
II
vo
II
II
K
VE
VN
M
II
II
VF
VP
R
N
II
II
II
II
YG
va
T
U
V
VH
YR
W
x
IF A Channel Cards for PUO
Card Locations:
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Chann~8
K2
E2
F2
G2
H2
J2
P2
Q2
R2
4
5
Scan Cards
Card Locations:
Channel 0-5
Channel 6-8
~
II
u
II
~
II
~
II
~
II
II
ZG
ZH
N2
N4
Cable Plug Positions
Oscillator Card
YA
YB
YC
YO
YE
YF
YG
YH
YJ
YK
YL
YM
Card Location:
L2
4381-3
81M 2676380
IMI
Spare
Spare
Spare
Oscillator
Oscillator
Oscillator
Spare
Power Sense
Channel 3 Bus/Tag
Channel 4 Bus/Tag
Channel 5 Bus/Tag
Channel 0 Bus/Tag
Channel
Channel
Channel
Spare
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Spare
6 Bus/Tag Out
7 Bus/Tag Out
8 Bus/Tag Out
3
4
5
0
6
7
8
Bus/Tag
Bus/Tag
Bus/Tag
Bus/Tag
Bus/Tag
Bus/Tag
Bus/Tag
In
In
In
In
In
In
In
02
R2
S2
T2
U2
V2
V3
V4
V5
W2
W3
W4
W5
X2
X3
X4
X5
Spare
Special Access
IPU Oscillator
Spare
Channel 2 Bus/Tag Out
Channel 1 Bus/Tag Out
Channel 1 Bus/Tag In
Channel 2 Bus/Tag In
Channel Control 3,4,5
Channel Control 3,4,5
Channel Control 3,4,5
Channel Control 3,4,5
Channel Control 0,1,2
Channel Control 0,1,2
Channel Control 0,1,2
Channel Control 0,1,2
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 0
Oscillator
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Scan Channel 0-5
Scan Channel 6-8
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8
Spare
Spare
Spare
Channel Control 6,7,8
Channel Control 6,7,8
Channel Control 6,7,8
Channel Control 6,7,8
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
I
PN 6169582 II EC A20558I EC A20560 I
L.~Se::.:g~G~A::.;O~3:::.:5::"----I.....:1:...;o~f:....:4:!..-_ _--I. . 01 Oct 84 . 18 Feb 85 .
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
Out
Out
Out
Out
YN
YP
YO
YR
ZA
ZB
ZC
ZO
ZE
ZF
ZG
ZH
A2
A3
A4
A5
B2
B3
B4
B5
C2
C3
C4
C5
02
03
04
05
E2
F2
G2
H2
J2
K2
L2
L4
M2
M3
M4
M5
N2
N4
P2
LOC 035
LOC 036
Board 01A-A4 (1 Megabyte Cards)
Functional Locations
YA
I I
YB
I I
YC
II
YO
I I
YE
I I
YF
YJ
II
YK
II
YL
II
YM
II
YN
II
yp
I
II
I
YG
YO
II
II
V
A
Cable Plug Positions
YH
YR
W
X
Storage Cards
Card Locations:
4 Megabytes
4 Megabytes
4 Megabytes
4 Megabytes
8 Megabytes
8 Megabytes
8 Megabytes
8 Megabytes
12 Megabytes
12 Megabytes
12 Megabytes
12 Megabytes
16 Megabytes
16 Megabytes
16 Megabytes
16 Megabytes
0-3
4-7
8-11
12-15
0-3
4-7
8-11
12-15
0-3
4-7
8-1.1
12-15
0-3
4-7
8-11
12-15
W2
R2
K2
E2
V2
Q2
J2
02
U2
P2
H2
C2
T2
N2
G2
B2
3
4
5
ZA
) [
ZB
II
ZC
II
ZD
)(
ZE
II
ZF
)I
ZG
II
ZH
Card Plug Positions
YA
YB
YC
YO
YE
YF
YG
YH
YJ
YK
YL
YM
YN
. YP
YO
YR
ZA
ZB
ZC
ZD
ZE
ZF
ZG
ZH
Oscillator/Channel Spec
Spare
Spare
BSM Control
BSM Control
BSM Control
BSM Control!Address
Spare
Spare
Spare
BSM Contrail Address
BSM Control!Address
BSM Data Bytes 6/7
BSM Data Bytes 4/5
BSM Data Bytes 2/3
. BSM Data Bytes 0/1
Power
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Terminator Cards
A2
A4
B2
C2
02
E2
F2
F4
G2
H2
J2
K2
L2
M2
M4
Card Locations:
A2,A4,F2,F4,M2,M4,S2,S4.
4381-3
81M 2676380
1lUll
I~;g
ICl Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
II:: 1 II::OE::O,)
I I 1:,.. ')nE::E::O 1:,.. ')nc I:n
I;~~----' II~~~~~~~~:~;~;~;~_~_;~;~~=~~U~~~~U~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
I DIU
GA035
Terminator Card (Odd)
Terminator Card (Odd)
Data Bytes 12-15 (16 megabytes)
Data Bytes 12-15 (12 megabytes)
Data Bytes 12-15 (8 megabytes)
Data Bytes 12-15 (4 megabytes)
Terminator Card (Odd)
Terminator Card (Odd)
Data Bytes 8-11 (16 megabytes)
Data Bytes 8-11 (12 megabytes)
Data Bytes 8- 1 1 (8 megabytes)
Data Bytes 8-11 (4 megabytes)
Clock
Terminator Card (Even)
Terminator Card (Even)
1\
N2
P2
Q2
R2
S2
S4
T2
U2
V2
W2
X2
X3
X4
X5
Data Bytes 4-7 (16 megabytes)
Data Bytes 4-7 (12 megabytes)
Data Bytes 4-7 (8 megabytes)
Data Bytes 4-7 (4 megabytes)
Terminator Card (Even)
Terminator Card (Even)
Data Bytes 0-3 (16 megabytes)
Data Bytes 0-3 (12 megabytes)
Data Bytes 0-3 (8 megabytes) .
Data Bytes 0-3 (4 megabytes)
BSM Data Bytes 8/9
BSM Data Bytes 10/11
BSM Data Bytes 12/13
BSM Data Bytes 14/15
1\
LOC 036
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OOOOOOOOO() 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
, 'WM'''d''''''!t''I''''d''''9''''W''W,,''
'W"t'.,fUII!!!''''''.;... ..fMI,IU'!.,'J .. ''.y·.+I''rinl' # l''j"
r'f
·I4M"
LLf
.,
,
'1'''
III
v,'"'
-'1-"""
·tt' H±..,;,e;;, l:z
PI,'·"Mr',
+d
h
d'triti'.HH,
"I
rl'±izAA*W+!b'd'If£" 'dl"t't'Wtt'r7¥W'·tI'Tt
I
I·"'*,,:':
"".,."*'8';",."#..,,+....... ,,
\,
'&
0000000000000000000000000 000000800
LOC 037
Board 01 A-A4 (2 Megabyte Cards)
YA
II
YB
II
vc
11
VK
II
VL
1...-_----1
Functiona/Locations
F
G
I ,-I_vD____1I
II
II
H
M
J
YE
II
YF
VN
I1
YP
Q
N
II
II
R
S
va
I :::1==Y=H~
I 1...._Y_R----l
ZG
II
YG
T
Storage Cards
2
Card locations:
8 Megabytes 0-3
8 Megabytes 4-7
8 Megabytes 8-11
8 Megabytes 12-15
16 Megabytes 0-3
16 Megabytes 4-7
16 Megabytes 8-11
16 Megabytes 12-15
24 Megabytes 0-3
24 Megabytes 4-7
24 Megabytes 8-11
24 Megabytes 12-15
32 Megabytes 0-3
32 Megabytes 4-7
32 Megabytes 8-11
32 Megabytes 12-15
W2
R2
K2
E2
V2
Q2
J2
02
U2
P2
H2
C2
T2
N2
G2
B2
3
4
5
ZA
II
Z8
II
ze
II
ZD
II
ZE
II
ZF
II
ZH
Card Plug Positions
Terminator Cards
A2
A4
B2
C2
02
E2
F2
F4
G2
H2
J2
K2
L2
M2
M4
Card Locations:
A2,A4,F2,F4,M2,M4,S2,S4.
4381-3
B/M 2676380
I
I
II
I
Terminator Card (Odd)
Terminator Card (Odd)
Data Bytes 12-15 (32 megabytes)
Data Bytes 12-15 (24 megabytes)
Data Bytes 12-15 (16 megabytes)
Data Bytes 12-15 (8 megabytes)
Terminator Card (Odd)
Terminator Card (Odd)
Data Bytes 8-11 (32 megabytes)
Data Bytes 8-11 (24 megabytes)
Data Bytes 8-11 (16 megabytes)
Data Bytes 8-11 (8 megabytes)
Clock
Terminator Card (Even)
Terminator Card (Even)
X3
X4
X5
YA
YB
YC
YO
YE
YF
YG
YH
YJ
YK
YL
YM
YN
YP
YO
YR
ZA
ZB
ZC
ZD
ZE
ZF
ZG
ZH
Oscillator/Channel Spec
Spare
Spare
BSM Control
BSM Control
BSM Control
BSM Control!Address
Spare
Spare
Spare
BSM Control/Address
BSM Control!Address
BSM Data Bytes 6/7
BSM Data Bytes 4/5
BSM Data Bytes 2/3
BSM Data Bytes 0/1
Power
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Data Bytes 4-7 (32 megabytes)
Data Bytes 4-7 (24 megabytes)
Data Bytes 4-7 (16 megabytes)
Data Bytes 4-7 (8 megabytes)
Terminator Card (Even)
Terminator Card (Even)
Data Bytes 0-3 (32 megabytes)
Data Bytes 0-3 (24 megabytes)
Data Bytes 0-3 (16 megabytes)
Data Bytes 0-3 (8 megabytes)
BSM Data Bytes 8/9
BSM Data Bytes 10/11
BSM Data Bytes 12/13
BSM Data Bytes 14/15
I
MI
PN6169582
EC A20558
EC A20560
L.:S::.:e::.::ga.-..::G::;A:.:::0:.::3:.:::5_..J.L..:3:...o::.:f~4.:......._ _....I• • 01 Oct 84 . 18 Feb 85 .
C> Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
,
N2
P2
Q2
R2
S2
S4
T2
U2
V2
W2
X2
Cable Plug Positions
LOC 037
.:tf/F .
LOC 038
Board 01 A-A4 (1 and 2 Megabyte Cards Intermixed)
"4'"
Functions/Locstions
~I
YB
Storage Cards
~I
YK
II
II
DE
F
ze
II
ABC
YC
I~
~
I
YF
YL..
Ir-
~
I
YP
I I
YO
I L..!!!
II
ZE
)1
ZF
II
ZG
II
G
I I
YG
....."
I
L.!!!
i""--
H
Card Locations:
4 Megabytes
4 Megabytes
4 Megabytes
4 Megabytes
8 Megabytes
8 Megabytes
8 Megabytes
8 Megabytes
16 Megabytes
16 Megabytes
16 Megabytes
16 Megabytes
24 Megabytes
24 Megabytes
24 Megabytes
24 Megabytes
0-3
4-7
8- 1 1
12-16
0-3
4-7
8-11
12-15
0-3
4-7
8-11
12-15
0-3
4-7
8-11
12-15
W2
R2
K2
E2
V2
02
J2
02
U2
P2
H2
C2
T2
N2
G2
82
3
4
5
ZA
One Megabyte Cards (16 or 24 Mb Storage)
)1
zc
ZD
ZH
Card Plug ,Positions
Card Locations:
A2
A4
B2
C2
02
E2
F2
F4
G2
H2
J2
K2
L2
M2
M4
D2,E2,J2,K2,02,R2,V2,W2.
Two Megabyte Cards (16 Mb Storage)
Card Locations:
C2,H2,P2,U2.
Two Megabyte Cards (24 Mb Storage)
Card Locations:
B2,C2,G2,H2,N2,P2,T2,U2.
Terminator Card (Odd)
Terminator Card (Odd)
Data Bytes 12-15 (24 megabytes)
Data Bytes 12-15 (16 megabytes)
Data Bytes 12-15 (8 megabytes)
Data Bytes 12-15 (4 megabytes)
Terminator Card (Odd)
Terminator Card (Odd)
Data Bytes 8-11 (24 megabytes)
Data Bytes 8-11 (16 megabytes)
Data Bytes 8-11 (8 megabytes)
Data Bytes 8-11 (4 megabytes)
Clock
Terminator Card (Even)
Terminator Card (Even)
N2
P2
02
R2
S2
S4
T2
U2
V2
W2
X2
X3
X4
X5
Cable Plug Positions
YA Oscillator/Channel Spec
YB Spare
YC Spare
YO 8SM Control
YE BSM Control
YF 8SM Control
YG 85M Control!Address
YH Spare
YJ Spare
YK Spare
YL 85M Control!Address
YM 85M Control!Address
YN B5M Data Bytes 6/7
YP BSM Data Bytes 4/5
YO B5M Data Bytes 2/3
YR B5M Data Bytes 0/1
ZA Power
ZB Spare
ZC Spare
ZD Spare'
ZE Spare
'ZF .Spare
ZG . Spare
ZH.' Spare
Data Bytes 4-7 (24 megabytes)
Data Bytes 4-7 (16 megabytes)
Data Bytes 4-7 (8 megabytes)
Data Bytes 4-7 (4 megabytes)
Terminator Card (Even)
Terminator Card (Even)
Data Bytes 0-3 (24 megabytes)
Data Bytes 0-3 (16 megabytes)
Data Bytes 0-3 (8 megabytes)
Data Bytes 0-3 (4 megabytes) .
BSM Data Bytes 8/9
BSM Data Bytes 10/11
BSM Data Bytes 12/13
BSM Data Bytes 14/15
Terminator Cards
Card Locations:
A2,A4,F2,F4,M2,M4,S2,S4.
4381-3
B/M 2676380
@
1M!
1Seq
Copyright :BM Corp. '984
GA035
I PN 6169582 II
14 of 4
II
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
I
I
EC A20560
18 Feb 85
I
I
LOC 038
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000
,.,,,,,,,.,,*,,.,,•. 1,. k'ObUt!::!!t:!fc!
'"I''NU'''''
" 'P
H"fJjnu".JdWn! '"
liP
" i ",.uiu""!!,,,".
'"
"<'ti"lt'H'
(p'.''''''''''''
Uld:'...."U,+.'.U ..
#
.
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
LOC 041
Card Plug Positions
Board 01 B-A 1
II
II
YA
Functions/Locations
YJ
A
IFA Channel Cards for PU1
B
c
II
II
YB
VK
E
0
F
vc
VL
G
H
II
II
II
vo
II
VM
K
YE
L
VN
M
N
II
II
P
II
II
VF
VP
R
Q
S
II
II
VG
va
T
U
V
YH
YR
W
Card Locations:
2
Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8
K2
E2
F2
G2
H2
J2
P2
02
R2
3
05
4
Scan Cards
Card Locations:
Channel 0-5
Channel 6-8
N2
N4
5
Cable Plug Positions
YA
YB
YC
YO
YE
YF
YG
YH
YJ
YK
YL
YM
YN
YP
YO
YR
ZA
ZB
ZC
ZO
ZE
ZF
ZG
ZH
ZA
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Power Sense
Channel 3 Bus/Tag Out
Channel 4 aus/Tag Out
Channel 5 Bus/Tag Out
Channel 0 Bus/Tag Out
Channel 6 Bus/Tag Out
Channel 7 Bus/Tag Out
Channel 8 Bus/Tag Out
Spare
Channel 3 Bus/Tag In
Channel 4 Bus/Tag In
Channel 5 Bus/Tag In
Channel 0 Bus/Tag In
Channel 6 Bus/Tag In
Channel 7 Bus/Tag In
Channel 8 Bus/Tag In
Spare
4381-3
81M 2676380
I~~g
~ Copyright IBM CorP. 1984
x
A2
A3
A4
A5
B2
B3
B4
B5
C2
C3
C4
C5
02
03
04
ZB
II
ZC
II
zo
II
ZE
II
ZF
II
ZG
II
ZH
./
IPN
GA040
II
E2
F2
G2
H2
J2
K2
L2
L4
M2
M3
M4
M5
N2.
N4
P2
Q2
R2
S2·
T2
U2
V2
V3
V4
V5
W2
W3
W4
W5
X2
X3
X4
X5
Spare
Special Access
Spare
Spare
Channel 2 Bus/Tag Out
Channel 1 Bus/Tag Out
Channel 1 Bus/Tag In
Channel 2 Bus/Tag In
Channel Control 3,4,5
Channel Control 3,4,5
Channel Control 3,4,5
Channel Control 3,4,5
Channel Control 0,1,2
Channel Control 0,1,2
Channel Control 0,1,2
Channel Control 0,1,2
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 0
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Scan Channel 0-5
Scan Channel 6-8
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8
Spare
Spare
Spare
Channel Control 6,7,8
Channel Control 6,7,8
Channel Control 6,7,8
Channel Control 6, 7,8
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
6169583
1 of 2
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
EC A20560
18 Feb 85
LOC 041
LOC 042
Pin layout for Boards 01A-A 1 to 01A-A4 and
01B-A1
YH
YG
YE
YF
......... ............
·...........
·...........
........
.
.......
.
.
.
.....
·
.......
......... ·.........
......... ·...........
VR
YN
YP
YO
·.........
·...........
·.......
·......... ·........... ·...........
x
W
v
T
U
S
R
a
p
N
M
YO
·...........
.
.......
·...........
YM
·...........
·...........
L
K
J
.....
·...........
·........... .....
.
.......
.
.......
.......
·........... ·...........
·........... ·......... .........
·.........
YC
YB
,,~
06
07
08
YL
YK
YJ
11
G
H
F
0
E
C
B
A
°1
13
02
13
D B
D B
02
·0
0.
13
02
13
D B
D B
..
....................
............
ZH
ZG
ZF
.................... ...........
.
.
......
.
............ ........... .
ZE
ZD
ZC
........
.. ......
...-...
........
.
......
............ ........... .
ZB
ZA
~
02
13
02
03
04
Note: Board/Retention Cover hardware may be present and may have to
be removed to probe pins. For removal of the Board/Retention Cover, see
Vol. A07, Removals and Replacements.
4381-3
81M 26763·80
I~~
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
I
pN 6169583
GNI),{I)
2 of 2
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
LOC 042
"OOI()OOOOOOOOOOOO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
00000000000-·0000 0000000000 000000000
LOC 045
Board 01 A-B 1 or 01 A-B2
o
Functiona/Locations
nBB~ ~~G~~ ~~G~~ ~~[:]E~ ~~G;~ ~
Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU)
U~~EJ~~
Module Location:
HE
Cache
onUCJoo~
B~GJ:ROMB B:Q~B
8~8;B R~c:J:8 no
[J ~ 8SM
B.. ,.B BJM o.lj 8," cu8 U
Module Locations:
Cache 0/1
Cache 2/3
Cache 4/5
Cache 6/7
MA
ME
RA
RE
n
B2~J~B
B.:[:J:8 B:G~B B:[:]:~8 B::[;]=B n
u B..
u.B B.. aRB B.. "B 8,. OR8 B.. ,,8 U
Channels
o fJ ~
Module Locations:
Channel Controls
Channel Interface 0-5
Channel Interface 6-8
~~8~~ ~~EJ~~ ~~[;];~~ ~;~~~~ u
8~G:R
8:8~8
B~~G;~R
RFu8~8
ov8 BNV
Lv8 BJV
Gv8 BEv
evB
lJ D HE Bsv
RN
RS
VN
o
Module Side
Channel Data Buffer (COB)
Control Storage (CS) Control
Error Checking and Correction 2 (ECC 2)
Module Location:
Module Location:
OS
VE
Directory Lookaside Table (DlAT)
Keys
Module Location:
Module locations:
MN
HN
Error Checking and Correction 1 (ECC 1)
local Storage External (lS EXT)
Clock
Module Location:
Module Location:
Module Location:
RJ
HJ
Module Location:
OA
CREG
Module Locations:
CREG
CREG
CREG
CREG
0
1
ON
HS
OJ
MS
2
3
I~~g
CI Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
Module Location:
DE
Shifter
Module Location:
HA
Module Plug Positions
OA COB
DE PUSAR
OJ
ON
OS
HA
HE
HJ
HN
HS
MA
ME
MJ
MN
MS
RA
RE
RJ
RN
RS
VE
VN
CREG 2
CREG 0
CS Control
Shifter
ALU
LS EXT
Keys
CREG 1
Cache 0/1
Cache 2/3
Clock
OLAT/OIR
CREG 3
Cache 4/5
Cache 6/7
ECC 1
Channel Control
Channel Interface 0/5
ECC 2
Channel Interface 6/8
Cable Plug Positions
MJ
4381-3
B/M 2676380
Processing Unit Storage Address Register (PUSAR)
GA045
I
VA
VJ
VS
WA
WJ
WS
II
PN 6169584
EC A20558
EC A20562
.10f4
.~.~0~1~O~c~t~8~4~~~3~0~A~u~9~8~5~____________~________-L_________~
LOC 045
LOC 046
Board 01A-B1 or01A-B2 Resistor Pin Layout
Row Number
Pin
1
4
Number
us
I AOl
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
A02
A03
A04
A05
A06
A07
Aoa
UT
I AOl
•
•
•
•
uu
Aoa
•
I AOl
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AD8
UV
1AOl
Aoa
o
o
0 000
3 2
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• ••
• ••
• • •
• • •••
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
1
•
•
•
•
1
1
9
8
o
0 0 0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
• • •
•••
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • •
4 3
765
•
•
•
•
•
• • • • •
• • • • • • •
• • • • • • •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • • •
• • • • •
• • • • •
• • • • •
• • • • •
• • • • •
• • • • •
• • • • •
• • • • •
• • • • •
• • • • •
• • • • •
• • • • •
• • • • •
• • • • •
• • • • •
• • • • •
2
1
BB;
o
~SA[J0A~ ~NAGLA~ ~JA[:JGA~ ~EAGCA~
~ ~:~GJ~~ ~:GJ~~ ~::G]~~ ~;~GJ;~~ ~:~~:~ ~
WA
UB
A
VA
XE
CJ
uc
~, GA04S
1
PN 61, 69'584
,2 pf 4
I(
',jY
",1
')I
rf'~
'\jJ
o
(J
(':~
00
"\
('31
NB
NC
MA
LB
LC
JB
JC
00
NO
LO
Jo
UE
SE
OE,
NE
LE
JE
J
UL
UM
~ :~L:J:
~SJ
OJ~ ~NJ
5K
OK
SL Q O L
5M
OM
HA
GB
GC
ED
EC
GO
ED
co
EE
CE
GE
u~ ~JJ GJ~ ~EJ
NK
LK
NLQLL
NM
LM
JK
GK
JL Q G L
JM
GM
EK
OA
C8
CC
CJ~ ~
~ BB~
XR
UT01A03
ws
UR
uus
UT
VS,
UV
:L.:J~~
SR
OR
:~LJ~~
NR
LR
~~ L:J:~
JR
GR
ADl
A02
CA
CJ
AD3
A04
AOS
AOS
A07
AD8
AOl
:~L:J: ~
ER
CR
CB
J
~sssuGauOS~ ~NSNu8LULS~ ~JS c::JGUGS~ ~ESEu8cucs~'
ST
aT
ov
5V
NT
NV
LT
JT
GT
ET'
CT
LV
JU
JV
GV
EV
cv
0 0
3 2
CK
ELQCL
EM
CM
o
Pin
XNnUN~ ~SNnaN~ ~NNnLN~ ~JNnGN~ ~ENnCN~
AD8
A01
o
Module Side
CC
ADa
AOl
CD
ADa
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
Terminating Resistor
ao or 120 Ohm
EC A2055Sj EC, A,:,2.56,2
01 0:« 84
3' /It
at
I
I
LOC 046
~ Copyright IB-M Corp,HHl4
r' 0
08
OC
so
UK
VJ
RA
UO
;
B
B
~
WJ
SB
SC
Terminating Resistor 80 Ohm
43'81-3
B/M 26763'86
Row
Number
o
O~O
o o o
OOIOO()O 0) 00 OOOO()O
o
00
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
LOC 047
Board 01 A-B 1 or 01 A-B2 Module Pin and 110 Signal Pin Layout
Row Number
o
0o 0
~ 8EG~8
8:G~8
D HE Bso
ODS SNO
LoB
~ ~;GJ~~ ~; 8E~ ~~~C:J~~ ~
Row Number
Pin
9876543210
Number
• • • • • • • • • • -A1
• • • • • • • • • • B1
• • • • • • • • • • B2
0
• • • • • • • • • • B3
• • • • • • • • • • -B4A 2
CJ
lJ
8SM
•• BHM
,.8
••••••••••
• • • • • • • • • • B5
• • • • • • • • • • -86A 3
• • • • • • • • • • 87
XNGJUN~
~SNGON~ ~NNGLN~
••••••••••
xo
ua
. sa
• • • • • • • • • • 88
• • • • • • • • • • B9
• • • • • • • • • • -A4
NS
• • • • • • • • • • C1
••••••••••
~r=l~~~
• • • • • • • • • • C_C~~A5-----L~B ~
• • • • • • • • • • C4
••••••••••
• • • • • • • • • • C5
C6
• • • • • • • • • • -A6
Module Side
• • • • • • • • • • C7
••••••••••
• • • • • • • • • • CB
• • • • • • • • • -C9A 7
•••••••••
o~.U0 qp
HB R~[;];R8 R:D~8
~
XP
.uP
SP
VN
RN
XA
UA
SA
OP
NP
00
NO
OR
NR
BB
B ~
WS9A7
,
~
":
Note: All Ax pins are at ground potential.
I/O Cables Example WS Position
SuL...:..Jou
SV
OV
~
NT
NU
NV
LP
MN
LO
LR
E
JAJB r:l.A GA~
GB
c
o
I
I
Il...Q.!
~ EC
MI
PN 6169584
L,.S;:;;,8;:;;,9::L-G
::;A;.,.:..::.0...:.4;:;;,5_-,-_3~o;.:.f...;4~_ _--i_
10 Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
A20558
Oct 84
EC A20562
30 Aug 85
A
321098765432109876543210987654321098765432
JCDGC
JO
•
• •
•
• •
• • •
• •
•
•
• • • • • •
•
• •
• • •
•
• • • •
• •
• • • • • • • • • • •
•
• •
• •
• • •
• • • • •
•
• • • •
• • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • •
•
• • • •
• • •
• • •
• •
• • • • • •
•
•
• • • • •
• • • • •
• • •
• • • •
•
• • • • • •
•
•
• • •
•
•
•
• • • •
•
•
•
• •
• • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • •
•
• • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• •
• •
• • • • • • • • • •
•
•
•
• • • • •
• • • • • •
• • • •
•
• • • • • • • • • • • • •
• •
• • • •
• • •
• • • • • •
• •
• • • •
• • • • • • • • •
• • • • • •
• •
•
• • •
• • • • • •
•
• • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • ••••
•
• • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • •
• •
• • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • •
• • •
• • • • • •
•
•
• • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • •
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
• • • •
• • • •
• • • • • • • • • • •
•
• • • • • • •
• • •
• • • • • •
• • •
•
•
• • •
• • • • • • •
•
• • • •
•
•
• • • • • • •
• •
• • •
• • • • • • •
• • • • • •
•
•
•
• • • • • • • • • • •
•
•
• • • • •
•
• •
•
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • • •
• • • • • • •
• • • •
• •
•
• • • • • • • • • •
•
•
• •
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
• •
• • • • • • • • • •
•
•
•
• •
• • • • • • •
• • • • •
•
• • • • • • •
•
• • • • • • • •
• • • • • • •
• • • • • • • •
•
• •
• • • • • • •
• • •
• • •
•
JeJF
GE~
GF
L...::J
JGOGG
JH
GH
R8::GJ~A
8=GJ:
S,. G.B B,. 0.8
~ ~G:
IN
JP
Pin
Number
GO
GN~
GP
~
ES
cs~
EV
CV
~~8~
no
~
· '.
Module MS Example
4381-3
elM 2676380
B
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
MSB638
LOC 047
lOC 048
Board 01A-B1 or 01A-B2 Terminals
A1 Board
B1 Board
A2 Board
Interlock
A3 Board
B2 Board
Interlock
A4 Board
PS105
AMO 104
AMD 101
AMD 102
Rear View
01A-B2
Module Side
4381-3
81M 2676380
I
MI
. Seg GA045
CI Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
I
PN 6169584
. 4 of 4
EC A20558
L,.....;;;0;..;.1....;O;..;c:;.:.t...;;8:...;4_&...-::.=...;.:=J;L..:;;;:::.......L
I
]
LOC 048
() 0 () 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 OOOOiOOOOO
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
LOC 051
Connectors
3·Pin
2·Pin
iIDr
i
(]0(]
~
Locating
Jack
Plug Pin
(Pin Side)
(Wiring Side)
2
1
CD
Jack
Plug
J~
3
(Wiring Side.
Plug
(Wiring Side)
(Pin Side)
Jack
'Pin Side)
Plug
Jack
(Wiring Side)
Connected
(Pin Side)
Jack .
(Pin Side)
Plug
(pin Side)
8·Pin
A
8
15-Pin
g·Pin
0
0
0
2
0
0
3
0
0
4
0
o
o
o
o
o
o
Plug
(Wiring Side)
Connected
Jack
. Plug
(Wiring Side)
(Pin Side)
00
0
o 0
o
Jack
(Pin Side)
Plug
(Wiring Side)
Jack
(Pin Side)
Jack
Plug
(Wiring Side)
(Pin Side)
Wiring Side
0
0
0
0
0
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
o 0
00
00
00
o 0
00 18
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
B A
Diskette
2 x 18 Position
Edge Connector
4381-3
B/M2676380
CC;
12·Pin
1
00.0
00000
00000@
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
10
MI
I
PN 6169585
11
12
EC A20558
Female Plug
OCP Jack (Pin Side)
13
EC A20560
~S~e~g~G~A~O~5~O~~.~1~o~f~2____~~O~1~O~ct~8~4~~1~8~F~eb~85~~~~~~________~______~
Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
14
25
'@)OOOO @
@OOO@)
@O@
7
12-Position
Edge Connector
I
OCP Connector (located
in keyboard housing)
LOC 051
Top Card Crossover (TCe) Connectors
lOC 052
01A-A2
01A-A1
Pin Numbering
8645658
221 • • ,2
33
••
••
••
••
• ·1 W
••
••
••
••
••
I·
•• ••
221 •• 12
(
0
• • II • •
0110
0
010
0
o
0
O·
0
0
0
o ?
0
?
o
0
000
• • • •
o
0
0
0
o
000
T • • ,
o
o
yO?
o
y
0
9
o
0
0
0
o
0
9
• ••••
•••••
• • • • •
•••••
• • • • •
•••••
0
q
o
«
•
•
•
•
•
· .. . .
~
Back
0
0
0
0
000
0
o
0
0
0
0
o
0
000
0
o
o
0
0
0
0
0
000
0
0
0
,,T ..• ,,, ..• ,,, ..•
, . , ., .
,,T ..• ,,T .• ,r ..•
,••••••
· , · ,.
.~
•• • • • •
Back
Front
9 09
0
0
9
0
?
0
Y 0 Y0
?
0
9
0
?
0
0
0
0
0
«
0
o
0
09
9 0 «0
9 0 ? 09 0
yO? 0 Y 0
? 0 ? 090
? 0 yO? 0
000
0
0
0
J
0
J
0
0
6
Back
•
•
•
•
•
.-.
•-.
-• .••
e--e
e--e
......
..--e--e
e--e
Front
I
pN 6169585
2 of 2
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Back
T • ! •
t
• , •
• f •
, ., .
, '. , .
,,,. ..• ,,f ..•
,, .. ,, ..
T
t • T•
f·' •
Front
8645776
?
.--.
0
0
..--.
o
0
?
0
..-.
......
o
o
o
0
.--.
.........
..--.
o
o
o
o
o
0
o
o
0
o
0
0
?
?
0
0
0
0
?
9
q
?
?
0
09
0
?
0
9
0
?
0
?
0
?
0
0
?
0
9
9
0
?
09
0
?
0
'i
0
<:'
9
0
«
Back
-
.......
.......
--.......
Front
0
0
0
0
0
0
Back
EC A20560
18 Feb 85
LOC 052
Copyright IBM Corp, 19B4
\
\~.f
0
Front
8645777
8645678
•
•
•
•
•
i
_)I-
•
o
o
o
Side
·-
j
0
?
?
Component
••
••
••
33 I- ·113
( ))
~
• • I• •
Front
•• ·,Z
•
(~
0
•
,, .... ,,
221- .12
@
9
~
?
• • • •
331- -113
rMI
~
0
••
~ GA050
, .,
,, .. ,, .. ,, ..
8645779
9
o
, • • T
••
••
••
••
•• ·IY
•
••
••
••
4381-3
81M 2676380
0
o yO?
o 9 0 ?
T • • ,
T• • ,
T• • ,
221 • • 12
? 0 9
000
T• • T
·113
•• ••
••
••
•• •·IX
••
••
••
•
•
331· ·113
o
, • • T
8645778
o o o 0000000000000000000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0'
,w,'.IIJ"w,·'
a·'""rrs*r -,., ref'
I'
-·'TT'·!!" '-MIbHt!!"'
'dOdj" ..... b".'
'j]- '.
\'("tillr")"['fNTTUTTW:!!i" rr"'''W"(i5'flU''W I'W"NQ!'pmM
I
I
I'
!'
""'
,,' ,
II I"
'II
'
,t,
"?W'III'It!!" tI'lWi=\wPltiY'dMI1,'Y'"''
t
tri'
11M' SHt"
I
.\JI'! N
h'·H'btt±
EU"
'N"!!"! .rr,.,.,wrn'Wnirilgj=.',Uf!d"W"R"'f""f"''',flMT'·==Li
r ".
'f ·"1'1'#NH"rH1'CQ"'+,'.wJC+"J
I
1,,'1.
'_;"J'
tVt
I. ttl! II If I '"
I
tenu,",' I 'H'WlttbtUH"MttfM+ud
,s.
,''''.,·''.,MN''''. . wHyWIWI.,J".M".,w,Mwm WI.,,....tHld \t
,weN t'
'b
'tb
h
.'
f.1
I
I!
t"",,,,,
g'ji"t'r,,,'iMif=,,·i'Mr""W'i!.,."tldfE'dW',!
0 •• 00000000000000.000.000 .00000·0 ••
LOC 055
Service Panel
@]6Places
A2 Boards
Gate 01 C Front View
Not Used
PS109
PS107
PS108
AMD 105
Service Panel·
,------------------1
Rear View
I
I
I
I
Normal
ce
Mode
Power
PS102
PS101
PS103
On
Normal
Power
Off
Located Behind
PS101
Hinge
Nor. mal
I/O
B
0
B
B
c::::J
t::J
Power
Complete
Basic
Check.·
II
I
1
Check
Reset
Logic
Reset
Power
Hold
I-
L ________________ .1
c:::I
Power In
Process
IIML
r::::l
MBC
i:::l
Cl
c:::::::I
5 Volt
.24 Volt
I/O Power
Hold
On
I
I
I
I
MSS Code
o
Power
Code
Lamp
Test
I
Gate 01 C Frant View
-
Unit Emergency Only
F9l
~
·TR 104A. B. C. and CP2
Only on all 50 Hz and 60 Hz Japan machines
On
Emergency
Puwer Off
Service Panel (Front Viewl
4381
81M 2676380
~ Copyright IBM
I~~g
Corp_ 1984
GA055
LOC 055
LOC 056
Operator Control Panel (OCP)
Power
On
IML
Lamp
Test
Channel
To
Channel
Power
Off
D DDD
o
To
D
Olannel
System
I
Power
o o
o o o
Power In
Process
Olannel
On
o
ump
Test
IML
I
Q
Power
Complete
o
Chan-Chan
Basic
Disabled
Check
o
o
Wait
0
~--~-~
- --==-=':'=
--
~
3278·2A and 3279·2C
o Do D"
D
A
A
8
8
o
0
HIC
HID
o
0
Coo
Power Onl
I til
0
0
Power Dff
A
H/C
HID
0
0
r----------,
8
0
Coo
Lamp Test
H/C
HID
C
I ,2 31 I
111
4/ I
I
5
I
I
_
I
L__________ J
Chanhel To Channel
OCP Switch Pin Layout
IMI
81M 2676380
~ GA055
1;
o
I
4381
PN 6169586
.20f2
I' I'
ECA20558 "
"~"~O~1_0~c~t_8_4
___~.~_________~__----~~__________~_________~
LOC 056
COpvrtght IBM Corp. 1984
"
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0"0 0 0 0 0 0 0·00 0 0 0 0 0·0 0
OOO()OOOOC
'....,..... "". +
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
LOC 061
Power Supplies
-
~
l-
i-
Hi nge
0
PS109/
Voltage Adjust
J4
OD 0 §
Not Used
Jl J2
J3
PSll1
.J5
PSl12
J6
PS107/
Voltage Adjust
1CjJl
Voltage Adjust
J4
00 [J §
Voltage
Adjust
AMD 107
P~108/°
0
Jl J2
Jl J:? J3
J3
ODD
J5
o[JJ2
:-.:: J3
E3J5
J6
J6
J5 J7
nrrnrl
uUuu
J4 J6
AMD 105
Voltage
Adjust
Jl
'-'J
I •
"..
r'"
J2 tjo
--
J3 !"'"
.. J
~i
[J
J3
PS104
Service Panel
PS105
TR102
.-------,
~o
J5
~DD
J6
.
o
J7
g
BQ9.
PS103°
g
CP1
VOitage
Adjust\.
CP2
(Located
Behind
PS10l)
JB
e
CP3~
CP4
~
I
I
II
I
!
I
II
Voltage
Adjust
jli.. , J1
9Q 0 0
J4
J5CJ
J3
DK5
J6DO
K3 OK4
CPl
CP2 CP3
Jl
J3 J4
J2
0 D
CPs
~gPKl ~~
Voltage
Adjust
L.J
Jl i 1\J
OlJJ2
J2~Jo
~::J3
100
Primary
Control
Compartment
(PCe)
I.
t'""l
J3
rl
AMD 102
'"'
t./-
...- J7
PS102
I
:
DO
PS106
PS101
l
~ D J8
~r-
(
J9
00
~~ J100
0
4 5
r - .....
J 12
AFS102
J13
D
-
AIS101
(If Present)
rH inge
r-,..... []
~~ J14 J15
~~DD
L ______ ..J
Left Side View
Gate Ole Front View
4381-3
B I M 2676380
I
II
I
MI
I PN 6169587
EC.A2055SI EC A20560
L.:S~e~gL!:G:::A~0.!:.60::!...-~. ...:.1-=0:.:.,.f.=.2_ _---'.. ,01 Oct 84 . 18 Feb 85 .
Cl Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
LOC 061
-~-------~
......- - -
LOC 062
Sense Capacitors
I
I
I
B1 and
•
I
'"
Sens.e Capacitors
B2 and
Plenum Gate
TS1
Rear View
Right Side View
4381-3
81M 2676380
I
MI
Seq GA060
C> Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
I
PN 6169587
2 of 2
i
i
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
EC A20560
18 Feb 85
LOC 062
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
N!dO'/"!'
!JiM
+M'·.
',±Hit4'4*b'W'
\
'M' ...
"d' I
i1.kUhl,',i
M,,\,'I
""
d*
IL'
l
'
1 WL:"Jjh!lUbW·. 1 /.!'JCfblnl I g.
('
hPHlfiJ!!l!fi I! !Ill " ' T INII.ftHL!M c ·,
,n
H,'W i
',"UK-"
{'
I"'j"
!!!If"'"' P1l!"""
,/!Iffl¥ill"fN
lfH IH H'
, • •nlr':'... II uG! f
twaw§'
U'
II'
" "!II Nuittff'W,H,t'R"f'!T'
''UE''f'"
H
II!!" ...
ww....'wnpltllfH"Q
If','
b'rmumfuaellW"""
u'I'",M,="irj"U"_,'
rl''ztff'"
'Wdp,'O"y ·V,,·Rte!WW"'U" ''!WH'rIN ,,"., HI 'u!"n'"
i:±
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
LOC 065
Transformers
TS4
TS3
TR104-C*
TR104-S*
Left Side View
4381-3
81M 2676380
I
I
II
Front View
I
MI
PN 6169588
EC A20558I EC A20560
L.:S::!e:!.lg__G:::.:A~0::.:6:.::5:.....-......~1...;:o~f-=2_ _---,. . ~1 Oct 84 . 18 Feb 85 .
«> Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
*TR104A. S, and C.
Only on all 50 Hz and 60 Hz Japan machines.
LOC 065
LOC 066
Primary Control Compartment (PCC)
Behind CBs
Behind CBs
o
-,
B
~~
l8Elf3rt~r
CB·2
®
I
II
TBl
1 2
3 4
C6
C7
J·14
~!J~~
~
~~
B
CB·1
L1
~
Cover
0
C5
5 6 7 8 91
2
TB2
3 4
o
5
0
Moun ted on rear of PCC
L 1 C1 L2 C3 L3
L1
L3~
L1~l
K03
T1
T3
Tl T2 T3
T4 T5 T6
L4 L5 L.6
K02
8
Primary
Control
Compartment
I
.
II!~III
r
ff----.. . .
I r-T-"
0
l:~
10\
1",_.l._.1
1\0
I
,
'I
1
p1
O~Fl
@)
~
,-~ I
j,q,
'I'
::
~ F2
'0'
AMD 102
,.,_....:-""T '
L..iJ....J
1-
-----
PCC
Interlock
--
I
t
I
ITl
T2
T~.
TR100
0 o
,110'0' ~
K04
0
~
ceo
cc
123456
0
.....-
,- a
a..-
J2
@
@J
@l
@
@
r8
@
@l
@l
Left Side View
o
• Unefilter capacitors are not present
on Japan machines.
+
I,J
Cover
~381-3
B/M 2676380
I
M!
Seg GA065
«l Copyright IBM Corp, 19B4
I P!'!
6169588
\2 of 2
II
II
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
I
I
EC A20560
'8 Feb 85
Primary. Control Compartment
(p-ce)
I
I
LOC 066
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
ill
!
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0",
. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00
,
LOC 071
Relays and Circuit Protectors (CPs)
PCC K3
Top View
2
3
5
6
8
9
0
L1
PCC Kl
(Pin Side)
Cl
0
0
0
Top Deck-. L1 L2 L3
Lower Deck-. L4 L5 L6
C3
Lower Deck-. T4 T5 T6
Top Deck-. Tl T2 T3
0
0
0
Cl
C3
0
0
0
0
L1 L2 L3 L4
N/O 0 0 0 0 .-Load
N/C 0 11 L2 L3
Load
L2"j:_
T2
Tl T2 T3 T4
0 0 0 0
C 0 Tl T2 T3
C 0 0 0 0 +-- Line
A
T 1-3
I
Line
Tl
T3
0
0
PCC K2
B
A
0
L3
Load
PCC K4 (Four Pole)
Line
T 4-6
B
J=L1
I
•
I.
CPl
(Rear)
Side View
T1
L2+_ ~ -t
Ll
-L:.
•
•• I
Cl
Rl
R2
C2
CP2
(Front)
PCC K4 (Three Pole)
4381 .
B/M 2676380
I
I
II
MI
PN 6169589
L.,.;S:::,::e::,:jgL..-.:::.
G:;:,AO::::,.7!.,!0:..--L.,;.1~o::.!f....:1_ _--J.
ro Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
.
I
I
EC A20558
EC A20559
01 Oct 84 . 03 Dec 84 .
LOC 071
.
-------~--------
0000000000000000000000000000000000
IIhMM',n I"
II!
II
,/,,, 11 '¥'W'Wft"If' u!.rg':',
U'"",""'W?"
"",,!!e','Mn.'
1,\
'n"" , .
J
H' ,
'«'tt'
!t'f,,...,, '''",Ia
"'..11-.......
'
'wWl&t\ltWtt*, !d,,'t"iff'W""i (
""=$! I, 'V It:l"
IT
""-0- Wt'" , ","" '4 Tif'IM t"II7"["
UK""'Uf
',/,#'1"5"""., """'M'''''
00000000000000000000000 •• 000000000
TOOLS 005
TOOLS
Maintenance Tools List
Contents
Use the following tools to maintain the 4381 Processor.
! Tool Description
Maintenance Tools list
TOOLS 005
Tool Figures •••••••••.••.••.••••••••.••.•.•••••••.•
Actuation Tool (Part 2360092) ................•.•••..•••••
Actuation Tool (Part 4134750) .•.•....••••...•.....•......
Conductive Parts Caddy (Part 6428141) ......•..........•...
Continuity Checker (Part 453587) ....•..•...•..•••.•••.•••.
I/O Signal Cable Unlatch Tool (Part 2360349) .•.•......•......
Lighted Magnifier (Part 452642) .•••.•...••.•.•.....••.•.•.
Module Pin Template (Part 5665902) •.......•...•.•••.•....
Probe Mask (Part 9953923) •........•••.•..••••••••......
Module Pin Aligner (Part 2360424) •.•••.........•.•........
Probe Mask Probe Assembly (Part 401064) .....•.•.•.•..•..••
Tor-que Wrench (Part 5665903) .......•...•...••••••....•.
1/4 to 3/8 Drive Adapter (Part 1805216) .....•...•.•........
Modular Jack Test Adapter (Part 6339647) ..•.•••....•.•.••..
TOOLS 006
TOOLS 006
TOOLS 006
TOOLS 006
TOOLS 006
TOOLS 006
TOOLS 011
TOOLS 011
TOOLS 011
TOOLS 011
TOOLS 011
TOOLS 012
TOOLS 012
TOOLS 012
Actuation Tools .•.•.••..••••••••••.•••••••••••••••• TOOLS 015
Operation •..........•...•...................•.•..... TOOLS 015
Continuity Checker ..••••.••••••••••••••••••••••••...
Operation ....•......•.......................•.......
Maintenance ............... ...•...•......•.•••.•.•.•.
Battery Replacement .....•........•...•..•...•••... ..
Lamp Replacement ...........•.•.......•....•..... ..
TOOLS 016
TOOLS 016
TOOLS 016
TOOLS 016
TOOLS 016
......................................................
TOOLS 021
Module Pin Aligner
Actuation Tool (I/O Cables)
Actuation Tool (Boards 01 A-A 1 to 01 A-A4 and
01B-A')
Conductive Parts Caddy
tr'I "' __ "
_!_L. ..... D
.... I",..,n.
I
I
6428141
TOOLS 006
·
Continuity checker
453587
TOOLS 006/016
•
Adapter
453954
TOOLS 016
•
Battery 1.35V
453119
TOOLS 016
•
Battery 2.8V
453120
TOOLS 016
·
Extension
5500731
TOOLS 016
•
Lamp
5353889
TOOLS 016
2360349
452642
6339647
2360424
TOOLS 006
TOOLS 011
TOOLS 012
I/O Signal Cable Unlatch Tool
Lighted Magnifier
Modular Jack Test Adapter
Module Pin Alianer
5665902
TOOLS 011/021
TOOLS 011
MCM Probe Kit
9990129
TOOLS 011
Probe Mask
9953923
TOOLS 011
Probe Assembly
401064
TOOLS 011
5665903
TOOLS 0'2
TOOLS 012
Module Pin Alianment Tem~late
MCM Probe Kit Assembly
·
·
·
1805216
II
Ml
PN 6169613
ECA20558\ EC A20560
L.!!S!!:eq~G:::.B:::.O::::.O::::.5::....._1...1.;..,;;o.;,.f,;;;;2_ _ _....... '01 Oct 84 . 18 Feb 85
1QA4
TOOLS 006
TOOLS 006
Continuity Checker
Torque Wrench for Power Bus
1/4 to 3/8 Drive Adapter
4381-3
B/M 2676380
Figure Page
Part Number
2360092
4134750
TOOLS 005
-
5 !iSiJii!liili!iJtSt i!liil iiiii
M
TOOLS 006
Tool Figures
Actuation Tool (Part 2360092)
Conductive Parts Caddy (Part 6428141)
I/O Signal Cable Unlatch Tool (Part 2360349)
U/O signal cables)
~~idVI ~~~-~J3H"ROO
Actuation Tool (Part 4134750)
(Torque leaf springs)
UJt:JJ]r A8J=J~e::::5!i!55i!5i!I
Continuity Checker (Part 453587)
~.'
1 '
I,:
1:
1
II
'I:i
4381-3
B/M 2676380
IMISeq
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4
GB005
'\ PN 6169613
2 of 2
,
ECA20560
18 F~b as
TOOLS 006
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
TOOLS 011
Module Pin Aligner (Part 2360424)
Lighted Magnifier (Part 452642)
Probe Mask (Part 9953923)
-(@
Probe Mask Probe Assembly (Part 401064)
Module Pin Template (Part 5665902)
00000000000000000000000000
o
0
0
0
0
0
0
'0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
~
0
00000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000
0000000000000000000.0000000
00000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000
00000·000000000000000000000
Signal
Probe
(Red)
00000000000000000000000000
00000000000000111100(;0000000
00000000000000000000000000
000000000000000000000000110
Ground
Probe
(Black)
00000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000
o
0
0
0
00 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
00000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000
o
0
0
0
0
0
00
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
00000000000000·000000000000
o
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0·0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
00000000000000000000000000
THIS SIDE TOWARD PINS
4381-3
B/M 2676380
I
MI
I
PN 6169614
II
EC A20558
L.;S~e~g;l....!:G::.::B~0:..:1..:::0:..--.l.._.:..1.=0;..:..f,::2______ ' 01 Oct 84
Cl Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
I
I
EC A20560
_ 18 Feb 85 .
TOOLS 011
TOOLS 012
Torque Wrench (Part 5665903)
Modular Jack Test Adapter (Part 6339647)
It ~Vf'
~ ~ Position 2
(Orange)
Eight-Pin Keyed Modular Data Plug
1/4 to 3/8 Drive Adapter (Part 1805216)
Q&
4381-3
B/M 2676380
C)
rMi
~eq
Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GB010
I
PN 6169614
_2 of 2
EC A20558
1-..,;0;..;1....0;:;.c;;.;t:..;8;;;..4.;......~..;..;;;..~.;;;...:;;~-..&
TOOLS 012
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
Actuation Tools
TOOLS 015
This actuation tool (part 2360092) is used to remove
and replace I/O signal cables groupers. It is a
hand-operated tool with a preset torque setting when
turned in a clockwise direction. Torque control is needed
to prevent damage to the screw threads and inserts.
I
Note: The part number for the blade of the actuation
tool is 2360093.
This actuation tool (part 4134750) is used to torque the
horizontal cable retention bars and mounting screws for
the card cages on boards 0 1A-A 1 through 01 A-A4 and
0 1B-A 1. It is a hand-operated tool with a preset torque
setting when turned in a clockwise direction. Torque
control is needed to prevent damage to the screw
threads, inserts, and boards.
Note: The part number for the blade of the actuation
tool is 4138537.
Operation
Operation
Ensure the tip of the tool is seated in the socket head
screw to be removed or replaced. When tightening the
screw, turn the tool in a clockwise direction until you feel
the tool slip and hear a clicking sound. Screw is now fully
tightened. When removing a screw, ensure the tip is fully
seated in the socket head screw. The actuation tool has
a positive drive in a counterclockwise direction.
Ensure the tip of tool is seated in the socket head screw
to be removed or replaced. When tightening the screw,
turn the tool in a clockwise direction until you feel the tool
slip and hear a clicking sound. Screw is now fully
tightened. When removing a screw, ensure the tip is fully
seated in the socket head screw. The actuation tool has a
positive drive in a counterclockwise direction.
453912 Handle
1621706 Setscrew
2360093 Hex Rod
4381-3
B/M 2676380
I~~g
ICl Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GB015
TOOLS 015
TOOLS 016
Continuity Checker
Lamp
(Part 5353889)
The continuity checker is a plastic housing with a clear
plastic lens that contains an indicator. A 6-32 threaded
rod extends from one end to a flexible lead with a 6-32
threaded stud extending from the other end. Various
probe tips can be adapted to the continuity checker.
Lockscrew
Part 453587
Operation
Assemble the necessary probe tip to the continuity
checker. Connect the probe tip on the flexible lead to a
convenient checkpoint. Probe with the threaded rod
(with probe tip) protruding from the other end of the
continuity checker.
Adapter
(Part 453954)
Warning: Do not use the CE ohmmeter on LSI logic.
Circuits could de damaged.
Maintenance
Maintenance consists of replacement of the following:
•
1.35V battery (part 453119)
•
2.8V battery (part 453120)
•
Indicator lamp (part 5353889)
Extension
(Part 5500731)
~
Battery Replacement
0
Remove the lockscrew near the front of the continuity
checker. Hold the body, and pull the clear plastic end
until the two parts are separated. Replace the defective
batteries (observe the polarity). Reverse this procedure
for reassembly.
Lamp Replacement
2.8V Battery
(Part 453120)
Disassemble the tool as in the "Battery Replacement"
procedure. Loosen the locknut, and remove the circuit
card assembly from the plastic lens. Remove the
defective lamp. Remove the lens cap from the new lamp,
and insert in the circuit card assembly.
1.35V Battery
(Part 453119)
".
4381-3
B/M 2676380
IMI
~ GB015
PN 6169615
2 of 2
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
EC A20562
30 Aug85
TOOLS 016
....
"'P"t'fYw.wtt
t
,fdtt.lfd'm±frlif ,·"t
,r'
"',,reet'N,,Fjff 111M'" ;"¥+:!+fd'ild&Mr.iI .... -H·
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000
REM 021
Board 01A-B1
CAUTION
The weight of the board is approximately 36 kg
(80 Ib). Two persons are needed to remove and
installtne board.
4.
Open rear frame cover.
14. Open the front frame cover.
5.
Loosen one screw, and open B 1 plenum.
15. Open gate Ole.
6.
Ensure that the cable groupers are labeled for proper
repositioning before they are removed from the board
assembly.
16. Remove the three connectors (J 1, J2, and J3) from
PSll1.
7.
Remove all cable groupers starting with the bottom
positions and work toward the top.
8.
Remove the conductive mat from your ESD kit and
place it on the floor near the processor.
Tools Required:
Actuation Tool for Cable Grouper (part 2360092)
1/4 to 3/8 Drive Adapter (part 1805216)
Torque Tool for Commoning Bus (part 5665903).
Removal
1.
Note: See your ESD kit for safety and maintenance
instructions.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
9.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3.
Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC), and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
Open the new board shipping container.
10. Remove the new board from the shipping container
and place it on one-half of the conductive mat
(handles down).
11. Remove the module guard located at the bottom of
the board assembly
and install it on the board
that is to be removed.
m'
17. Remove the ground wire located at the top right
corner of the board.
18. Remove the eight board mounting screws, leaving the
top two screws for last.
Note: Before removing the board, ensure that you
have work space large enough for two boards.
19. As the last two screws are removed, pull out the
base of the board and set it on the lower support
ledge of the frame.
21. Remove the module guard from the old board
assembly.
22. Fasten the ESD wrist band to the wrist of the person
who will be transferring the modules from the old
board to the new board.
Note: See your ESD kit for safety and maintenance
instructions.
23. Transfer the modules at this time, and ensure that
they are properly plugged.
Note: For the correct module removal procedure,
see page REM 025.
24. Remove the wrist band and store it in the ESD kit.
20. Remove the board assembly by pulling the right side
away from the frame first. Then remove the board
assembly, and place it on the conductive mat
(handles down).
12. Remove the 12 commoning bus screws at the board
left and right side.
terminal blocks
a
13. Remove and label any additional wires connected to
the commoning bus.
01A-Sl
Module Side
4381-3
B/M 2676380
I~~9
«> Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GC020
IPN
6169560
1 of 4
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
EC A20559
03 Dec 84
EC A20560
18 Feb 85
REM 021
REM 022
Replacement
1.
Install the module guard on the new board assembly.
2.
To install the board, first lift and rest the board
assembly on the lower support ledge in front of the
opening with the bottom of the board assembly
against the lip of the support ledge.
12. Install the board ground wire.
3.
Slide the board assembly to the extreme left of the
frame, aligning the board bus terminal block tabs
with the commoning bus tabs.
4.
With the board in this position, tilt the top of the
board assembly inward against the frame, aligning
the board bus terminal block tabs with the
commoning bus tabs.
S.
In a continuous motion, lift the board assembly
against the' commoning bus until the bottom of the
board assembly clears the main support ledge.
Position the bottom edge of the board assembly
against the machine frame.
6.
Install the eight board mounting screws, finger tight
only.
7.
Remove the module guard from the new board
assembly, install it on the old board assembly, and
pack the old board in the shipping container.
8.
Remove the ESO cable and store it along with the
conductive mat in your ESO kit.
9.
Install all cable groupers starting at the top of the
board.
Note: Measure the ground integrity of the replaced
FRU using a digital multimeter (part 8496278) for
0.1 ohm or less before any connectors are
reconnected. Place one probe on the machine frame
near the replaced FRU ensuring the painted surface is
penetrated.. Place the other probe on any bare metal
area of the replaced FRU. If the measurement is 0.1
ohm or less, you have a good ground. If the
measurement is greater than 0.1 ohm, check for an
i'mproperly installed ground wire,·
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1 ohm,
invoke your support structure.
13. Close and tighten B 1 plenum.
14. Close frame cover.
15. Go to the wire side;gf the board and torque the eight
board mounting screws to SR 12 :!:2 Newton meter
(9 :!: 1.S ft Ibs).
16. Reinstall connectors J 1, J2, and J3 into PS 111.
17. Place CB 1 and CB2 to the ON position. Press Power
On/IML on the OCP.
18. Run the MSS diagnostics and PU diagnostics Option
V test.
10. Install the 12 commoning bus screws. (Align board if
necessary by shifting the board to the right or to the
left to align the distribution bus to the commoning
bus.)
11. Tighten the 12 screws. All screws must be torqued
at SR 27 :!:4Newton meter (20:!:3 ft Ibs).
4381-3
B/M 2676380
rMI
l..§!.g
~ Copyright IBM Corp, 1984
o o
GC020
I
pN 6169560
2 of 4
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
REM 022
0 '0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000
Board 01 A-B2
REM 023
CAUTION
The weight of the board is approximately 36 kg
(SO Ib). Two persons are needed to remove and
install the board.
Tools Required:
Actuation Tool for Cable Grouper (part 2360092)
6.
Ensure that the cable groupers are labeled for proper
repositioning before they are removed from the board
assembly.
7.
Remove all cable groupers starting with the bottom
positions and work toward the top.
8.
1/4 to 3/8 Drive Adapter (part 1805216)
Removal
9.
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
10. Remove the new board from the shipping container
and place it on one-half of the conductive mat
(handles down).
3.
Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC), and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4.
Open rear frame cover.
5.
Loosen one screw, and open B2 plenum.
a.
Open the new board shipping container.
11. Remove the module guard located at the bottom of
the board assembly
and install it on the board
that is to be removed.
Ii '
12. Remove the upper bus safety shield.
13. Remove the 12 commoning bus screws at the board
left and right side.
terminal blocks
B
14. Remove and label any additional wires connected to
the commoning bus.
Using a quarter-inch drive socket set, remove the
three screws holding the commoning bus and
distribution bus terminal block
m.
Remove the conductive mat from your ESD kit and
place it on the floor near the processor.
Note: See your ESD kit for safety and maintenance
instructions.
Torque Tool for Commoning Bus (part 5665903).
15. Perform the followjng two steps if a two piece bus
bar is installed:
Note: There may be six screws on early level
boards.
b.
Remove the terminal block; be careful not to
drop the block.
16. Open the front frame cover.
17. Open gate 01C.
18. Remove the three connectors (J1, J2, and J3) from
PS106.
19. Remove the ground wire located at the top right
corner of the board.
22. Remove the board assembly by pulling the right side
away from the frame first. Then remove the board
assembly, and place it on the conductive mat
(handles down).
23. Remove the module guard from the old board
assembly.
24. Fasten the ESD wri.st band to the wrist of the person
who will be transferring the modules from the old
board to the new board.
Note: See your ESD kit for safety. and maintenance
instructions.
25. Transfer the modules at this time, and ensure that
they are properly plugged.
Note: For the correct module removal procedure,
see page REM 025.
26. Remove the wrist band and store it in the ESD kit.
20. Remove the eight board mounting screws, leaving
the top two screws for last.
Note: Before removing the board, ensure that you
have work space large enough for two boards.
21 . As the last two screws are removed, pull out the
base of the board and set it on the lower support
ledge of the frame.,
01A-B2
Module Side
4381-3
81M 2676380
/
~~g
C Copyright IBM Corp. '984
GC020
/PN 6169560
3 of 4
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
EC A20559
03 Dec 84
EC A20560
18 Feb 85
REM 023
REM 024
Replacement
1.
Install the module guard on the new board assembly.
12. Reattach the terminal block (if present) with three
2. To install the board, first lift and rest the board
screws.
assembly on the lower support ledge in front of the
opening with the bottom of the board assembly
against the lip of the support ledge.
3. Slide the board assembly to the extreme left of the
frame, aligning the board bus terminal block tabs
with the commoning bus tabs.
4. With the board in this position, tilt the top of the
board assembly inward against the frame, aligning
the board bus terminal block tabs with the
commoning bus tabs.
5.
6.
In a continuous motion, lift the board assembly
against the commoning bus until the bottom of the
board assembly clears the main support ledge.
Position the bottom edge of the board assembly
against the machine frame.
Install the eight board mounting screws, finger tight
only.
Note: Only three screws are needed if replacing an
early level board.
, 3. Install the board ground wire.
Note: Measure the ground integrity of the replaced
FRU using a digital multimeter (part 8496278) for
0.1 ohm or less before any connectors are
reconnected. Place one probe on the machine frame
near the replaced FRU ensuring the painted surface is
penetrated. Place the other probe on any bare metal
area of the replaced FRU. If the measurement is O. ,
ohm or less, you have a good ground. If the
measurement is greater than 0.1 ohm, check for an
improperly installed ground wire.
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1 ohm,
invoke your support structure.
14. Install the safety shield.
7. Remove the module guard from the new board
assembly, install it on the old board assembly, and
pack the old board in the shipping container.
15. Close and tighten B2 plenum.
16. Close frame cover.
f
8. Remove the ESO cable and store it along with the
conductive mat in your ESO kit.
9. Install all cable groupers starting at the top of the
17. Go to the wire side of the board and torque the eight
board mounting screws to SR 12 ±2 Newton meter
(9 :t 1.5 ft Ibs).
board.
18. Reinstall connectors J 1, J2, and J3 into PS 106.
10. Install the 12 commoning bus screws. (Align board if
necessary by shifting the board to the right or to the
left to align the distribution bus to the commoning
bus.)
11. Tighten the 12 screws. All screws must be torqued
at SR 27 ±4 Newton meter (20 ±3 ft Ibs).
4381-3
B/M 2676380
rMI
l.§!g
GC020
I
pN 6169560
4 of 4
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
19. Place CB 1 and CB2 to the ON position. Press Power
On/IML on the OCP.
20. Run the MSS diagnostics and PU diagnostics Option
V tes.t.,
EC A20559
03 Dec 84
EC A20560
18 Feb 85
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4
o 00000000000000 0000000000
REM 024
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0;'
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000
REM 025
64 MM Pluggable Module
Tools required:
11. Apply additional downward force on the actuator bail
to drive the module free of the spring connectors.
14. Carefully place the module in position, and hold in
position until the next step.
Module Pin Aligner (part 2360424)
Module Pin Alignment Template (part 5665902).
Note: The module must be held in position because
it is free to be removed.
Warning: Do not remove any screws from the spring
housing. Attempting to remove the spring housing results
in permanent damage to the 81 or 82 board.
12. Carefully remove the module away from the module
site. Remove the new module from the protective
container and place the old module in it.
1.
13. Ensure that the new module pins are aligned; use the
Module Pin Alignment Template (part 5665902).
Press Power Off on the operator control panel unless
instructed differently by a repair procedure.
2.
Open rear cover of the machine.
3.
Open 81 or B2 plenum by loosening one screw.
Warning: A module can be destroyed by touching
the pins because of Electrostatic Discharge (ESD).
Never touch the pins of a module unless you are
wearing a wrist band.
4.
Note: Do not attempt to straighten any module pin
that is bent more than the distance to the next row,
or equivalent. Doing this can cause the pin to break
off during module insertion. Pins bent less than this
distance can be straightened using the pin aligner
(part 2360424).
6.
Fasten the ESD wrist band to the wrist of the person
who will be removing and installing the modules.
7.
Attach the ESD cable to the the protective container
of the new module.
8.
Determine which pluggable module is to be removed.
9.
Hold the two bail-retaining latches
on both sides
of the module assembly, located near the top.
17 . To ensure the module is properly seated, squeeze the
two bail-retaining latches toward each other and pull
the actuator bail with your finger until the actuator
bail is in a free state.
1.
Remove the module.
2.
Ensure that the actuator bail
position.
3.
Squeeze the actuator bail shown at
until the pivot
points are free from the spring housing.
4.
Remove the actuator bail from the spring housing.
5.
Reverse the procedure for actuator bail replacement.
m
is in the open
m
Note: When reinstalling the actuator bail. ensure
the bail-retaining latches
are on the inside of the
actuator bail.
IJ
18. Hold the module and try to move it. If the module is
tight, reactivate the actuator bail. If the module is
loose, go back to step 12.
Bail-Retaining Latches
20. Close the B 1 or B2 plenum, and tighten the screw.
Note: See your the ESD kit for safety and
maintenance instructions.
Plug the wrist band and the ESO cable into the B 1 or
B2 plenum latch bracket.
16. The two bail-retaining latches. located on both sides
of the module assembly near the top, should be in a
latched position.
19. Remove the wrist band and ESO cable and store in
the ESD kit.
Remove the wrist band and the ESO cable from the
ESD kit.
5.
15. While holding the module in position, slowly but
continuously push the actuator bail in until it hits the
stop.
Actuator Bail
Warning: Do not remove any screws from the spring
housing until instructed in this procedure. Attempting to
remove the spring housing results in permanent damage
to the 81 or B2 board.
1.
Remove the module.
2.
Remove the actuator bail.
3.
Remove the one mounting screw, lockwasher, and
washer
from the bail-retaining latches
4.
Remove the bail-retaining latches.
5.
Reverse the procedure for bail-retaining latches
replacement.
01A-Bl or 01A-B2
Board
B
E1
a
10. Squeeze both latches toward each other, and hold
them in that position while pulling the actuator bail
outward with your finger.
m
4381-3
B/M 2676380
I~~g
~ Copynght IBM Corp. 19B4
GC025
IPN
6169561
1 of 2
EC A20560
18 Feb 85
REM 025
Pluggable Terminator Resistor
REM 026
m
~
Tool Required:
Scissor Clamp (part 9900233).
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2. Open left side cover of frame.
~
3. Open rear frame cover.
4. Loosen one screw, and open 81 or 82 plenum.
5. Remove retention cover(s) iii from terminator
resistor section.
6. Place scissor clamp (part 9900233)m in center of
loll
terminator resistor (TRl and pull straight out.
B
VA
RjZfl
' ./ [;J 1•
~D~
Warning: The spring housing is not fastened to the
board. To prevent the spring housing from falling off
the board, do not remove more than one row of TRs
at a time.
BB
7. Reverse procedure for terminator resistor
replacement.
Note: When replacing TRs, ensure that the replacement
resistor has the same colored part number as resistor that
was removed. The two resistors that can be used are
(part 4481673) black in color and (part 4481674) red in
color shown at
•
L:J
L:J
L:J
GJ
EJ
[;]
1[;]1 • 181 • IEJI .!~o
[;]
[;]
[;]
[;]
•
~
0
I
•
I
[;]
GJ
[;J
[;]
01A-81 or 82
Module Side
B.
•
•
~
(J
Color Stripe
Part Number
Pluggable Terminator Resistor
~
4381-3
81M 2676380
rMI
l.!!,g
I
pN 6169561
GC025
EC A20560
18 Feb 85
2 of 2
REM 026-
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
,~o,'!;
,
,
00000000
o
0 0 0 0 0 'ooooo!OOO()O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000
REM 031
Sense Capacitors
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3.
Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC). and
place C81 and C82 in the OFF position.
4.
Open rear cover of frame.
5.
Open 81 and 82 plenum by loosening one screw on
each.
6.
Locate bus bars on top of board 82.
7.
Remove the upper safety shield by loosening three
mounting screws and remove the lower safety shield
by loosening two mounting screws.
8.
Unplug four Wires
capacitor assembly.
9.
Remove the six screws and washers
that fasten
the sense capacitors assembly to bus bars A, 8, and
Ii! that are fasten to the sense
m
C.
.
10. Remove the sense capacitors assembly.
1 J. Reverse procedure for sense capacitors replacement.
-~====~--=-~~)
)t----t¥1---------t¥I---
Rear view of Sense Capacitors
4381-3
B/M 2676380
I
MI
I PN 6169562 II EC A20558I EC A20562
...S;;.,8; ,;9:1o.ooo.;G; ,;C; ...
;0 3..0__--a.. ...;1-.;o;;.;f..,;:2:...-_ _--'.• 01 Oct 84 . 30 Aug 85
ID Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
REM 031
REM 032
Cables
I/O Signal Cables
Flat Cables
Tools Required:
Tool required if boards
01 B-A 1 are affected:
Torque Tool for Cable Grouper (part 2360092)
14. Holding the tool with the tip resting on top of the
latch arm, push the tool straight in until the recessed
ledge of the tool comes in contact with the slot rib as
shown atm.
Cable Unlatch Tool (part 2360349).
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3.
Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC), and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4.
Open rear frame cover.
5.
Open B 1 or B2 plenum by loosening one screw.
6.
Determine which cable grouper assembly is to be
removed.
7.
Remove grouper assembly.
8.
Remove retainer arms at
9.
Determine which 18-PAC is defective.
m
Actuation Tool (part 4134750).
15. While holding the tool in this position, press the
working end of the tool down slowly moving the
latch arm down below the latching shelf surface as
shown atm.
16. Repeat this same procedure for the other end of the
18-PAC cable.
17. Hold all the trilead cables attached to the 18-PAC to
be removed, and gently pull on the cables to remove
the la-PAC.
m
if present.
m.
Note: With the 18-PAC cable positioned for either
end, rotate the tool 180 degrees so that the recessed
ledge of the tool is away from the side wall of the
housing and the straight side of the tool is against
the side wall.
13. Place the tip of the tool on top of the latch arm
protruding out of the housing.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3.
Locatethe Primary Control Compartment (PCC), and
place CB 1 .and CB2 in the OFF position.
4.
Determine which cable assembly is to be removed.
5.
Remove enough cable retainers to permit tracing of
cables into the cable channel.
6.
Ensure that you have the correct cables and cut the
cables (in the channel) at both ends.
18. Remove enough cable retainers to permit tracing of
cables into the cable channel.
8.
2 1. Reconnect both ends of replacement cable into
grouper.
12. The front end of the tool has a recessed ledge that
seats against the slot ribs.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
. 7.
20. Place replacement cable on top of pile in cable
raceway, and replace cable retainers.
11. Hold the cable unlatch tool (part 2360349), and
position it so that the narrow end of the tool is
parallel to the slot openings as shown at
m
1.
Note: Do not unlatch and removell1ore than one
18-PAC cable assembly at a time.
19. Ensure that you have the correct cables and cut the
cables (in the channel) at both ends.
10. Orient the grouper housing so that one end of the
housing is facing towards you.
m
a1A-A 1 through 0 1A-A4 or
Place replacement cable on top of pile in cable
raceway, and replace cable retainers.
Reconnect both ends of replacement cable into
position.
~
22. Install retainer arms if present.
23. Install grouper assembly.
24. Close B 1 or B2 plenum by tightening one screw.
25. Close the rear frame cover.
26. Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC), and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the ON position.
Warning: To prevent damage to the slot ribs, do
not use excessive force when moving the latch arm.
27. Close left side cover of frame.
28. Press Power On/IML on the operator control panel.
4381-3
B/M 2676380
I
MI
. Seg GC030
10 Copvr'ght IBM Corp. 19B4
{11
,t ;;
I
PN 6169562
. 2 of 2
.
EC A2055B
1....:0;..:.1...;:O:;.;:c:;:.t..:8:.;.:4~L-.:::~;:.:.;;L.:.:~
I
REM 032
OOOOO()O,OOOOOOO 0 0 0 0 0 ; 0 0 0 0 0 OOOOOOOOOi
,.,_H_
.. "",,,
'''-''''" ....
0...-.......__
· '.....
".""""..""",,,.......,."..................""'"-,."'='.•""".,·,.......,,_
.......
,,"'''''''',·...-.,.,·_.'''_w.._.........
__
.. ,,,,,,.,,,,,,,,.,,,..
_.•__. _,"""""H''''''''''~~'''-'''''''''''
..•, .........
" ......
"_"'''''"
.. ''''''.,._.
~"
=.....
.,<=."""
•• , """.,,,.""".",,"'-",
....
'-"0''"""
.............
_
.•
=
......=
...."""','."...""'
..........
'''''''""'"~_'''''''''-'
..................................''''''''''''..........
~~''-'-''
......................................._'''"'''''''"................''"'
.......
' ...................""""-.....................
~_
_~
_ _ _*
""'W'''''
to
1t!WI!1..........." .. ·M....... " .. •....., .. "'e
d· ...... " .... i .. ',,;' .......
*"'.... ;"'e'ti
',.,·."V" ....lfttsW ...'·
t,.
n, . ,
• •t
'1'
et
'(''''''
,",t
S'''''' 'H Iil!WIHS'UI"!"'''''''''¥W'irili*rt*i,,, . "',., ',,,, ..~
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
Power Supplies
REM 035
Power Supply 1 0 1
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3. Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC), and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4. Open front cover, and locate PS 101.
5. Remove the front safety shield.
fJ .
6.
Disconnect P07
7.
Disconnect cables at
8.
Disconnect ground wire
9.
Remove the four mounting screws and washers
m
B
m.
10. Carefully pull PS 10 1 from frame.
11. Reverse procedure for PS 10 1 replacement.
Note: After reconnecting the ground wire, measure
the ground integrity of the replaced FRU using a
digital multimeter (part 8496278) for 0.1 ohm or
less before any connectors are reconnected. Place
one probe on the machine frame near the 'replaced
FRU ensuring the painted surface is penetrated.
Place the other probe on any bare metal area of the
replaced FRU. If the measurement is 0.1 ohm or
less, you have a good ground. If the measurement is
greater than 0.1 ohm, check for an improperly
installed ground wire.
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1 ohm.
invoke your support structure.
PS101
,
4381-3
B/M 2676380
MI
I PN 6169563 1/ EC A20558 ./ EC A20562
I .;:;.S;;.;eg::a...;G::.;C::.;O::.;3::.;6~--I.-..;1:-o;;.;f:..:2=--_ _--I. . 01 Oct 84 . 30 Aug 85
...
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
REM 035
REM 036
Power Supply 102
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3.
Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCe), and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4.
Open front cover, and locate PS 102.
5.
Disconnect cables at
6.
Disconnect ground wire
7.
Remove the four mounting screws and washers
8.
Carefully pull PS 102 from frame.
9.
Reverse procedure for PS102 replacement.
rJ and iii
a
m.
m
m
Note: After reconnecting the ground wire, measure
the ground integrity of the replaced FRU using a
digital multimeter (part 8496278) for 0.1 ohm or
less before any connectors are reconnected. Place
one probe on the machine frame near the replaced
FRU ensuring the painted surface is penetrated.
Place the other probe on any bare metal area of the
replaced FRU. If the measurement is 0.1 ohm or
Jess, you have a good ground. If the measurement is
greater than 0.1 ohm, check for an improperly
installed ground wire.
~[!1
'/j). ....
m~~
PS102
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1 ohm,
invoke your support structure.
4381-3
81M 2676380
I
MI
. Seq GC035
I
PN 6169563
.20f2
EC A20558
~0~1~O~c~t~8~4~~~~~~~
REM 036
iCI Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
f11
'!(Y
OO()OOOO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000,00) 0 0 0 0 0 , 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
·,.0
Y
1
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000
REM 041
Power Supply 103
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3.
Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC), and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4.
Open front cover of frame.
5.
Open gate 01C, and locate PS103 on rear of gate.
6.
Disconnect cables at
E1 .
8.
III .
Disconnect ground wire B
9.
Remove the four mounting screws and washers
7.
Disconnect cable P 10
m
10. Carefully pull PS 103 from frame.
11. Reverse procedure for PS 103 replacement.
Note: After reconnecting the ground wire, measure
the ground integrity of the replaced FRU using a
digital multimeter (part 8496278) for 0.1 ohm or
less before any connectors are reconnected. Place
one probe on the machine frame riear the replaced
FRU ensuring the painted surface is penetrated.
Place the other probe on any bare metal area of the
replaced FRU. If the measurement is 0.1 ohm or
less, you have a good ground. If the measurement is
greater than O. 1 ohm, check for an improperly
installed ground wire.
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1 ohm.
invoke your support structure.
Left Side
4381-3
81M 2676380
I
MI
I
PN 6169564
II
EC A20558
.....;;;.Se;;;.;g........,;G;;;.C;;;.0_4_0__---'•....;1~o;;;.;f....;2~_ _.....I• • 01 Oct 84
CI Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4
I
EC A20562
• 30 Aug 85
REM 041
REM 042
Power Supply 104
1. Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3.
Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC), and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4.
Open rear cover of frame, and locate rear of PS 104.
5. Disconnect cables at
m
IJ .
Ground
m
6.
Disconnect cable P 14
7.
Locate front of PS 104 on left side of frame.
at the rear of PCC box.
8. Disconnect ground wire,EI .
9. Remove the four mounting bolts, washers, and
lock washers
m.
10. Carefully pull PS 104 from frame.
11. Reverse procedure for PS 104 replacement.
Note: After reconnecting the ground wire, measure
the ground integrity of the replaced FRU using a
digital multimeter (part 8496278) for O. 1 ohm or
less before any connectors are reconnected. Place
one probe on the machine frame near the replaced
FRU ensuring the painted surface is penetrated.
Place the other probe on any bare metal area of the
replaced FRU. If the measurement is 0.1 ohm or
less, you have a good ground. If the measurement is
greater than 0.1 ohm, check for an improperly
installed ground wire.
I
ID
J7 J6
J3
cD
J5 J4
.11 .1
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1 ohm.
invoke your support structure.
Front View
Rear View
4381-3
81M 2676380
I
MI
Seq GC040
I
PN 6169564
2 of 2
,bee
m
REM 042
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4
tf°~
I'i
i:')
\,-Jl'
000000000000000000000000 000000000
7"''''
,,'oW
nT",
,'"I ...
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
REM 045
Power Supply 105
Tools Required:
1/4 to 3/8 Drive Adapter (part 1805216)
14. Perform the following.
Torque Tool for Commoning Bus (part 5665903).
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3.
Locate the Primary Control Compartment (Pce), and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4.
Open rear cover of frame.
a.
See Volume A03. page PR 1015 for the correct
current settings of the new power supply.
b.
Reverse procedure for PS 1OS replacement.
Note: After reconnecting the ground wire.
measure the ground integrity of the replaced FRU
using a digital multimeter (part 8496278) for
O. 1 ohm or less before any connectors are
reconnected. Place one probe on the machine
frame near the replaced FRU ensuring the
painted surface is penetrated. Place the other
probe on any bare metal area of the replaced
FRU. If the measurement is 0.1 ohm or less.
you have a good ground. If the measurement is
greater than 0.1 ohm. check for an improperly
installed ground wire.
S. Open 82 plenum to gain access to the rear of
PS105.
6. Remove the safety shield covering the voltage bus
bars.
7. Disconnect cables at
8.
a
9, Locate front of PS 105 on left side of frame.
c.
B.
11. Remove the two mounting bolts, washers, and
lockwashers
m.
12. Remove bolt, washer, lockwasher, and nut
o
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1
ohm. invoke your support structure.
Remove two voltage bus bars fastened atm
10. Remove ground wire
o
iii
Torque the voltage bus bar screws shown at
to 27 :t4 Newton meter (20 :t3 ft Ibs) using the
torque wrench and 1/4 to 3/8 adapter.
Rear View
Warning: Ensure that the voltage bus bars and
terminals are not touching the machine frame.
m
13. Carefully pull PS105 from frame.
m
4381-3
81M 2676380
I~~g
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4
GC045
IPN
6169565
1 of 2
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
Front View
EC A20560
18 Feb 85
REM 045
REM 046
Power Supply 106
Tools Required:
16. Perform the following.
1/4 to 3/8 Drive Adapter (part 1805216)
Torque Tool for Commoning Bus (part 5665903),
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3.
Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC)' and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4.
Open front cover.
5.
Open gate 01C, and locate rear of PS106.
6.
Remove cables at
7.
Open rear cover of frame.
8.
Open B2 plenum to gain access to the rear of
PS106.
9.
a.
See Volume A03, page PR 1015 for the correct
current settings of the new power supply.
b.
Reverse procedure for PS 106 replacement.
Note: After reconnecting the ground wire.
measure the ground integrity of the replaced FRU
using a digital multimeter (part 8496278) for
0.1 ohm or less before any connectors are
reconnected. Place one probe on the machine
frame near the replaced FRU ensuring the
painted surface is penetrated. Place the other
probe on any bare metal area of the replaced
FRU. If the measurement is 0.1 ohm or less,
you have a good ground. If the measurement is
greater than O. 1 ohm, check for an improperly
installed ground wire.
rJ .
o
~S\~JO
o
o
o
m
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1
ohm, invoke your support structure.
Remove the safety shield covering the voltage bus
bars.
10. Remove two voltage bus bars fastened at
o
c.
m
EI
Torque the voltage bus bar screws shown at
to 27 :!:4 Newton meter (20 :!:3 ft Ibs) using the
torque wrench and 1/4 to 3/8 adapter.
Rear View
11. Locate front of 'PS 106 on left side of frame.
12. Remove ground wire
Warning: Ensure that the voltage bus bars and
terminals are not touching the machine frame.
m.
13. Remove the two mounting bolts, washers, and
lockwashers
m.
14. Remove bolt, washer, lockwasher, and nut
Ii
Ii
I
15. Carefully pull PS 106 from frame.
8.
m
I
rMI
4381-3
81M 2676380
EC A20558
pN 6169565
2 of 2
~ GC045
01 Oct 84
I
EC A20560
18 Feb 85
0-'
,I
D1
FrontView
REM 046
CI Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
('"\)
'\.J
0,
1 "
I
0,', 0' 0
i
1'/
}'
(,)~
1;/
0' 0:: 0,'" 0' 0' 0'" 0,:
.
I
'
,
•
I
,
.~'
,I"
'
."
o o
O()O(}OOOOOO OOO()OOOOO
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
REM 051
Power Supply 107
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3. Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PC C) , and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4.
Open front cover of frame, and locate the front of
PS107.
5.
Disconnect ground wire
6.
Disconnect cables at
7.
Open gate 01C.
m
m
m
Ground
8.
Open gate 01B, and locate rear of PS107
9.
Remove the four mounting screws and washers
B
10. Carefully pull PS107 from frame.
11. Reverse procedure for PS 107 replacement.
Not~: After reconnecting the ground wire, measure
the ground integrity of the replaced FRU using a
digital multimeter (part 8496278) for 0.1 ohm or
less before any connectors are reconnected. Place
one probe on the machine frame near the replaced
FRU ensuring the painted surface is penetrated.
Place the other probe on any bare metal area of the
replaced FRU. If the measurement is 0.1 ohm or
less, you have a good ground. If the measurement is
greater than 0.1 ohm, check for an improperly
installed ground wire.
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1 ohm.
invoke your support structure.
Front View
4381-3
B/M 2616380
MI
I PN 6'69566 II EC A20558I ~C A20562
...,;;,58.;;.9;L...;G;;;.C;;;.0;;;.5...0___.-.........'_o..,f.....2______. . 01 Oct 84 . 30 Aug 85
I
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
REM 051
REM 052
Power Supply 108
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3.
Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCCl. and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4. Open front cover of frame, and locate front of
PS 108.
5.
Disconnect ground wireD
6.
Disconnect cables at
7.
Open gate 01C.
8.
Open gate 01 B, and locate rear of PS 108.
9.
Remove the four mounting screws and washers
III
B
10. Carefully pull PS 108 from frame.
11. Reverse procedure for PS 108 replacement.
\
Note: Afterreconnecting the ground wire, measure
the ground integrity of the replaced FRU using a
digital multimeter (part 8496278) for 0.1 ohm or
less before any connectors are reconnected. Place
one probe on the machine frame near the replaced
FRU ensuring the painted surface is penetrated.
Place the other probe on any bare metal area of the
replaced FRU. If the measurement is 0.1 ohm or
less, you have a good ground. If the measurement is
greater than 0.1 ohm, check for an improperly
installed ground wire.
',t§2.
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1 ohm.
invoke your support structure.
Front View
Front View
4381-3
81M 2676380
I
MI
. 5e9 GC050
I
PN 6169566
. 2 of 2
EC A20558
........0...,1_0;;;.;c;;.;;t...,8;...4___.L....::...:.....:;..:.:.I&...:;.::;,..
OJ
I
REM 052
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
~O
o
000000000
o
OOOOOO()OOOOOO 0 0 0
o
00000
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000
REM 055
Power Supply 109
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3.
Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC), and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4. Open front cover of frame, and locate front of
PS109.
5.
Disconnect ground wire
6.
Disconnect cables at
fl
m
7. Open gate 01C.
8. Open gate 01 B, and locate rear of PS 109.
9. Remove the four mounting screws and washers
m.
10. Carefully pull PS 109 from frame.
Ground
11. Reverse procedure for PS 109 replacement.
Note: After reconnecting the ground wire, measure
. the ground integrity of the replaced FRU using a
digital multi meter (part 8496278) for 0.1 ohm or
less before any connectors are reconnected. Place
one probe on the machine frame near the replaced
FRU ensuring the painted surface is penetrated.
Place the other probe on any bare metal area of the
replaced FRU. If the measurement is 0.1 ohm or
less, you have a good ground. If the measurement is
greater than 0.1 ohm, check for an improperly
installed ground wire.
m
\...
'~
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1 ohm.
invoke your support structure.
Front View
Front View
4381-3
81M 2676380
I~~g
ID Copvright IBM Corp. 1984
GC055
IPN
6169567
1 of 2
EC A20560
18 Feb 85
REM 055
---------.-------~---
REM 056
13. Perform the following.
Power Supply 11 1
a.
See Volume A03. page PR 1015 for the correct
current settings of the new power supply.
b.
Reverse procedure for PS 111 replacement.
Tools Required:
1/4 to 3/8 Drive Adapter (part 1805216)
Torque Tool for Commoning Bus (part 5665903).
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3.
Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC)' and
place CB 1 and C82 in the OFF position.
4.
Open front cover and locate the rear of PS 111 .
5.
Remove cables Jl, J2, and J3 shown at
6.
Remove the safety shield covering the voltage bus
bars.
Note: After reconnecting the ground wire.
measure the ground integrity of the replaced FRU
using a digital multimeter (part 8496278) for
O. 1 ohm or less before any connectors are
reconnected. Place one probe on the machine
frame near the replaced FRU ensuring the
painted surface is penetrated. Place the other
probe on any bare metal area of the replaced
FRU. If the measurement is 0.1 ohm or less.
you have a good ground .. If the measurement is
greater than 0.1 ohm, check for an improperly
installed ground wire.
E1 .
7. Remove two voltage bus bars fastened at
c.
Locate front of PS 111 on left side of frame.
9.
Remove ground wire
m.
10. Remove the two mounting bolts, washers, and
lockwashers
m.
11. Remove bolt, washer, lockwasher, and
o
~s\\\
o
o
o
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1
ohm. invoke your support structure.
m
8.
o
III
Torque the voltage bus bar screws shown at
to 27 ±4 Newton meter (20 ±3 ft Ibs) using the
torque wrench and 1/4 to 3/8 adapter.
Warning: Ensure that the voltage bus bars and
terminals are not touching the machine frame.
Rear View
m
Pee
n~t II
12. Carefully pull PS 111 from frame.
I
left Side
II
[!1
m
4381-3
B/M 2676380
PN 6169567
2 of 2
ECA20560
18 Feb 85
Front View
REM 056
ID Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
"
\'lJv
000000000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0000-0000000000
Wille '"OII!.t"].".... ¥ "W··'·"·i",,51#·0;"
"+" •• ,.""r,"'."
='
0000000000000000000000000
000000000
REM 061
13. Perform the following.
power Supply 112
a.
See Volume A03, page PR 1015 for the correct
current settings of the new power supply.
b.
Reverse procedure for PS 112 replacement.
Tools Required:
1/4 to 3/8 Drive Adapter (part 1805216)
Torque Tool for Commoning Bus (part 5665903).
Note: After reconnecting the ground wire,
measure the ground integrity of the replaced FRU
using a digital multimeter (part 8496278) for
0.1 ohm or less before any connectors are
reconnected. Place one probe on the machine
frame near the replaced FRU ensuring the
painted surface is penetrated. Place the other
probe on any bare metal area of the replaced
FRU. If the measurement is 0.1 ohm or less,
you have a good ground. If the measurement is
greater than O. 1 ohm, check for an improperly
installed ground wire.
1. Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3.
locate the Primary Control Compartment (peC), and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4.
Open front cover and locate the rear of PS 112.
5. Remove cables J 1, J2, and J3 shown at
B .
6. Remove the safety shield covering the voltage bus
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1
ohm. invoke your support structure.
bars.
7. Remove two voltage bus bars fastened at
m
c.
Locate front of PS 112 on left side of frame.
8.
9. Remove ground wire
m.
m.
11. Remove bolt, washer, lockwasher, and nut
m
Torque the voltage bus bar screws shown at
to 27 ±4 Newton meter (20 ±3 ft Ibs) using the
torque wrench and 1/4 to 3/8 adapter.
Warning: Ensure that the voltage bus bars and
terminals are not touching the machine frame.
10. Remove the two mounting bolts, washers, and
lock washers
Gate Ole
Rear View
Ii
12. Carefully pull PS 112 from frame.
I
Left Side
Front View
4381-3
aIM 2676380
II)
Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
PN 6169568
1 of 1
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
EC A20560
18 Feb 85
REM 061
0000000000000000000000000000000000
I
r
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000
REM 065
Transformers
Transformer 100
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3. Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC), and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4.
Open PCC door, and locate TR 100.
5. Remove ground wire.
U C1 12 C3 t.,;
K04
6.
Remove input wires on TB 1.
7.
Remove four mounting nuts
8.
Carefully pull TR 100 from frame.
Ti
EI
9. Reverse procedure for TR 100 replacement.
00.
o
To I
Conv
Outlet
T2
T'
TR 100
0
Note: After reconnecting the ground wire, measure
the ground integrity of the replaced FRU using a
digital multimeter (part 8496278) for 0.1 ohm or
less before any connectors are reconnected. Place
one probe on the machine frame near the replaced
FRU ensuring the painted surface is penetrated.
Place the other probe on any bare metal area of the
replaced FRU. If the measurement is 0.1 ohm or
less, you have a good ground. If the measurement is
greater than 0.1 ohm, check for an improperly
installed ground wire.
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1 ohm.
invoke your support structure.
Primary Control Compartment
Front View
4381-3
81M 2676380
I
MI
PN 6169569 II ECA20558I EC A20562
~=S~eg~G~C~0~6~5~~.~1~o~f~2~____~. ~c~t~8~4~~.~3~0~A~u~9~8~5~~________~________~________~
I
10 Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4
REM 065
REM 066
Transformer 101
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2. Open left side cover of frame.
3. Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC), and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4. Open PCC door, and locate TR 101.
5. Remove ground wire.
LICIL2C3~
6.
Remove input wires on TB 1
K04
7. Disconnect plug J02.
~
8. Remove the four mounting nuts
9.
B
l:8
00TO~
o
@
@
@
@l
@J
@J
@
@
@
Corw
~
Carefully pull TR 101 from frame.
10. Reverse procedure for TR 101 replacement.
Note: After reconnecting the ground wire, measure
the ground integrity of the replaced FRU using a
digital multimeter (part 8496278) for 0.1 ohm or
less before any connectors are reconnected. Place
one probe on the machine frame near the replaced
FRU ensuring the painted surface is penetrated.
Place the other probe on any bare metal area of the
replaced FRU. If the measurement is 0.1 ohm or
less, you have a good ground. If the measurement is
greater than 0.1 ohm, check for an improperly
installed ground wire.
@J
TRIOO
Outle'
o
0
.
4
0
0
o~ 0
Primary Control Compartment
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1 ohm.
invoke your support structure.
4381-3
81M 2676380
rMI
l§!.9.
GC065
PN 6169569
2 of 2
ECA20558I EC A20562 I
01 Oct 84. 30 Aug 85
I
REM 066
e Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
fA,
~y
0000000
o
000000 000000 0000
o o o
00000 o
I"" f"....!H "I'U",;"" r". '.'01!
,....... " , ""'"
""'f" F' "".H"M"'· ",".1'+' •• ,1, niH'
,n," ,·,,·; .... ·UT,\dIY+8f·
To ;,.,..
".H,+i'''".V'+'''lfrl'''!'.!!,!!"IU-''·'
.'
MI"I!,," rIIH">W Vrl"';I';I! "'i/
;"fH,..,
I
;,J
'"
, ••
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
REM 071
Transformer 102
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2. Open left side cover of frame.
3. Locate the Primary Control Compartment (peC), and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4. Open front cover of frame.
5. Open gate 01 C, and locate TR 102 on rear of gate.
S.
Disconnect P011J .
7.
Disconnect cables PO 1 and P02 at JO 1 and J02 of
PS102.
8.· Cut tie wrap.
9.
Remove the four mounting bolts and washers
iii
TR102
10. Carefully pull TR 102 from frame.
11. Reverse procedure for TR 102 replacement.
Front View
4381-3
81M 2676380
'II Copyright IBM
I
I
MI
PN 6169570 II EC A20558I EC A20562 I
...S
.....e.....9......
G...C...
O..;.7..;.0_"""'.L...1;.....;;..;of;...;2;;...-_ _...... 01 Oct 84 . 30 Aug 85 .
Corp. 19B4
REM 071
REM 072
Transformer 103
1. Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3.
Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC), and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4.
Open front cover of frame.
5.
Open gate 01C, and locate TR 103 on rear of gate.
6.
Disconnect PO 1 at
7.
Disconnect P 10 at J 10 of PS 103.
m
a·
I
m
8.
Remove the four mounting nuts
9.
Carefully pull TR 103 from frame.
•
II
I
I:
tm
10. Reverse procedure for TR 103 replacement.
I
TR103
:I 1::"-. . .-
"II
0
I
I
I
~II
I
I
Front View
4381-3
81M 2676380
I
MI
. Seq GC070
I
PN 6169570
. 2 of 2
EC A20558
~0_1_0:;.;;ct;.;:..;;8;..;;4---i1.-..:~':=-L...;:.:::...-.L
I
REM 072
C Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
()
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 '0 OOO()OOOOO
o
'0·' 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
,
,
t,',,,,,,,",
:tid
d, " f
'++,'W""", , ",,'"
"g' ... ; . ' ,. , ."
"
"'I'
j " , ,."," ,
,
'"
000000000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
000000000000000
REM 075
Transformer 104
All 50 Hz and Japan 60 Hz only.
CAUTION
TR 104-A. S. and C each weigh 25 kg (55 Ib).
Obtain aid before removing or replacing.
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2. Open left side cover.
3. Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC). and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4.
Open front cover.
5. Open gate 01C. and locate TR104-A. B, or C on rear
of gate.
6.
TB4
Determine the transformer to be removed (A. B,' or
C).
Note:
TR104-A*
TR102
Label all wires before removing T8 screws.
TB3
7. Disconnect TB-1 wires 1, 3. and 5 of the transformer
to be removed. For the correct line voltage wiring
sequence, refer to Volume COl. page YA081.
TR104-C*
8. Locate and disconnect TB-4 wires running from the
transformer to TB-4.
9. Cut the nylon cable tie wraps, and route the two
wires back to the transformer area.
10. Remove the four mounting nuts
B .
11. Carefully pull the transformer away from the frame.
12. Reverse procedure for TR104-A, 8, or C replacement.
Left Side View
4381-3
81M 2676380
III CCJI)yright IBM Corp. 1984
*TR104A, a, andC.
Only on all 50 Hz and 60 Hz Japan machines.
TB-l
Front View
REM 075
0000000000000000000000000000000000
C\o M3R
WId"
t ... '
r'· ' .. "'· .... fO··
f
',L"'".
"\&~H'
·'ct'
!\''''!'',,'+';M' .. "
,,,,',,,,
"'".101+'''
.!..... ' •.U!!".
"n" , ,
t
j,
I"
. . . ." ..
~ . . . ',. C
dj-'"''''
"""'''flor'''''II'' c'Jj,!"'t' "'''p'W'i''
£'
.. ,
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000
REM 081
Air Moving Devices
Air Moving Device 10 1·
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3. Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCe), and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4. Open rear cover of frame, and locate AMD 101.
5. Loosen the four cover mounting screws, and remove
the cover.
fl
6.
Disconnect cable
7.
Disconnect ground wire
AFS107
m
B1
and
Plenum Gate
8. Pull AMD 101 from frame.
9.
Reverse procedure for AMD 101 replacement.
Note: After reconnecting the ground wire, measure
the ground integrity of the replaced FRU using a
digital multi meter (part 8496278) for 0.1 ohm or
less before any connectors are reconnected. Place
one probe on the machine frame near the replaced
'FRU ensuring the painted surface is penetrated.
Place the other probe on any bare metal area of the
replaced FRU. If the measurement is 0.1 ohm or
less, you have a good ground. If the measurement is
greater than 0.1 ohm, check for an improperly
installed ground wire.
PS
105
AFS106
B2
and
Plenum Gate
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1 ohm,
invoke your support structure.
AFS104
Right Side View
4381-3
81M 2676380
I~~g
CD Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4
Geoso
AMD 101
REM 081
REM 082
Air Moving Device 102
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3. Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC), and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4. Open left side cover of frame, and locate AMD 102.
5. Loosen the four cover mounting screws, and remove
the cover.
6.
Disconnect cable
iii .
7. Disconnect ground wire
m
8. Pull AMD 102 from frame.
9. Reverse procedure for AMD 102 replacement.
OJ
Note: After reconnecting the ground wire, measure
the ground integrity of the replaced FRU using a
digital multimeter (part 8496278) for 0.1 ohm or
less before any connectors are reconnected. Place
one probe on the machine frame near the replaced
FRU ensuring the painted surface is penetrated.
Place the other probe on any bare metal area of the
replaced FRU. ·If the measurement is 0.1 ohm or
less, you .have a good ground. If the measurement is
greater tnan 0.1 ohm, check for an improperly
installed ground wire.
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1 ohm.
invoke your support structure.
AMD 102
Left Side
Front View
4381-3
B/M 2676380
I
MI
. Seg GC080
I
PN 6169572
• 2 of 2 .
EC A20558
--....;;:O..1....;O;;.;c::;;:.t..;:8;..;4:......&...:::~~~:;.;;.....&
REM 082
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
f('"'\,
'{-y
o
0 0 0 0 0 0,0 0
Ie)
000
o o o
n,y
0 0 0 00
o o
0 0 0 0 0 , 0 0 0 0)
1
itt""
n
·tfMfff"'u'+.!iW"'.II" .... f'ttt
H"Ifi"""t"t"·i'i·Wd!1t5
JC· · '
··r,t
t
'·f.t"·· ,.. 1:
•
·;f·tS. 1
..
! ....
,."
'""It
1"',,_,_ _ &
"'
iM'#'tff
#'
"b,tlb!h.W H'''#'itbtM'11t '
f,
""'",,1'"'
"1'
MM' de','.t t
f
f"
"pllf"h'd
,,,,tt;'f'f'W'jt,,,,''''-IH'''' 'M'tt""'M'
"."·",..;,·,,,,,,"*,,+,W'
ie ' .... '.' ••
,..
•
'.:.·~U,
t·,
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000
REM 085
Air Moving Device 103
1. Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3. Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC)' and
place C8l and CB2 in the OFF position.
Note:
AMD 104 must be removed before AMD
103.
4. Open rear cover of frame, and locate AMD 103
(AMD 103 is located behind AMD 104).
5. Loosen the four cover mounting screws, and remove
AFS107
the cover.
6. Disconnect cable
a
of AMD 104.
7. Disconnect ground wire
B1
and
Plenum Gate
III from AMD 104.
8. Pull AMD 104 from frame.
9. Disconnect cableEl of AMD 103.
1~. Disconnect ground wire
III from AMD 103.
11. Pull AMD 103 from frame.
PS
105
12. Reverseprocedure for AMD 103 replacement.
B2
and
Plenum Gate
Note: After reconnecting the ground wire, measure
the ground integrity of the replaced FRU using a
digital multimeter (part 8496278) for 0.1 ohm or
less before any connectors are reconnected. Place
one probe on the machine frame near the replaced
FRU ensuring the painted surface is penetrated.
Place the other probe on any bare metal area of the
replaced FRU. If the measurement is 0.1 ohm or
less, you have a good ground. If the m.easurement is
greater than O. 1 ohm, check for an improperly
installed ground wire.
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1 ohm,
invoke your support structure.
/
/
-.....----AMD 103 or AMD 104
4381-3
81M 2676380
MI
I
PN 6169573
II
II-S;;;.e~9:a.-:;G~C~0::.;8::.;5:"'---.l._...;1....;o~f....;2~_ _--,__
Ie Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
I
I
EC A20558
EC A20562
01 Oct 84 _ 30 Aug 85 .
REM 085
REM 086
Air Moving Device 104
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3. Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCCI. and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4. Open rear cover of frame. and locate AMD 104.
5. Loosen the four cover mounting screws. and remove
the cover.
6. Disconnect cable
a.
7. Disconnect ground wire
m
8. Pull AMD 104 from frame.
81
and
Plenum Gate
9. Reverse procedure for AMD 104 replacement.
Note: After reconnecting the ground wire, measure
the ground integrity of the replaced FRU using a
digital multimeter (part 8496278) for 0.1 ohm or
less before any connectors are reconnected. Place
one probe on the machine frame near the replaced
FRU ensuring the painted surface is penetrated.
Place the other probe on any bare metal area of the
replaced FRU. If the measurement is 0.1 ohm or
less, you have a good ground. If the measurement is
greater than 0.1 ohm, check for an improperly
installed ground wire.
AFS106
AMD 104
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1 ohm,
invoke your support structure.
AMD
103
Rear View
AFS104
Right Side View
4381-3
B/M 2676380
I
MI
. Seq GC085
I
PN 6169573
• 2 of 2
EC A20558
a.-;;;O..:.1...;;O;;.;:c;.;.t.;;:8:...::;4---iL-=:'::::"';'~r..::.::.......&
REM 086
ID Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4
,t{~
'~-Y
O 0 0' 0
,.,'!
",.':'!
'J'
n
O""""-,,:~---·
tU 0': 'V
o o o o
·\ 0) '( j
'J
Oi ('_J! 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
'
'i
o
000
o
0000
(}
"'=
.... """.""""................._--...........""'"""""""'' ' "' ' ""'' ' ' ' ' '"' ' "' '.....'''''.........,.....""'.....,.
......
".,......,,'...
'.......,,""............,,'................-_................................_ ................................................._ ......._ _........"'-........__................_ _................_W__............H''''-''''N...."'........._·w
....·_.."........."......·W_...."·_,,·,,""'....
· ". ."....."'...."'...,.,,-'.,. . . . ._. . ....',,""'......'. . .'....'".,. .'"."",,-.......' '"..'"
.....""'"....,..
....._..........''''''',,'''''
......''''''.. ".....,..........-._
................._..._..........
" ....
" .......
"w_ _=......,""'.........._ _ _
....'...
__.,""'''_ _......,.
....
' ._'_........."'"""......,,......_.""....
" .......'_
.....,_."".,
"_''',"",'....
·'=T""'
....Q,"·....
- .........
'· ................
", .............._
.00;,
......
' ' ............
' ' ....
' ' ".............
'
..........
,. " . .""' ...."
i"
"'~.
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
REM 091
Air Moving Device 105
1. Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3. Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCe), and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4. Open front cover of frame.
5. Open service panel to gain access to front of AMO
105.
6. Loosen the four cover mounting screws, and remove
the cover.
7. Disconnect cable
IJ
8. Disconnect ground wire
m
9. Pull AMD 105 from frame.
10. Reverse procedure for AMD 105 replacement.
•
Note: After reconnecting the ground wire, measure
the ground integrity of the replaced FRU using a
digital multimeter (part 8496278) for O. 1 ohm or
less before any connectors are reconnected. Place
one probe on the machine frame near the replaced
FRU ensuring the painted surface is penetrated.
Place the other probe on any bare metal area of the
replaced FRU. If the measurement is 0.1 ohm or
less, you have a good ground. If the measurement is
greater than 0.1 ohm, check for an improperly
installed ground wire.
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1 ohm.
invoke your support structure.
Left Side
4381-3
B/M 2676380
e Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4
AMD 105
REM 091
REM 092
Air Moving Device 106
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
Gate 01B
2. Open left side cover of frame.
3.
Locate the Primary Control Compartment (pee), and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4. Open front cover of frame.
5.
Open gate Ole.
6. Loosen the four cover mounting screws, and remove
the cover.
7. Disconnect cable
8.
a.
Disconnect ground wire
.,1"·'
m
9. Pull AMD 106 from frame.
10. Reverse procedure for AM 0 106 replacement.
Note: After reconnecting the ground wire, measure
the ground integrity of the replaced FRU using a
digital multimeter (part 8496278) for 0.1 ohm or
less before any connectors are reconnected. Place
one probe on the machine frame near the replaced
FRU ensuring the painted surface is penetrated.
Place the other probe on any bare metal area of the
replaced FRU. If the measurement is 0.1 ohm or
less, you have a good ground. If the measurement is
greater than 0.1 ohm, check for an improperly
installed ground wire.
AMD 106
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1 ohm.
invoke your support structure.
Rear View
AMO 106
4381-3
81M 2676380
I
MI
Seq GC090
I
PN 6169574
2 of 2 .
EC A20558
L.....:0~1:.-0::::.c:.;t:..;8:.;4~..;.L...::::.:..:;;:.:~:.:....;.L
REM 092
CI Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
,(~
~-j/
0000000000
o o
'l\
(oj!
o
I"l\
'-Y
o o o
()
{~
~'-.JI
o o
n
'_JV
o
0 0
1
o o
()
o
0,
.,
o
0,
j
00
o
0000000000000000000000 000000000
REM 095
Air Moving Device 107
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3.
locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC), and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4.
locate AMD 107 on the left side of the frame.
5. Remove the two top mounting screws, loosen the
bottom mounting screw and remove the cover.
6. Remove the four mounting nuts and star washers,
inside the cage assembly.
E1 .
7.
Disconnect cable
8.
Disconnect ground wire
m
9. Pull AMD 107 from frame.
10. Reverse procedure for AMD 107 replacement.
Note: After reconnecting the ground wire, measure
the ground integrity of the replaced FRU using a
. digital multimeter (part 8496278) for 0.1 ohm or
less before any connectors are reconnected. Place
one probe on the machine frame near the replaced
FRU ensuring the painted surface is penetrated.
Place the other probe on any bare metal area of the
replaced FRU. If the measurement is 0.1 ohm or
less, you have a good ground. If the measurement is
greater than 0.1 ohm, check for an improperly
installed ground wire.
AMD 107
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1 ohm.
invoke your support structure.
left Side
Front View
4381-3
B/M 2676380
I
I
II
I
MI
PN 6169575
EC A20558
EC A20562
.....;;;.Se.;;.;g""--'G;;;..C;;;..0;;..;9;;..;5~--'......:1~o;:;..;f~1.:...-_ _- - I• . 01 Oct 84 . 30 Aug 85
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
REM 095
0000000000000000000000000000000000
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
Service Panel
1.
REM 101
Press Power Off at the operator control panel.
2. Open left side cover of frame.
3. Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC)' and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4. Open front cover of frame.
l!J 6 Places
fJ
5.
Loosen the two screws located at
(top and
bottom left side of the service panel).
6.
Open the panel.
7.
Remove connectors A 1, A2, and B2 located at
(rear of the service panel).
8.
Remove six card assembly holding screws shown at
9.
m
A2 Boards
m·
Reverse procedure for service panel replacement.
Note:
Reinstall the safety shield.
Rear View
4381-3
B/M 2676380
(D
I~~9
Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4
GC100
IPN
6169576
1 of 2
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
EC A20559
03 Dec 84
REM 101
REM 102
Diskette Drive
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel (OCP),
2.
Remove the diskette from the diskette drive.
18. Reverse the procedure for diskette drive replacement.
Note: After reconnecting the ground wire, measure
the ground integrity of the replaced FRU using a
digital multimeter (part 8496278) for O~ 1 ohm or
less before any connectors are reconnected. Place
one probe on the machine frame near the replaced
FRU ensuring the painted surface is penetrated.
Place the other probe on any bare metal area of the
replaced FRU. If the measurement is 0.1 ohm or
less, you have a good ground. If the measurement is
greater than O. 1 ohm. check for an improperly
installed ground wire.
3. Open the left side cover of the frame.
4. Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC), and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
5. Open the front cover of the frame.
6. Locate the cover stay on the upper right cover hinge.
7.
Remove one end of the cover stay by slipping it over
the mounting stud.
8.
Open gate 01 C, and locate the rear of the diskette
drive to be removed.
9.
Disconnect the power plug
drive.
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1 ohm,
invoke your support structure.
IJ from the diskette
10. Remove the stop bracket at rear of the diskette drive
baseCl .
m
11. Slide the diskette drive to the rear, permitting enough
space to disconnect the ground wire at
II .
12. Go to the front of gate 01C, and open the service
panel door (two screws).
13. Slide diskette drive forward, and remove the right
side plastic shield
which covers the circuit card on
right side of the unit (Loosen three screws).
m
iii
14. Remove the two shielded ground wires 'at
15. Cut the tie wrap at
II
ED .
16. Disconnect the signal cable
the circuit card.
II from the bottom of
11"1'1
Ii
I "''''''''-1
m
17. Pull the diskette drive unit out from the rear.
m.
Note: The cover
top bracket
a,
!J
~.
[I
(Drive 1)
bottom bracket
IJ. and handle 13 must be exchanged from the old
m
diskette drive to the new diskette drive.
m
(Drive 2)
4381-3
81M 2676380
fMI
l.!!,g
GC100
I
PN. 6169576
2 of 2
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
EC A20559
03 Dec 84
REM 102
o Copvright IBM Corp. 1984
r-)
,-·,
0
.
0
-" '
'I,
·0, 0"
'. -'
0··,:' ( ) O O ( ) ) o
\
"
:;.t
o
() 0 0 OOOOOO()OOO
')1
( ]V
""",
y
. ("
o
"')1
(, J;
000
co')
l,-y
C:
,
''''''
'J
"II"
b'bi'.
w
•• _ . ' - - " " , •
fir
4ft
'MN'¥!E?'9'eW'" ,',+=
"\,".......1"Y'ngu• •"'QlW5
"if "!II
'9'..0,,,,*,, in' "'IEU""MWWU! !I
II· It '!"If 'dHl!f'
IIIt'I,.,lIt1!mn!f' i"U'ftWflNI'U
11"1 ,""\','\"\W+!WC' IltiWJ41
LklLWWM'U!jN'JI4.*,.' .l'iHrilAH 'bbf"
,·1
1 dlU'fIlU ,r .willJptJ;it..MYM;*'.,Ji,"tI,l.j' .. 'Wt!iNM..;,......".".,r:u .. ,
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
PM 001
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Air Filters
Examine the air filters for dust accumulation and vacuum
as necessary. Replace filters that do not pass light after
vacuuming.
This procedure should be performed on a annual basis or
as the environment requires.
)
The following filters and their locations are contained in
the processor:
Part Number
8645605
8645606
8645607
8645608
8645609
4381
B/M 2676380
Location
AMO 101
AMO 102
AMO 103 and 104
AMO 105 and 106
Left side cover
I~~g
I
PN 6169617
GD005
II
EC A20558
I
. 1 of 1 ·L.~O:..:.1...!O~C:.;T:...::::84::....J.L..-_ _ _""'_ _ _ _"""_ _ _ _-""-_ _ _ _"'"
PM 001
0000000000000000000000000000000000·
I!!lI"jjJ!i'ifiIJ3!!·!!I!!'~lmI""'T"!W!!Ii!N..f,;""'m"'I"',':"·,jDi,.¥*rit
"d'"
!I""" 44.6,*4
&&
""111
,'t'
rlll.II
I
, ...lUII
Iff
I
.,
""
,
,
Y!"';lip"My".
,II
"
".",';jJ..!,
I
I'
'c.!ll!iWULI/·IW'
"f' 'UlIWdHrW
~·I·""
'r
"". shift register
error
MC/PC timeout error
MC/PC parity error
MC/PC parity error
MC/PC timeout error
FO
FO
FO
FO
2x01 Fa
2x02 Fa
2xAl Fa
2xA2 Fa
Shift data error
Control register data bad
MC/PC timeout error
MC/PC parity error
x eauals 5 for SBA '1 and x eauals 0 for SBA 2.
, and x eQuals A for SBA2.
Note: Reference codes FD 2802 F8 and FD 2E02 Fa are normal if routine is
looped. Other reference codes are:
FD
FD
FO
FO
FO
2x01
2x02
2x03
2xE1
2xE2
Fa
Fa
Fa
F8
F8
Control error on data write
Control register data error
Status error after two control commands
MC/PC timeout error
MC/PC parity error
x eauals 6 for SBA 1 and x eaualsE fo(SBA 2:
4381
B/M 2676380
fMI
~ GE030
PN 6169399
' 2 of 3
EC A20558,
01 Oct 84
I
•I I
'
,'
(I
,
DIAG 050
C Copyright IBM Corp. '984
o
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0' 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000
1
'''''v ""it
r
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
DIAG 051
Test
Test 2 Routine
7 and Routine
F
Test 3
Routines 1 to
F and Test 4
Routines 1 to
Description
Tests SBA timer interrupt (level 1). Reference codes are:
Failed to set basic status bit 7 (SBA 1)
FD 2701 F8
FD 2702 F8
Failed to set lORR bit 1
Failed to reset IORR bit 1
FD 2703 Fa
Interrupt in 250 msec after reset
FD 2704 F8
SBA interrupt with enable bit reset
FD 2705 F8
x equals IORR; interrupt not at level 1
FD 27xO F8
Failed to set basic status bit 7 (SBA 2)
FD 2FOl F8
TestLCA over the support processor bus.
Note:
Reference code F2 3144 F8 can occur if the PU is powered up or the
LCA was enabled before. Reference codes are:
Test
Test 8
Routines 1
and 2
Diskette
Loader Tracks
5 and 6
Description
Tests basic PCA communication. Reference codes are:
F6 81xx F8
F6 82xx F8
Sense card 1 failure
F6 828x F8
Sense card 1 failure
F6 829x F8
Sense card 2 failure
F6 82Ax F8
Sense card 2 failure
F6 a2Bx F8
Timeout on read sense
F6 a2F1 F8
Support processor parity check
F6 a2F2 Fa
Load optional diagnostics, parity check upper 32K of storage.
Reference codes are:
5
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
3144 F8
3155 F8
3180 F8
4F11 F8
4F15 FB
RRRR F8
S/370 interface no.t disabled
S/370 interface bit disabled
A burst mode operation caused the LCA to hang
LCA hang in level 0
LeA hang in level 0
See below forRRRR values ..
Error Codes for Tests 3 and 4
F2 RRRR Fa
~
Error code (see below)
Routine number
Test number C3 or 4}
Error codes:
Descripti()n
01
No I/O interrupt
Unexpected I/O interrupt
Set interrupt pending failed
No I/O interrupt
No expected machine check
MC/PC when not expected
SP write timeout
SP read timeout
SP read buffer overflow
Command rejected (10 retries)
Status not as expected
Command reject on I/O interrupt
I/O interrupt did not occur
LCA is disabled
04
05
06
07
08
09
10 to 1F
20 to 2C
30 to 33
40
55
F5
F5
F5
F5
F5
F5
F5
Fl
Fl
F1
F5
F5
F5
F5
F5
1B01 Fa
1B03 F8
180A F8
180C F8
1B12 F8
1815 F8
1B20 F8
1C01 F8
lC02 F8
lC15 F8
1001 F8
1DOA F8
1DOC F8
1012 F8
1015 F8
Diskette drive 1 timeout
Support processor check
Diskette drive 1 not ready·
Bad status
Data read error
No error bypass
Seek error
Storage error
Storage error on cycle steal
No error bypass
Timeout diskette drive 1
Diskette drive 1 not ready
Wrong status .
CRC errors
No error bypass
Diskette Drive 2
yy
02
03
Diskette Drive 1
:~:; 2676380 I~~g GE030
~ Copyright IBM Corp, 1984
F5
F5
F5
F5
F5
F5
F5
F5
F5
F5
F5
F5
1B81 F8
1B83 F8
lB8A F8
1B8C F8
1892 F8
1B95 F8
1BAO F8
1015 F8
1D81F8
1D8A F8
1D8C Fa
1092 F8
Diskette drive 2 timeout
Support processor check
Diskette drive 2 not ready
Bad status
Data read error
No error bypass
Seek error
No error bypass
Timeout diskette drive 2
Diskette drive 2 not ready
Wrong status
CRC errors
DIAG 051
alias_SES 4 £5i!ii1 au I iii I
a
21 II
'"-_.. _'--
toooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooo
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
DIAG 055
MSS Repair Action Screens
When an error is detected during the MSS Extended or
Optional diagnostics, a Repair. Action screen is displayed
as a guide for the repair. The Repair Action screen lists
suspected FRUs and gives a Repair Procedure reference
to be used if the repair is not successful. The Repair
Action screens are:
Reference
Code
FOxxxxF8
Option
Repair Action
FF
Reseat or exchange the following:
FlxxxxF8
FF
Support Processor
01AA2 H2
Reseat or exchange the following:
CE
Support processor storage
01AA2 J2
SuoDort processor
01AA2 H2
Reseat or exchange the following:
F8xxxxF8
01AA202
01AA2 R2
F5xxOAF8
F5xxxxF8
FDxxxxF8
AO
AO
FF
F2xxxxF8
F6xxxxF8
FExxxxF8
I
II
PN 6169400
.1M4
.
C Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
EC A2055S1
L.~0~1~O~c~t~8~4~L.
Check diskette cover
SBA 1
SBA 2
Converter
FF
Note: FD2301 FB is a normal reference code if
you did not power off before running MSS
diagnostics.
Reseat· or exchange the following:
FF
LCA
01AA2 V2
01AA2 W2 LCA
LCA
01AA2 X2
Reseat or exchange the following:
DO
PCA
01AA2D2
PCA
01AA2 E2
PCA
01AA2 F2
Reseat or ~xchange the following:
01AA2P2
01AA204
Cable goes to ports 0
through 3 on 01 F gate
DCA
DCA
Note: F8Cx03F8 is a normal reference code if no
device is attached to .port x.
Go to "MSS Repair" on paRe MSS 001
Go to "MSS Repair" on page MSS 001
Reseat or: exchange the following:
01AA2 T2
01AA2 S2
01AA2 U2
Notes
Verify jumpers on 02 and
E2
RSF
RSF
________-L________-L________~________~
DIAG055
DIAG 060
Running the Power Controller Adapter
(PCA) Tests Manually
The diagnostics for the PCA are on the FUNC 1 diskette
and are run after the MSS diagnostics when the processor
is IMLed. If a failure occurs, a reference code is displayed.
To run the PCA tests manually:
1.
Set the I/O Power Hold switch to Normal.
2.
Set the CE Mode switch to CE Mode.
3.· Set the Power Off switch to Power Off.
4.· Install FUNC1 in diskette drive 1.
5.
Reset the Power Off switch to Normal. and press
Power·On.
6.
When the Partial Power screen appears~ move the
cursor to theCOIVIMAND fie1d, key in QWP, and
press ENTER. The PCA tests run.
Note: After running the peA routines, the MSS must be
powered off and powered on again before any MSS
.
diagnostics are run because of the special reset used for
the PCA.
4381
B/M 2676380
rMI
l.!!9
GE035
PN 61 69400
20f4
PCA Diagnostic Reference Codes
Reference Code
F6 0101 FA to F6
0103 FA
F6 0201 FA to F6
0204 FA
F6 0301 FA to F6
0313 FA
F6 0401 FA to F6
0410 FA
F60501 FA to F6
0504 FA
F60601 FA
F60701 FA to F6
0704 FA
F60801 FA to F6
0808 FA
F6 0901 FA to F6
0908 FA
F61101 FAtoF6
1106 FA
F6 1301 FA to F6
1305 FA
F6 1401 FA
F6 1601 FA to F6
1607 FA
F6 1801 FA
FRUs
01A A2F2
DescriPtion
Latch modules cannot be reset.
01A A2F2,D2
Sense card 2 latch modules cannot be reset.
01A A2D2,E2,F2
Latch module, byte address, or data bits bad.
01A A2D2,F2
Sense card 2 address bad.
01A A2E2
Data bits for sense card 1 cannot be set.
01A A2F2
01A A2F2,E2,D2
Sense card 2 latch module data bits bad.
Test sense bytes.
01A A2F2,E2,D2
Read digital sense bytes.
01A A2F2,E2,D2
Sense bytes not equal to FF.
01A A2D2,E2
DAC not wit~in 25% of MSS reference voltage.
01A A2D2,E2
DAC do not compare equal.
01A A2D2 E2 F2
01AA2D2,E2
InterrUPt byte is bad.
Timeout circuit does not reset the control latches.
01AA2F4
Serial number is wrong.
EC A20558.1
~0~1~O~c~t~8~4__•_________~______~~~______~~______~
DIAG 060
III copyright IBM CorP. 1984
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 () 000 OC) 000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1
0000000000000000000000000000000000
DIAG 069
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
I
PN 6169400
.3m4
• Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
II EC
A20558
I
.~.~01~O~~~8~4~.______~____~______~____~
DIAG 069
DIAG 070
Optional MSS Diagnostics
Running Optional MSS Diagnostics
Optional MSS diagnostics are on the DIAG 1 diskette and
give additional testing for:
1. Set the CE Mode switch to Normal.
•
Service panel
•
Diskette drives
•
2.
Set the I/O Power Hold switch to I/O Power Hold.
3.
Set the Power Off switch to Power Off.
4.
Install DIAG 1 in diskette drive 1.
5.
Reset the Power Off switch to Normal, and press
Power On. Basic and Extended MSS diagnostics run
after power up.
Optional MSS Diagnostics Selection Screen
************************* BASIC MSS DIAGNOSTICS COMPLETED *********************
*********************************************************************************
*********************** EXTENDED MSS DIAGNOSTICS COMPLETED ********************
MAKE SELECTION, ENTER DESIRED OPTION:
Device Cluster Adapter (DCA)
•
Optional printers and displays
•
RSF.
6.
While the Optional MSS diagnostics are running, any
errors detected are indicated by Repair Action screens
that guide you in the repair of the problem.
Key in the selected option from the MSS Optional
Diagnostic Selection screen, and press ENTER.
For additional information on running the MSS Optional
diagnostics, refer to the flowchart and notes on page
DIAG 075.
OPTIONS
(FF)
(90)
(AO)
(CE)
(DO)
(EO)
LOOP MSS BASIC AND EXTENDED DIAGNOSTICS
RUN OPTIONAL SERVICE PANEL DIAGNOSTICS
RUN OPTIONAL DDA/DRIVE TESTS
TEST ALL CONSOLE/PRT PORTS
RUN RSF ADAPTER DIAGNOSTICS
RUN RSF CABLE WRAP TEST
(EIA INTERFACE
NOTE: CABLE WRAP PLUG MUST BE INSTALLED
(9F=LOOP)
(AF=LOOP)
(CF=LOOP)
(DF=LOOP)
ONLY. EF=LOOP)
THEN PRESS ENTER:
TO TERMINATE LOOPING, PRESS IMLBUTTON.
4381
B/M 2676380
o Copyright IBM Corp.
o
rMI
l.!!9.
PN 6169400
GE035
40f4
EC A20668 .1
~0_'_0_~_·_8_4__~.______--~--______~________~~____~
DIAG 070
1984
() OOOOOOIOO()OOOO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
o
OOOOOO()C
"".,",.....
, .. ,....
' .......
" •••o,..,·.....
·'·WI'''''''''''...
''""''''"'W
...."....
·"..
'''''......
,,,......i'....
11 "...
·..:.',""",.;"....
,.,"""
.. """....
,.'OiIW'III/IIIo."OIIl'"'IIU.WIJ;l;"·':.>IiW':IIU.'!!";jjJ."!f'""","""','""""·"....
''''....
~.'''''
.. ''''''''"'"''~~.,,Ei,i.·!_
....ulBbiiIriiiioM""Iow'.'-.iB~'-""IIiU·eOii'·'iIIIi!'!j'[~"'[I.j;.j!!
..
..i.lIi·w~!i"·'IW!!!·'IiIIIiBD·......'''"''''""'''''·'''·0'''"""...
,11......Dicl"'i...
'••'_"".""''''_ _.............
',,'"...
"Ii!!
"II
", ...
"',,,MI',.,."" '." ."".·iij,eilii.'.,.,,,
,I"
"'",.! . ". 111"'""'111",.,,,," +
I """'Il!
I
HUI't' QI*'y"f'
.H."f"
,M ........;h."pke , '''!.Ii'
!
nW"'
I!'!I!I
'''''';'''''11 •.If
'n'
* )r'N h
"I "
II I.,!.!
d' !'lIIW"'rr II'!
'fI')"1!
11' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ; " •• " . . .
,.'#"4$'*1 f "t"'· , • r "
,t"
.1"",.""," jj fwewtWH' k
i"'d"'" i ' " "
• "'tt#"H
=tH"
'&"\bdN"dfM
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
DIAG 075
<. . .
1. When the service panel displays 80000,. press and
release Logic Reset. The service panel then displays
the following:
_S_TA_RT_.-J>
I
Make a selection from
80000
81111
82222
83333
84444
85555
86666
~----------------------~:~the MSS Optional
Diagnostic Selection
screen.
t
MSS extended
diagnostics run one
time as follows:
SP tests
UU=FO
SP storage
{upper 72K} UU=Fl
UU=FD
SBA
UU=f2
LCA
. UU=F6
PCA
Yes
>---IH
87777
88888
99999
AAAAA
BBBBB
cecec
EEEEE
FFFFF
F0123
F4567
F89AB
FCDEF
DDDDD
The time between displays is two to four seconds.
The test is complete when FCDEF is displayed. After
displaying FCDEF, the service panel continues to
display the current SP storage ~ddress.
IML
terminates
-loop
2. Place the OIAG 1 diskette in the diskette drive to be
tested.
I
FF option
selected?
S.
Notes:
See "Running Optional MSS Diagnostics".
Basic MSS diagnostics
in SP ROS and on the
DIAGl diskette run.
3. .Options CO - C3 loop the tests to the selected
console (ports 0 - 3). Option CF loops all consoles.
Option CE tests each console one time.
Failures sensed by the EIA cable wrap test (Ex) are
indicated by a reference code FE EOxx F8, where xx
is the failing line as shown below:
FE EOEE F8 - Send or receive data
(TO or RD) failure.
FE EOFF F8 - CCA card failure.
FE EOxx Fa
~~
Out
o-
OTR
1 - RTS
2 - SSB
3 - DRS
CTS
OCD
DRS
DSR
DTR
RI
RTS
SSB
In
4
5
6
7
-
DSR
CTS
DCD
RI
Clear to send
Data carrier detect
Data rate select
Data set ready
Data terminal ready
Ring indicator
Request to send
Select standby
4. The reference codeF8 Cx03 F8 is a normal stop if no
device is attached to port ID=x or the device on port
ID=xis not ready. To bypass this stop, key in G and
press ENTER.
For a wiring diagram of the EIA interface cable, see
Volume AOS, Service Aids, "E1A Adapter Configuration."
No
~
(Note 1)
Service panel
tests.
9F loops test
Option 90 see
prompting
screen.
o Copyright IBM Corp.
1984
(Note 2)
,
OOA and drive
AF loops test
UU
F5
=
AO
90
:~::2676380 I~~g
5. TheDa and OF options are for all RSF adapters. The
Track 51 6 loader and
upper 6qK SP storage
are tested (UU = F5).
or_Ex
Cx
1
....._ _ Dx
__
_ _ _-,
9x
_______________
J
Ax
GE040
Select
diskette
drive 1 or 2.
(Notes
3, 4)
Console/print
ports
CE runs each
port one time
CF loops all
ports.
Cx loops the
selected port
(0-3 ).
UU = F8
(Notes 5, 6)
EO and EF options are only for the EIA interface and
allow testing the cable to the external modem in
wrap mode. Disconnect the EIA interface cable at the
modem end, and install the wrap plug before
selecting the Ex options.
Remote Support
Faci I ity (RSF)
OF or EF loops
UU
FE
=
DO or EO
DIAG 075
=
22
au
illii
;
t:
DIAG 080
Optional MSS Diagnostics by UU Codes
MSS Optional Diagnostics by Test 10
Diskette Tests (Option AO)
UU
Code
Area
Tested
Test
10
Routine
10
F5
Diskette Drive Adapter
F8
FE
Display Console Adapter
Remote Support Facility
A
B
C
0
E
1 and 2
1,6,B to E
1 to 3
1 to E
1 to 5
Tests A and B run on the diskette drive you select. For the error code
Example of Reference Code from MSS Optional Diagnostics
A4
Test and routine ID (Diskette speed check)
F5
Reference code (UU RRRR IS)
UU code from
ta~le
ALxx
Fa
J
above
(xx)
values, see "Test A and B Error Codes" on page
,DIAG 085.
Error inforniation
Fa indicatesMSS diagnostics
Test
Test A/B
Routine 1
Test A Routine
2
Test A Routine
3
Test A Routine
4
Test A Routine
5
Test A/B
Routine 6
Test A/B
Routine B
Test A/B
Routine C
Test A/B
Routine D
Test A/B
Routine E
Description
Verifies diskette adapter interrupts.
UU RRRR
F5 B1xx
Tests pointers and access lines.
F5 A2xx
Verifies that CCA can detect wrong commands.
F5 A3xx
Checks diskette speed.
F5 A4xx
Checks that diskette head engages/disengages.
F5 A5xx
Routine A selects head 0; routine B selects head 1. Checks cylinders 0-75
can be read. Verifies with read 10.
Routine A selects head 0; routine B selects head 1. Writes 256 bytes of
X'FF' on cylinder 75 record 4.
Routine A selects head 0; routine B selects head 1. Writes 256 bytes of
X'A50F' on c-'llinder 74 record 4.
Routine A selects head 0; routine B selects head 1. Writes 256 bytes of
data on cylinder 8, record 1 and on cylinder 74, record 1 ~ then compares
the data.
Routine A selects head 0; routineS selects head 1. Verifies busy and no
record found can be detected.
F5 A/S6xx
F5 A/SBxx
F5A/SCxx
F5 A/BDxx
F5 A/SExx
I
II;
1
!
IJI
j
11
II
h
U
4381
81M 2676380
fMI
l!!9.
CI Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
~
PN 6169401
GE040
2~2
EC A20558 .1
~0~1_0_~~8~4~~.
______~~~~____~~______~________~
DIAG 080
0000000000000000000000000 000000000'
II
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
DIAG 085
85
86
87
88
Ox
Test A and 8 Error Codes
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
OC
OF
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
25
27
28
29
38
39
3A
43
44
47
51
53
54
55
56
57
59
58
5C
50
5E
60
61
62
66
67
80
81
82
83
84
Diskette adapter hang
MC/PC during cycle steal
MC/PC from storage
MC/PC from DDA
Write A buffer odd parity failed
Read A buffer odd parity failed
Read A buffer even parity failed
Write B buffer odd parity failed
Read B buffer odd parity failed
Read B buffer even parity failed
Diskette error check
Not valid command was not detected
Head not engaged
CRC error
Command reject
Hardware failed
Read control record failed
Busy
Busy not detected
Timeout
Record not found
Drive not ready
Wrong status
Error bypass not permitted
Head lifted too soon
Head lifted too late
Wrong head selected
MC/PC from I/O operation
Wrong level interrupt
More than 1 interrupt: level
Record format wrong
Format data wrong
Head not engaged
Cylinder 0 10 or CRC error
Write format error
Record 3 not found
Wrong status on read
Diskette too fast
Diskette too slow
Write/read miscompare
Cylinder 74 or 75 not found
Cylinder 75 not found
Cylinder 8 not found.
Flagged track
Wrong cylinder
Record not found failed to set
Interrupted with interrupt disabled
SP bus error
Level 5 interrupt from level 7 failed
Status register not reset
Status register not set
Channel pointer not reset
Read/write channel pointer failed
Extended status not reset
4381
B/M 2676380
I~~g
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GE045
I
Load record count failed
Diagnostic request did not reset
Set control register failed
Read/write access failed
No interrupt received (x=diagnostic sense)
DCA Adapter Tests (Options CO-C3. CEo or CF)
For the values of the error codes (xx) in the diagnostic
reference codes, see "Test C Error Codes." Test CE runs
tests CO-C3 one time. Test CF loops tests CO-C3.
Test
Test C Routine
Tests console on port O.
UU RRRR
Fa COxx
Tests console or printer on port 1.
Fa Clxx
Tests console or printer on port 2.
Fa C2xx
Tests console or printer on port 3.
Fa C3xx
Descr~tion
0
Test C Routine
1
Test C Routine
2
Test C Routine
3
Test C Error Codes
01
02
03
04 to 1C
DCA port failed
DCA port failed
No power on response
Device or DCA failure
Note: F8 Cx03 F8 is a normal stop if no device is
attached to port x.
II
PN 6169402
.1 m2
.
EC A20558
I
L.~0~1~O~c~t~8~4~~.________~________~________~________~
DIAG085
DIAG 090
CCA Tests (Options DO and EO)
Test
Test 0
Routine 1
Test 0
Routine 2
Test 0
Routine 3
Test 0
Routine 4
Test 0
Routine 5
Descriotion
Verifies CCA (RSF) commands. Reference codes are:
FE 0101 F8
Timeout
Parity error
FE 0102 F8
Modem bits wrong
FE 0103 F8
Verifies not valid CCA commands set errors.
Timeout
FE 0201 F8
MC/PC not set by invalid command
FE 0202 F8
Cannot reset MC/PC bits
FE 0203 F8
Verifies CCA control register reset and read.
Control register wrong after reset
FE 0301 F8
Wrong data pattern in control register
FE.0302 F8
Wrong data pattern in control register
FE 0303 F8
Wrong control register reset
FE 0304 F8
Wrong control register reset
FE 0305 F8
Verifies modem control register reset and read commands.
Wrong modem control register reset/read
FE 0401 F8
Wrong modem control register write/read
FE 0402 F8
.FE0403 F8
Write/read test data failure
Load/test control register failure
FE 0404 F8
Verifies modem status register (bits 2,3, and 6 are not tested).
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
4381
81M 2676380
0501 F8
0502 F8
0503 F8
0504 F8
0505 F8
0506 F8
0507 F8
0508 F8
0509 F8
050A F8
0508 F8
lMI
~ GE045
UU RRRR
Test
Test 0
Routine 6
FE 01xx
FE 02xx
Test 0
Routine 7
FE 03xx
Test 0
Routine 8
FE 04xx
Test 0
Routine 9
Failed to set modem interrupt
No OSR transition interrupt
Failed to reset modem interrupt
No modem interrupt onCTS transition
Wrong modem status on CTS transition
Failed to reset transition indicators
No modem interrupt on CTS transition
Failed to set CTS transition indicator
Failed to reset modem interrupt
Failed to set OSR transition
Wrona status after set send command
Test 0
Routine A
FE 07xx
No timer interrupt, set to X'FF01'
FE 0701 F8
Wrong timer interrupt, set to X'O 100'
FE 0702 F8
No interrupt high byte set to X'80'
FE 0703 F8
Check set/reset of enable/disable bit.
FE 08xx
Failed to set enable
FE 0801 F8
Failed to reset enable
FE 0802 F8
Check set/reset of output request, input request, and adapter in sync bits.
FE 09xx
Adapter not in sync after transmit
Adapter control register wrong
Input request on after transmit
Adapter not in sync after transmit
(x equals 1 through 5) Timeout waiting for output
request
Adapter not in sync after transmit
FE 09F6 F8
Unexpected status in transmit
FE 09F7 F8
Check that input request is stopped if receive mode is off.
FE OAxx
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
0901 F8
0902 F8
0903 F8
0904 F8
09Fx F8
OA01 F8
OA02 Fa
OA03 F8
OAFx F8
OAF6 F8
Adapter in sync not on
Adapter control register wrong
Input request not on
(x equals 1 through 5) Timeout on output request
Adapter not. in sync after transmit
I
PN 6169402EC A2055.a/
,.
20f2
~0~1~O~c~t~a~4~~.____~__~__~__~~.~~____~________~.
DIAG 090
" Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
o
FE 06xx
Early timer interrupt, high byte
FE 0601 F8
No timer interrupt, high byte
FE 0602 F8
Failed to reset timer interrupt
FE 0603 F8
Early timer interrupt, low byte
FE 0604 F8
No timer interrupt, low byte
FE 0605 F8
Failed to reset timer interruot
FE 0606 F8
Verifies operation of timer controls.
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE 05xx
UU RRRR
DescriDtion
Verifies correct interval and reset of TI in basic status.
00 0 0·0 0 0 0 O· 0 0 () 0 0 0 0 0 0 -0 0 0 0 0 0
o
0 -0 ··-0 0 0 000'-·
"m~'''.IIW!:tOlll'''rOlWlnu*"""""!"'' ' ' W",!¥",·,,,",,,,wr'' ' Id'..........
' "...
".....
"' ...
''1M
...
'HI''"*''"lW"""",,"_'0"""" ' Y,;,....
III!!,_.......
',;uM'k+4**
...'.I..IIo''............
"I'jWj!!ll'IIIII"M'l Wlif/oil ;!Oi,,"'"ILbI!!...
yUI'If""''HE...
"t'...
1"""",'1","'.,.."t"'"o.-.............._w1ii/o',...
"#...t...·...
' .......~'....
' .....
' .!lllIIo::I',"t...
'Q'''. . .' .·,·'
. ..I!II''
. ....
V"Ili>J''!fW...
' "nd...
'!!I!'..................
M'...
W'"""""U"HIQ',Ullnw'i·riHl'!:t'nlZrzlddJ'
t
u ...
1',"\ 'M'!I'L!!!1z4!.I,L'Jll ','++,LII"*"
,t~!h'nI'.'''t""
H ".f'. I
'e',
I/fl!H\w4d.i
we.. '
i
'
. I.,
+!tJ\L
%T'·t!!'.'w.w~L,*!\I!H!!J4!MIW
k!l '§I"'41!1'H'Hf'I"'PM""lIfll'i'''''lIId'w,N
.q!!l[
."ir'';'".''.''' 'd'.;,
000000 •• 00000000000000000 000000000·
DIAG 095
Test
DescriPtion
UURRRR
Test 0
Routine B
Check that SOLC frame bit sets and resets
FE OBxx
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
Test 0
Routine C
Test 0
Routine 0
OB01 F8
OB02 F8
OB03 F8
OB04 F8
OB05 F8
OB06 F8
OBFx F8
OBF6 F8
OBF7 F8
Check that test underrun bits set and reset.
Invalid sequence with no exception bit
SOLC frame bit not on
SOLC invalid sequence not set
SOLC invalid sequence not reset
(x equals 1 through .5) Timeout on output request
Adapter not in sync after transmit
F~~
Out
o-
DTR
1 - RTS
2 - SSB
3 - DRS
In
4 - OSR
5 - CTS
6 - DCD
7 - RI
I~~9
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GE050
RTS
SSB
Description
UU RRRR
Check 15 ones recognition using SOLC.
FE Elxx
FE El01 F8
FE E102 F8
FE E1F7 F8
FE OOxx
Test E Routine
2
FE E201 F8
FE E202 F8
FE E2F1 F8
FE OExx
Test E
Routines 3
and 4
FE E2xx
Timeout waiting for output request reset
No adapter in sync or frame bits
Unexoected status error dufina test
Check DOA and modem data paths in wrap mode. Routine 3 is CCA wrap,
routine 4 is modem wrap. (x equals 3 or 4 in the following.)
FE Ex01 Fa
FE Ex02 F8
FE Ex03 F8
FE Ex04 F8
FE Ex05 F8
FE Ex06 Fa
FE Ex07 F8
FE Ex08 F8
FE Ex09 F8
FE ExOA Fa
FE ExOB F8
FE ExOC F8
FE ExOO F8
FE ExOE F8
FE ExOF F8
FE ExFF Fa
FE E3FE F8
FE E4FA F8
No transmit or receive data connection
CCA card failure
Wrap in/out does not match. For x and V values, see "Test
E Routine 0 Error Codes."
SOLC invalid sequence bit not on
SOLe invalid sequence bit not reset
Une~ected statuS.during test
Check repeated frame insertion.
FE ExFx
Timer interrupt before CTS
Timer interrupt after. CTS
All data transmitted; stop receiving
Modem status error
Overrun/underrun
Output request with transmit off
Input request; no data transmitted
Input request; last data already received
Received data does not equal expected data
Input request before flag in SOLC
Basic status invalid
Invalid exception
SOLe frame on; adapter not in SOLC
Data decoded as SOLC flag
Adapter status error
Timeout on adapter interrupt
Wrong level interrupt in' SP IORR
Modem wrap with DSR off
Check if SP check is on from any preceding RSF test.
FE E5xx F8
B/M 2676380
OTR
Rt
Clear to send
Data carrier detect
Data rate select
Data set ready
Data terminal ready
Ring indicator
Request to send
Select standby
Test
Test E Routine
5
4381
DCD
DRS
DSR
Test E Routine
1
Check external cable wrap (for EIA interface only).
FE EOEE F8
FE EOFF F8
FE EOxy F8
CTS
FE OCBx
Failed to set overrun bit
Failed to reset overrun bit
(x equals 1 through 5) Timeout waiting for output
request
Adaoter not in sync after transmit
FE OOF6 F8 .
Check that SOLC invalid sequence bits set and reset.
FE OE01 F8
FE OE02 F8
FE OE03 F8
FE OE04 F8
FEOEFx Fa
FE OEF6 F8
Test E Routine
0
-
Failed to set underrun bit
FE OCBOl F8
Failed to reset underrun bit
FE DCB02 F8
Unexpected status durin a transmit
FE DeBF7 F8
Check that test overrun bits set and reset.
FE 0001 F8
FE 0002 F8
FE OOFx F8
Test 0
Routine E
More than exception bit in status
Adapter in sync and SOLC frame not on
Control register wrong after pad transmit
Except interrupt pending not set
SOLC frame bit not set
SOLC frame bit not reset
(x equals 1 through 5) Timeout during output request
Adapter not in sync after transmit
Unexpected status during transmit
Test E Routine 0 Error Codes
FE E5xx
SP check (xx eQuals SP check register).
DIAG 095
DIAG 100
Diskette Analysis
The Diskette Analysis test is on the FUNC1 diskette. It
can be used to check any of the functional or diagnostic
diskettes for unreadable records.
To run the test:
Diskette Drive Status Bits
Bits
Values
Meaning
0-1:
00
01
10
11
Good ending
CRC Error
Command Error
Hardware Error
2-4:
000
Operation Complete
Control Complete
Busy
Overrun!Underrun
Timeout
Record not found
Diskette not ready
1. With the FU NC 1 diskette in diskette drive 1, key in
QED and press ENTER.
2.
3.
4.
Note that a starting cylinder number (00), starting
record number (01), and drive number (2) are given.
Either use these default values or specify your own
values for cylinder, record, and drive number.
001
0,11
100
101
110
111
Insert the diskette to be analyzed (into the diskette
drive selected above).
5:
SP Check
6:
Adapter enable
7:
Interrupt pending
Press ENTER to start the diskette analysis.
To continue the analysis if error information fills the
screen, press ENTER. To cancel the analysis, press CNCl.
Diskette Analysis Test Selection and Error Display Screens
*DISKETTE ANALYSIS*
*ERROR DISPLAYS*
I
TO START: 1} SELECT STARTING CYLINDER AND RECORD NUMBER
(DEFAULT IS RECORD 1 ON CYLINDER 0).
2) SELECT DISK DRIVE FOR ANALYSIS (DEFAULT IS DRIVE 2).
3) INSERT DISK TO BE ANALYZED INTO SELECTED DRIVE.
4) PRESS THE ENTER KEY.
00 STARTING CYLINDER NUMBER (00 - 4C)
01 STARTING RECORD NUMBER (01 - lA BACK-HEAD)
(81 - 9A FRONT-HEAD)
(1 - 2)
2 TARGET DRIVE FOR ANALYSIS
TO EXIT:
1) MAKE SURE ORIGINAL DISKETTES ARE INSTALLED.
2) SELECT ANY SCREEN.
Q GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
COMMAND: QED
NOTE: ALL NUMBERS IN HEX
==>
For an example of diskette errors, see "Diskette Analysis
Test Error Display Screen." If there are more errors than·
one screen can display, press ENTER to display the
additional error screens. For a definition of the diskette
drive status bits, see "Diskette Drive Status Bits."
*ERROR DISP1AYS*
*DtSKETTE ANALYSIS*
LINE CYLINDER HEAD
NUMB NUMBER
o
09
FRONT
1
23
BACK
RECORD MODULE DEVICE
NUMBER
ID . STATUS
83
01
4351
FFFF
42
42
PARAMETERS ARE
GIVEN IN HEX
IF SCREEN IS FULL AND ANALYSIS IS NOT COMPLETE: PRESS ENTER
TO CANCEL ANALYSIS: INSTALL ORIGINAL DISKETTES, PRESS CNCL KEY
IF ANALYSIS IS COMPLETE: INSTALL ORIGINAL DISKETTES, SELECT ANY SCREEN
COMMAND: QED
4381
81M 2676380
rMI
~ GE050
o Copyright ISM Corp. 1984
o ()
==>
PN 6169403EC A20558. ·1
~O~1~O~c~t~8~4~•.___~______~__~~__~___________~_________~
2m2
DIAG 100
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 () 0 0 00 0 0 0 0
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
DIAG 105
PROCESSING UNIT DIAGNOSTICS
The two types of processing unit diagnostics available for
isolation of errors and verification of repairs are:
T est Case Monitor (TCM)
MSMD Monitor
•
Basics
The MSMD Monitor is on the FUNC2 diskette and is
loaded by the TCM into processing unit control storage
when MSMDs are to be run.
•
Machine Speed Microdiagnostics (MSMDs).
The TCM is on the FU NC 1 diskette. It is loaded into SP
storage when any of the processing unit diagnostics are
requested.
The TCM loads either Basic diagnostics into SP control
storage or MSMDs into processing unit control storage.
The TCM controls the execution of the Basic diagnostics.
When MSMDs are running, communication to the system
console is: diagnostic to MSMD Monitor to TCM to the
console.
For a description of processing unit Basic diagnostics, see
page DIAG 110. For a description of Machine Speed
Microdiagnostics (MSMDs), see page DIAG 115.
During the processing unit Basic diagnostics and the
MSMDs, the TCM controls communication between the
diagnostics and the system console.
4381
81M 2676380
o Copyright IBM Corp.
I~~g
19B4
GE055
I
II
PN 6169404
.10f2
.
EC A20568I
~.~O~1~O~ct~8~4=-~.~
________~________~____________________~
Diagnostic Mode Test Case Monitor
Screen
In Field Support Center mode, the Diagnostic Mode Test
Case Monitor screen is displayed whenever PU
diagnostics are running. It displays prompting and error
information. For an explanation of the error and
prompting messages given on the Test Case Monitor
screen, see "Test Case Monitor Messages" on page
DIAG 200.
While PU basic diagnostics are running, the test 10 is
displayed in the lower left-hand corner of the Diagnostic
Mode Test Case Monitor screen. For a description of
processing unit basic test IDs, see "Basic Diagnostic
Organization" on page DIAG 110.
DIAG 105
as",::
a a2iiii !!!iii:: Ii : .!
$'=
sa::::: Ii
DIAG 110
Basic Diagnostics
Basic Diagnostic Test IDs
Basic Diagnostic Organization
The Basic diagnostics are located on the· FU NC2 and the
DIAG 1 diskettes. They run in SP control storage under
control of the Test Case Monitor.
Basic diagnostic IDs are six characters long starting with
a D and ending in M3.
Diskette
Test IDs
Example:
FUNC2
0001 to
0050 to
0100 to
0200 to
0300 to
0400 to
0500 to
0600 to
The Basic diagnostics test the processing unit through the
support bus adapter. If errors are detected by the
diagnostics, a reference code, a FRU list, and Repair
Procedure references are displayed. For a description of
reference codes, see "MSS, Power, and Reference
Codes" on page DIAG 015.
Some of the Basic diagnostics are used to ensure that the
processing unit is capable of running MSMDs. These
diagnostics are on FUNC2. The other Basic diagnostics
test areas that the MSMDs cannot test. These
diagnostics are on the DIAG 1 diskette.
o
010
M3
~
.
Always M3
. Test .Ident ifier
FFF)
(range 000 to
0lAG1
Basic diagnostic
For information on running processing unit Basic
diagnostics, see "How to Run Processing Unit
Diagnostics" on page DIAG 120.
Area Tested
0049
0099
0199
0299
0399
0499
0599
07FF
0801 to 0849
0850 to 0899
0900 to 0999
OAOOto OA99
DBoo to OB99
OCOO to OC99
0000 to 0099
OEoo to OEFF
Scan Rings
Clock maintenance commands
Clock basics
pu, control storage maintenance commands
PU
Control storage
Channels
Storage controller, dual processor controls
Scan Rings
Clock maintenance commands
Clock Basics
PU, Control storage maintenance commands
PU
Control storage
Channels
Storage controller
Basic diagnostic IDs are displayed in the lower left corner
of the Test.Case Monitor screen while the corresponding
diagnostic is running and appear in the RRRR field of a
diagnostic reference code when an error is detected by
the Basic diagnostics.
Example of a Basic Diagnostic Test 10 and Reference
Code
Test 10
Reference Cede
180
0
UU
J
I
Unit Code
46 = BSM
50 = CTl STG
47 =: BSM
59= PU
60 = CHNl
CHNl
65
70 .STG
75 dua I STG
50 = ClKS
FD SBA
M3
x' 8 8
I.~
Status
=
FRU IdentIfIed
Basic diagnostic
Error number within test
I
1.'1
j'
,1'1
!j
i;~
4381
B/M 2676380
rMI
l.§.!g
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GE055
I
PN 6169404
EC A20558·1
2 of 2 . L , ; ...::0;..:.1..:0~c::t..:8:.;.;4~.L.._---....J..-----L-----L-~---'
I
Iii
DIAG 110
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000"
, ,'"
","":1
I
'"
I
'lit'
!.II
r
,
, !I' ...
'II"
"'1\"
i'! "~I
).'IIt
Hi
":"#'U'd'" ",,'
r I:'"
'IL:
"".eNu
"'Hi""""",'",, ",MMIr" '''''''Ii".tM,.,••t,M'''''' ""H ,'1..,;1.+''1''
H'
'''d!!'UM.NWllIhH',,'''M!'... IIIIJ1. . . . . .MIi,I'i..'H••
' H.
r
';%fJijIlWHeH'irfl'Whi"IWi Wvlit1rl rlb.,:.,tiw!," t Ple'l f I l L"+
'''I!fl!dP''f'
M"
'.'1
"Ii
'bMMI"
'-f'D!':I!P·
ro
,,¥+,"
'..
'H" ".'±
±nHb at
'blb+:w"
'"
'I{,t',r,"" ,
,. '~'4ri/ll;'/'4""'L"L' .. ','J,
", UI?twI,W
"',r,. /:!ifIlW',"',..." .. ;".u·... ·"·W ...!!!!HIrk' .. un",'.Hw . . . .,,'.., ' 'd'd'''lo' '9 "~I
0000000000000000000000000
'+
o
+,'
0 0 0 0 0 0 0-0
DIAG 115
MSMD Test Organization
Machine Speed Microdiagnostics
(MSMDs)
The first six MSMD storage loads are on the FUNC2
diskette and storage load seven is on the DIAG 1 diskette.
Each storage load contains one or more sections and each
section contains several tests.
MSMDs are the main tool for isolating hardware failures
and verifying repairs in the processing units. They run in
processing unit control storage at machine speed. If an
error is detected by the MSMDs, a reference code, FRU
list, and Repair Procedure page reference are displayed.
Areas Tested
ZADATAOO
ZBDATAOO
ZCBRANOO
ZDSHFTOO
ZESHFTOO
ZFINTMOO
ZGIPUAOO
PU data flow 1
PU data flow 2
Branching
Shifter
Spare
Interrupt/timers
Special arithmetic/multiplier
ZA590101
ZHSTGCOO
ZISTGCOO
ZJSTGCOO
SARs, retry, cache, and keys
ACB Traps, DLAT
Address facilities
ZH590801
I
J
3
K
L
M
N
ZKBSMTOO
ZLBSMTOO
2MBSMTOO
ZNPAGEOO
Main storage
Main storage
Spare
Swap buffer in page/out page
ZK401101
4
o
ZOCHANOO
ZPCHANOO
ZQCHANOO
ZRCHANOO
ZSCHANOO
Externals, sequence counts, traps
Channel SARs
Data buffer, store,eand data mode
LCA
High speed data
Z0621501
ZTICYCOO
ZUTRAPOO
ZVRTRYOO
l-cycles
Traps
Retry
ZT592001
ZXDSPOOO
ZYDSPOOO
Dual processor controls
Dual processor controls
ZX522401
ZWCMDEOO
Channel interface
ZW652301
Section
For MSMD storage loads 1 through 5, the TCM loads a
single storage load from FUNC2 into PUO and PU 1
control storage. The storage loads are run first in PUO
then in PU 1.
A
B
C
For MSMD storage load 6, the TCM loads the storage
load from FUNC2 into PUO and PU 1 control storage.
The storage load is then started in both processing units
to test dual processor controls. In control storage, the
MSMDs run under the control of the MSMD Monitor.
Console messages are passed from the MSMD Monitor to
the TCM.
G
o
E
F
2
See "How to Run Processing Unit Diagnostics" on page
DIAG 120.
H
P
MSMD Test IDs
Q
R
MSMD test IDs are eight characters long starting with a Z
and include the MSMD section 10 and the UU and RRRR
fields of the reference code that is displayed if a failure is
detected.
S
- 5
T
U
V
Example:
6
Test 10
.
JZG
~
MSMO
0,02
Test (Special Arithmetic Test)
. . Unit Code as follows:
50 = CTL STG
55 dual controls
59 PU
60 CHNL
70 STG
50 = CLKS
=
46
47
65
75
FO
First Test
10 of Load
Section
Name
Storage
Load
7
W
8SM
= BSM
CHNL
dual STG
SBA
Contained in section G
(Storage load 1)
Reference Code
59 0702 98
Always
98
for MSMD
Test (from Test 10)
UU Code (from Test 10)
4381
B/M 2676380
I~~g
~ CopyriQht IBM Corp. '984
GE060
I
II
PN 6169405
.10f2
.
I
EC A20558
__.~________~________~__________~________~
~.~0~1~O~ct~8~4
DIAG 115
DIAG 120
Operating Tips
How to Run Processing Unit
Diagnostics
1.
2.
When the processing unit Basic diagnostics are
running, the test ID of the test running is displayed in
the left-hand corner of the Test Case Monitor screen.
3.
Key in OG and press ENTER. The Diagnostic Mode
PU Diagnostic Selection screen displays.
3.
Key in one of the following options:
I
V
C
T
F
R
to isolate a failure before exchanging FRUs
to verify a repair after exchanging FRUs
to run special channel diagnostics
to run diagnostics after installation
to run diagnostics in field support center mode.
to return to the General Selection screen (0).
5.
Press ENTER.
6.
Follow the prompting messages on the screen.
Set the CE Mode switch to Normal.
3.
Key in OL and press ENTER. The Program Load
screen displays.
4.
If the Program Load Screen displays IML COMPLETE,
the processor is ready to continue normal operation.
If IML REOUIRED displays, continue with the next
step.
5.
Press Power On/IML.
6.
When the General Selection screen displays, key in
OLM and press ENTER. This IMLs the processing
unit.
7.
WhenlML COMPLETE displays, the processor is
ready to continue normal operation.
~ GE060
PN 6169405
20f2
When the diagnostic run is complete or has ended
because of an error, the Diagnostic Mode PU
Diagnostic Selection screen is displayed if you press
ENTER.
5.
Before running the processing unit diagnostics, set
the system control options on the following screens
to normal:
C - RUN SPECIAL CHANNEL INTERFACE DIAGNOSTICS
T - RUN DIAGNOSTICS FOR INSTALLATION TEST
F - RUN DIAGNOSTICS IN FIELD SUPPORT CENTER MODE
R - RETURN TO GENERAL SELECTION SCREEN
COMMAND:
OPTIONS IN EFFECT:
====>
For an explanation of setting the system control
options, see Volume A08, "Console Functions."
2.
rMI
4.
V - RUN DIAGNOSTICS TO VERIFY REPAIR AFTER EXCHANGING FRUS
Compare (OA Screen)
Operation Rate (00 Screen)
Install FUNC1 in diskette drive 1 and FUNC2 in
diskette drive 2.
B/M 2676380
If you want to interrupt a diagnostic run, hold down
the AL T key while pressing MODE SEL. This cancels
the run, and displays the Diagnostic Mode PU
Diagnostic Selection screen.
Note: Do not interrupt a diagnostic run if the
message VERIFY HAS CLEANUP DO NOT
INTERRUPT is displayed.
After running diagnostics, select option R on the
Diagnostic Mode PU Diagnostic Selection screen.
Diagnostic mode is ended and the General Selection
screen (0) is displayed. To return to normal operation:
4381
DIAGNOSTIC MODE
PU DIAGNOSTIC SELECTION SCREEN
EC xxx xxx
- RUN DIAGNOSTICS TO ISOLATE FAILURE BEFORE EXCHANGING FRUS
Set the CE Mode switch to CE Mode.
1.
Both PUs are required for diagnostics. You cannot
run diagnostics on one of the PUs while customer
jobs run on the other PU.
Ensure the FU NC 1 diskette is installed in diskette
drive 1.
2.
4.
1.
EC A20558
I
~0~1~O~c~t~8~4~~.__________~________~________~________~
DIAG 120
e Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
~-
..
OOOOOOOOOOO()OOO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
:,..~'".
(:)OOO-OOOOO~
ri...4,;
"
,,', 11,1'"" ,,{,,'
Il, "".' I.'
., 'I' " jlft:
I~' '!'''',,'''''':! ","'.
,,,.I''''''M'HII'' ,"'"
'I
,.wl",w... "',,.
Nil"!'"
.*'*.'
+*,(1'11'
1'" J,/,'4U''I'ifi!I-.Ie''
eri
'b'YWI,OiWU,"I"'jlftyHLjilWlU "If""I"", '"""Pw'lIMHfl'I',,N!!MIklHP"""N'''''U''''
tiL
I
"14:6lt!flfl44+±4'" . '4'
,","
r
,,'
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000
DIAG 125
Option I - Isolation Mode
DIAGNOSTIC MODE
PU DIAGNOSTICS ISOLATE FAILURE OPTION
EC xxxxxx
When you select this option, you are prompted to enter
the reference code of the failure you are working on. The
system error logs are checked for the reference code you
entered. You have the option of changing your entry if it
is not found; then you are asked if the processor is
available for testing. Answer by keying in Y or'N and
pressing ENTER. If the processor is not available at this
time, the FRU list generated by ELA at the time of failure
is displayed. If the processor is available for testing, the
failing PU is determined from the reference code you
entered and a group of diagnostics is selected and run to
isolate the failure. The following sequence is used to run
the tests until an error occurs:
•
Basic diagnostics 0001 to 07FF (FUNC2 diskette)
•
MSMO storage loads 1 through 6.
•
Basic diagnostics 0800 to OFFF (OtAG 1 diskette)
KEY IN THE
SYSTEM REFERENCE CODE
AND PRESS ENTER
IF NONE IS AVAILABLE, ENTER "NONE".
COMMAND:
OPTIONS IN EFFECT:
====>
Note: Not all the diagnostics are run every time~ Tests
are selected based on the reference code you entered.
If the diagnostics do not detect an error, the FRU list that
was generated by ELA at the time of failure is displayed.
If an error is detected, you are given a combined FRU list
for the reference code you entered and the the diagnostic
reference code. The priority of the FRUs on the FRU list
is:
1.
FRUs on both ELA and diagnostic FRU lists
2.
FRUs on the diagnostic FRU list only
3.
FRUs on the ELA FRU list only.
4381
81M 2676380
I~~g
el Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GE065
IPN
6169406
.10f2
II
.
EC A20558I
___________~________~__--__--~--------~
~.~0~1~O~c~t~8~4~~
DIAG 125
DIAG 130
Verify Repair Option Screens
Notes:
Option V - Verification Mode
When you select this option, a group of diagnostics is
selected and run to verify the repair of a processing unit
failure.
After you select Option V, you are requested to enter
either the Problem Analysis number (PAxx) or the
reference code for the failure you are working on. If
neither is available, enter NONE.
1.
2.
Example: If this option is used to test an engineering
change, enter NONE.
After your PA number or reference code is correctly
entered, the Diagnostic Mode PU Diagnostics Verify
Repair Option screen is displayed and you are then
requested to place an x next to the, FRU(s) you
exchanged. If no FRUs were exchanged, press ENTER.
Example: If a card was swapped or a cable reseated,
press ENTER.
Do not interrupt a verification run if the message:
VERIFY HAS CLEANUP DO NOT INTERRUPT is
displayed. Interrupting the test can leave the wrong
processor reconfiguration data and cause degraded
performance.
If the test is accidentally interrupted:
•
Reselect the verification mode option.
•
Enter the reference code you were working with
or NONE.
•
Enter the FRUs exchanged when prompted.
•
Follow the instructions on the screen.
The reconfiguration data is then reset to primary hardware
for the FRU you replaced (if the FRU has backup
hardware) and diagnostics start running in the following
sequence:
•
Failing test (if original symptom was a PU basic
failure)
•
Basic diagnostics 000 1 to D7FF (FUNC2 diskette)
•
MSMD storage loads 1 to 6
•
Basic diagnostics 0800 to DFFF (DIAG 1 diskette).
If errors occur during the verification test, you are directed
back to the Repair Procedures. If no errors occur, you are
directed to the End Repair Procedure.
DIAGNOSTIC MODE
PU DIAGNOSTICS VERIFY REPAIR OPTION
EC xxxxxx
KEY IN THE PROBLEM ANAlYS IS CODE (PAxx) AND PRE'SS ENTER
IF NONE IS AVA IlABlE, ENTER IINONE".
COMMAND: .
OPTIONS IN EFFECT: V
====>
DIAGNOSTIC MODE
PU DIAGNOSTICS VERIFY REPAIR OPTION
. EC xxxxxx
OlB-A1 BOARD (C1)
RA . B1MA BOARD HA
EFGIt'JK
P Q R STU
- ME - HE
VE - RE
24 - - - - - ------ RJ - MJ - HJ
VN - RN - MN - HN
- RS - MS - HS
A2 BOARD
A3 BOARD
E F GHJ Kl
N P Q R STU
S T V WX
B2 BOARD
2
X
2
4 - - - - - 4 - - - - - - - - - -MA
HA
RA
VE - RE - ME
HE
- RJ - MJ
HJ
A4 BOARD
VN - RN - MN
HN
ABC 0 E F G H J K L M N P Q R STU V W
- RS -MS
HS
2
4--------------------COMMAND:
OPTIONS IN EFFECT:
4381
81M 2676380
rMI
~ GE065
to Copyright IBM Corp. '984
PN 6169406
20f2
==>
-
OA
DE
OJ
ON
OS
DA
- DE
OJ
- ON
- OS
TYPE "X" IN INPUT FIElD{S) ASSOCIATED WITH
FRU(S) JUST EXCHANGED, THEN PRESS ENTER
EC A20558I
~0~1_0~c~t~8~4~~._____________~_________--~----------~--------~
DIAG 130
000000000000000 0000000000 00000000
o
""
,
LlL'
j'
OGOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
DIAG 135
Mark In Test
Option C - Channel Interface
Diagnostics
The channel interface diagnostics are in storage load 7.
They include:
Checks for a failure to reset an active (up) level of the
Mark In interface line by wrapping Mark Out to Mark In.
[For tailgate pin locations, see "Bus Wrap Terminator
(Part 8483772) Wiring. "]
•
Notes:
Mark In Test-Detects a reset failure of the Mark In
bit on the channel interface.
•
Channel Microcoded Device Exerciser (CMDE)-Used
to diagnose channel or I/O device problems. (See
page DIAG 140.)
•
Cable Wrap Test (CWT)-Used to isolate channel
interface adapter driver and receiver and channel
cable problems. (See page DIAG150.)
1.
The Mark In test runs automatically after the Channel
Wrap test.
2.
The wrap terminators must be installed on the
channel being tested when running the Mark In test.
3.
An open condition of the Mark In line is reported as
ground.
1.
Set the CE Mode switch to CE Mode.
For details on selecting CWT and the Mark In test, see
"How to Run Channel Interface Tests." After the tests
are selected, detailed run instructions are displayed on the
screen.
2.
Ensure FUNC 1 is installed in diskette drive 1.
Example of Mark In Test Error Screen
3.
Install DIAG1 in diskette drive 2.
4.
Key in QG, and press ENTER. The Diagnostic Mode
PU Diagnostic Selection screen displays.
5.
Key in C, and press ENTER. The first Channel
Interface Diagnostic Option screen displays.
6.
Key in one of the following:
How to Run ChsnnellnterfsceTests
o
MARK-IN TEST
ERROR DETECTED
CHANNEL Oq
MARK IN IS STUCK AT GROUND
to test a channel· attached to PUO.
to test a channel attached to PU 1.
7.
Press ENTER, the second Channel Interface
Diagnostic Option screen displays.
8.
Make one of the following selections:
==>
01
Selects CMDE
02
Selects CWT and the Mark In test
E
Ends the channel interface tests.
PRESS ENTER TO RTN TO OPTION SCREEN
<==
When you select one of the tests, detailed run
instructions and test options are displayed to aid you in
running the test.
4381
B/M 2676380
I~~g
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GE070
I
II
PN 6169407
.10f2
.
EC A20558\
L.~0~1~O~ct~8~4~~._____________~___________~___________~---------~
DIAG 135
DIAG 140
Channel Microcoded Device Exerciser
(CMDE) - Normal Mode
<:
Use the CMDE to diagnose channel or I/O device
problems. If this test does not detect any errors. run
System Test/4381 or System Test/4381XA to isolate
the problem.
Start
:>
Enter
channe I 10
(00 to 08)
For details on how to select CMDE, see "How to Run
Channel Interface Tests" on page DIAG 135. After
CM DE is selected, detailed run instructions are displayed
on the screen.
TIO/SIO and sense
commands issued
to the next
device on the
channe 1.
Normally, you will run the CMDE only under the direction
of the Repair Procedures. For the operation of CMDE in
this mode, see the flowchart on this page. To use CMDE
this-way, key in the channel address (00 to 08) when
prompted by the screen. CMDE sends a Test I/O, Start
I/O, and Sense sequence to each device address on the
channel until a response is received. When a device
responds, CMDE requests that you ready the device you
want to test and enter the address of that device (for
example, OE). CMDE then sends the Test I/O, Start I/O,
and Sense sequence to that device and shows if a good
response is received.
Yes
)
INO
Note: CMDE tests the address range of 00 through EF
for PUO and the address range of 00 through FF for PU 1.
The address range FO through FF is reserved for LCA on
PUO.
Channe lis okay.
Enter the address
.Iof the device to
be tested.
TIO/SIO and sense
commands issued
to the selected
device.
No
If no response is received from any device on the channel
in the first Test I/O, Start I/O, and Sense sequence, you
are then prompted to ready a device on the channel and
enter its address. CMDE then sends the Test I/O, Start
I/O, and Sense sequence to that device and shows if a
good response is received.
Ensure that at
least one device
is made ready on
this channel.
Enter its
address.
4381
81M 2676380
rMI
~ GE070
PN 6169407
20f2
I
INO
Error results
are displayed.
.I
EC A20558
__~.________~________~________~.________~
~0~1_0_c_t~8_4
CI Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
o
The screen
displays good
completion.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O· 0 0 0 () . 0 0 0·0
DIAG 140
ooooooooc'
.".'"." ......
+........
:::1 . . . . . , .
o
..... t·#,,'I.
-'dd" '#r' 1t
·Ir...
• • • . 'M
'
. 'Ui'd'tiH'iHt'f'-*fM*'fJvft"H'i'Hffffn'WriffltA'tHr)"rlHittti* "Wrs"rlit'rWW-w
d
•
W·d:\'ri •.
000000000000000000000000 000000000
DIAG 145
Channel Microcoded Device Exerciser
(CMDEj - Support Mode
Status and Sense Bit Meanings
<:~
Device (unit) Status
A second method for using CMDE is intended for support
personnel. For the operation of CMDE in this mode, see
the flowchart on this page. To use CMDE this way, key in
the channel address followed by an x (for example 02x).
CMDE then displays an option screen. The options on this
screen let you run additional channel command sequences
to devices on the channel.
80
40
20
10
08
04
Attention
Status Modifier
Control Unit End
Busy
Channel End
Device End
Unit Check
Unit Exception
Notes:
02
01
1. CMDE runs to the end for an I/O device even though
Channel Status
the device does not have an entry in the UCW table.
2.
For I/O device sense and status bit values, see
"Status and Sense Bit Meanings."
80
40
20
10
08
04
02
01
______
-J:>
S_t_a_r_t____
Enter channe I 10
(00-08) and x.
Example: 02x
The extended
option screen for
CMOE displays.
Program Controlled Interrupt
Wrong Length
Program Check
Protection Check
Channel Data Check
Channel Control Check
Interface Control Check
Chaining Check
Select an option
from the screen.
The selected
option .is run.
Sense Byte 0
80
40
20
10
08
04
Command Reject
Intervention Required
Bus-Out Check
Equipment Check
Data Check
Overrun
Yes
Note: The sense information listed is not valid for all
devices; it is a general guide only.
4381-3
81M 2676380
C Copyright IBM Corp. '984
DIAG 145
DIAG 150
Channel Wrap Test
Notes:
The Channel Wrap Test (CWn can be used to isolate the
following channel problems:
1.
•
Channel interface adapter receiver and driver failures.
2.
•
Channel interface cable and connector failures.
•
When each bus-out or tag-out line is activated, the
corresponding tag-in or bus-in line is at an active
level. See "CWT Error Example 1 (Dropped Bits)."
All tag and bus lines can be reset. See "CWT Error
Example 2 (Unable to Reset Bits)."
For details on how to select CWT, see "How to Run
Special Channel Tests." Before running CWT, run storage
loads 1 through 6 to verify the operation of the processor
up to the channel interface adapter receivers and drivers.
Two wrap terminators (bus wrap and tag wrap) must be
installed before running CWT. For terminator part
numbers and wiring, see "Bus Wrap Terminator (Part
8483772) Wiring" and "Tag Wrap Te(minator (Part
8483773) Wiring."
Interrupts from I/O devices attached to the channel
that you are testing can cause CWT to fail.
A short between DATA IN and SRV IN cannot be
detected by this test.
3.
METERING OUT is not tested here; see "Metering
Test Repair Procedure" in Volume A01, page
CHNL 061.
4.
If the CWT runs successfully, the Mark In test is run
automatically.
The CWT verifies that:
•
Channel FRU Locations
5.
If your system has shared control units attached,
ensure that the shared control units have the
interface you are testing disabled.
PU
Channel
Adapter Card
Bus Out/Tag Out
Bus In/Tag In
o
o
o
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
S
01A-A3 K2
01A-A3 E2
01A-A3 F2
01A-A3 G2
01A-A3 H2
01A-A3 J2
01A-A3 P2
01A-A3 Q2
01A-A3 R2
OlS-A 1 K2
018-A 1 E2
018-A 1 F2
018-A 1 G2
OlB-A 1 H2
01B-A 1 J2
01B-A 1 P2
018-A 1 Q2
018-A 1 R2
01A-A2 ZG to 01 E-A 1
01A-A3 83 to 01E-A3
01A-A3 82 to OlE-AS
01A-A3 YJ to 01E-A7
01A-A3 YK to 01E-A9
01A-A3 YL to 01E-82
01A-A3 YN to 01E-B4
01A-A3YP to 01 E-B6
01A-A3 YO to 01E-B8
01 8-A 1 ZG to 01 E-C 1
01 8-A 1 83 to 01 E-C3
018-A 1 82 to 01E-C5
01 8-A 1 YJ to 01 E-C 7
01 B-A 1 YK to 01 E-C9
01B-Al YLto01E-02
01B-A 1 YN to 01E-04
01 B-A 1 YP to 01 E-06
018-A 1 YO to 01E-08
01A-A2 ZH to 01E-A2
01A-A3 B4 to 01E-A4
01A-A3 85 to 01E-A6
01A-A3 ZA to 01E-A8
01 A-A3 Z8 to 01 E-8 1
01A-A3 ZC to 01E-B3
01A-A3 ZE to 01E-85
01 A-A 3 ZF to 01E-87
01A-A3 ZG to 01E-B9
01 B-A 1 ZH to 01 E-C2
01 8-A 1 84 to 01 E-C4
018-Al 85 to01E-C6
01 8-A 1 ZA to 01 E-C8
01 8-A 1 ZB to 01 E-O 1
01B-A 1 ZC to 01E-03
01 B-A 1 ZE to 01 E-05
01 8-A 1 ZF to 01 E-07
01 8-A 1 ZG to 01 E-09
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
S
1
1
1
6.
If you have an IBM 3044 Fiber Optic Channel
Extender Link attached to the channel you want to
test, do not run CWT to the remote (Model DO 1) end
of the link. To run CWT to the local (Model COl) end
of the 3044 link, ensure that the Link Disable switch
is in Disable.
o
1
1
1
Note: For channel 0 on PUO, the cables from 01AA3 to
01AA2 are:
Bus out/tag out
Bus in/tag in
01A-A3 YM to 01A-A2 YO
01A-A3 ZD to 01A-A2 YR
The wrap terminators can be installed:
For additional information, see Volume A06, Service Aids,
"Channel Failure Isolation."
•
At the I/O tailgate (OlE) instead of the I/O interface
cables to test the channel interface adapter card.
Bus Wrap Terminator (Part 8483772) Wiring
•
At an I/O device instead of the interface terminators
or on the channel out interface cables to test the
interface cables and connections on the channel.
Bus Bit
Bus Out
Bus In
P
0(80)
1(40)
2(20)
3(10)
4(08)
5(04)
6(02)
7(01)
MARK
803
004
B05
006
BOS
009
Bl0
011
B12
013
G03
J04
GOS
J06
GOS
J09
Gl0
Jll
G12
J13
After you have completed CWT, remove the wrap
terminators and reinstall the channel terminators and the
interface cables.
43S1-3
B/M 2676380
I
MI
. Seg GE075
C Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
I~N
616940S
. 2 of 2
..
EC A20558
L......;;0;...;.1....;O:;.;c;.;;t..;8:;..;4:--"--""~..;;.;;;;.;;~~
Tag Wrap Terminator (Part 8483773) Wiring
Tag Bit
(hex)
Tag Out
Pin
Tag In
Pin
0(80)
1(40)
2(20)
3(10)
4(OS)
5(04)
6(02)
7(01)
SUPR
OP
HOLD
AoR
SEL
CMo
DATA
SRV
B12
J13
G12
Bl0
009
011
Gl0
013
REO
OP
DISC
AoR
SEL
STAT
DATA
SRV
J06
B03
Jl1
805
808
004
GOS
006
MTR
j04
MTR
GOS
)
DIAG 150·
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OOO()OOOOOO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
"IHIN', 'II"
i
ItM"
L! "'"
'Nf,'t, , , """01'W VUW' ,'"' "t" ". '\Ut'!!' !!UItlN!!!!'M'II!!'''·=''
.1,11
,/iHi"".·,.. W·"/i, ... ,,..... 't'¥""I''',,·'''!UM'.·JKMMw..N'.W.,.,
,·'1iI " ·';"ti" ";'wM •
""!
..:.l!"".
",;",:',W"'·I!"""d'ti ' HeIe4 ,
'J'
11"""
.·'ilh'c!J,ww'
".I
4'
/I
!It
Wllt"« t'U"""
,,!II
!!I
,,,,i,
"11r"
,I
uhW",Wu'+yM" /IIT"W'!!:!If'j""'!!!WPEn".!i!l'''M WRiUj'eI!!\Ih!ItiNMu'wHllfwu'UI·'·'H"up:""'·sofwyn",,&lI!NQ1P'\,,iyW.,ooe'Im,'
0000000000000000000000000
t\
'
o
_,,15.'#
'··ri.'
I ....,. .
1.S&+
"d'
k4t±J ". C iLl'
'+4· b+"I"· 46'#' ' ....'., '.,f'Y'L" tw.,ttI' '8,'tb± ""W!
0 0 000 0 0 0
DIAG 155
CWT Error Example 1 (Dropped Bits)
Notes:
CWT Error Example 2 (Unable to Reset Bits)
CWT TAG ABBREVIATIONS
CWT Error Example 1 shows one instance of dropped bits
and one instance of shorted lines on channel 4.
1.
Interrupts from I/O devices attached to the channel
that you are testing can cause CWT to fail.
CV\IT Error Example 2 shows a failure to reset a tag and
bus line on channel 04.
Dropped bus bit 1. Bits 1, 3, 5, and 7 (X'55') were
sent on bus-out and bits 3,5, and 7 (X'15') were
returned on bus-in.
2.
Suspect a bus parity bit failure if the screen shows
that a failure was detected but the ACTUAL and
EXPECTED bit patterns are the same.
,.
TAGS 10. The Address out tag (X'1 0') cannot be
reset.
2.
BUS 40. Bus bit 1 (X' 40') cannot be reset.
Also bit 1 (X' 40') was sent on bus-out and no bits
(X'OO') were returned on bus-in.
3.
For the meanings of the tag abbreviations that appear
on the screen, see "CWT Tag Abbreviations."
Command Out (CD) or Status In (ST) is shorted to
either Hold Out (HD) or Disconnect In (DC). Hold Out
(X'20') was sent on tag-out; Disconnect In and
Status In (X'24') were returned on tag-in.
4.
For the hex values assigned to the tag lines, see "Tag
Bit Values."
OP
AD
HD
DC
SE
SP
RE
SR
CD
ST
DA
5.
The hardware sets tag bit 7 (Service Out) on
whenever tag bit 5 (Command Out) and/or tag bit 6
(Data Out) are set on.
Tag Bit Values
6.
For bus and tag pin locations, see Volume A06,
Service Aids, "Bus and Tag lines."
o
1.
2.
Also Command Out, Data Out, and Service Out
(X'OT) were sent on tag-out and Disconnect In,
Status In, Data In, and Service In (X'2T) were
returned on tag-in.
Note: The hardware sets tag bit 7 (Service Out) on
whenever tag bits 5 (Command Out) or tag bit 6 (Data
Out) are set on. Ignore tag bit 7 if tag bits 5 or 6 are on.
Bit
1
2
BUS (BIT PATTERN):
EXPECTED
55
ACTUAL
15*
TAGS (OUT/I N) :
EXPECTED
ACTUAL
==>
4381
81M 2676380
I~~q
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
OP/OP
40
40
CHANNEL: 04
ERROR DETECTED
AA
AA
80
80
AD/AD
10
10
40
00*
20
20
HD/DC
20
24*
SE/SE
08
08
ERROR DETECTED
10
10
08
08
SPIRE
80
80
04
04
SR/SR
03
03
02
02
**************
01
01
CD/ST
07
27*
UNABLE TO CLEAR
TAG AND BUS LINES
DA/DA
03
03
PRESS ENTER KEY TO RETURN TO CWT OPTION SCREEN
I
PN 6169409
GE080
.10f2
II
.
Operational
Address
Hold
Disconnect
Select
Suppress
Request
Service
Command
Status
Data
Hex
Tag-Out
Tag-In
80
40
Suppress
Operational
Hold
Address
Select
Command
Data
Service
Request
Operational
Disconnect
Address
Select
Status
Data
Service
20
3
4
10
08
5
6
04
02
7
01
CABLE WRAP TEST
CHANNEL: 04
CABLE WRAP TEST
EC A20558
TAGS:
BUS:
10
40
* SPECIAL WRAP TERMINATORS *
IN{TAGS}
BITS
OUT
SUPR
0
REO.
1
OP
OP
2
DISC
HOLD
ADR
ADR
3
4
SEL
SEL
.. STA
CMD
5
6 SRV/DATA
SRv/DATA
7 CMD/SRV/DATAOUT (*)
OUT
0
i
2
3
4
5
6
7
IN (BUS)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
PRESS ENTER KEY TO RETURN TO CWT OPTION SCREEN
(*) FOR MORE INFORMATION ON TAG BIT (7) SEE THE "MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
MANUAL" UNDER DIAGNOSTICS: SPECIAL CHANNEL TESTS
I
~.~O~1~O~c~t~8~4~~.
·b"atz@J
________~________~________~________~
DIAG 155
1
DIAG 160
Option T - Installation Mode
This option is to be run only at installation time to verify
that all primary and backup hardware is error free.
DIAGNOSTIC MODE
PU DIAGNOSTIC INSTALLATION TEST OPTION
EC xxxxxx
If you select the Installation Mode option at installation
time, all Basic and MSMO diagnostics are run against
both primary and backup processor hardware. If the
Installation Mode option is selected after installation time
and primary hardware has been reconfigured, the
reconfigured hardware is not tested. The following
sequence is used to run the tests:
•
Basic diagnostics 0001 to D7FF (FUNC2 diskette)
•
MSMD storage loads 1 through 6 (2 passes)
•
Basic diagnostics 0800 to DFFF (DIAG 1 diskette).
***WARNING***
THE FOLLOWING TEST IS FOR USE DURING
PROCESSOR INSTALLATION ONLY
IS THIS AN INSTALLATION DIAGNOSTIC RUN?
COMMAND:
OPTIONS IN EFFECT: T
4381
81M 2676380
rMI
~ GE080
~ Copyright IBM COfp. 1984
PN 6169409
2of2
EC A20558
====>
','!
ENTER RESPONSE-(Y/N)
I
•.________~________~~________L-~____~
~0~1~O~c~t~8~4~
DIAG 160
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000,
W"DIlt'fI!IK J!!!"HMIII!.w'r!! HI'IWfl'M!fWW"
!!Wf"
'WlSW"'!" ""IH'Mt'le-",=" .,N"'21J'ZrtrI'WW" 'r"?,,,ic'tT,'nr'M"rU'" "t:JW~'d.!!Wtd
'HHw'
j,jJ'
'd6!8t'MY* jlr4JM1
I.t .. j.*!etl¥thw
±
HLlt
nd!
I,{,~I."
Jr'!
'
YfM.!:..f"u . . . . . . ,.,'.j.'W'u!e.WW•.!!.!.I.!pJ¥f';.W' J''''''''WWMywW'''',nI
!tlll!
111'.
.........
I!,
II J !dIN "M "I,," "r'" ''''''. 'il
"'!K'!
I!
NUt
,'"
&
1/"1
i,,'W,...", . , " ,', "".it d!I""
'U"IfI!W''',!1il''!i I',
".',,."'rlt"·"
, ,!
""'W""IHdi'IN'
, II
rl
'bm"
rl'
..
..~
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000
DIAG 165
Option F - Field Support Center Mode
PRINT
Select this option only under the direction of the Field
Support Center or Engineering. When you select Option F
for the first time, a warning message is displayed. If you
can run diagnostics on the processor at this time, press
ENTER. The Field Support Center screen is displayed.
PO
P2
To run diagnostics from the Field Support Center screen:
P3
1.
P4
Key in a selection from each of the following option
fields: DISPLAY, PRINT, TERMINATION, and TEST
SELECTION.
Press ENTER.
3.
If you selected an option other than the default
(intensified) options, press ENTER again to start
running the selected tests.
DISPLAY
DO
01
02
03
04
TEST 10 ONLY
PRINT
ALL RESULTS ON ERROR
TEST 10 AND ERROR RESULTS
ALL RESULTS ALWAYS
SUPPRESS DISPLAY
TEST SELECTION
Testing stops on the first error.
Testing continues when errors are detected.
RESTART
SO
Sl
S2
S3
If you select options other than those offered on the
screen or select conflicting options, a message prompts
you to change your selections.
If option T 1 is selected, testing continues only when
actual and expected results do not agree. Testing is
stopped if a machine check is detected.
SO
S1
S2
S3
The selected processing unit Basics are run.
The selected MSMDs are run.
All MSMDs are run (except storage load 7).
All processing unit Basics on FUNC2 and all
MSMDs except storage load 7 are run.
After the option selections are entered, one of four test
input screens is displayed. The test input screen displayed
depends on which test selection option (SO to S3) was
entered. The test input screens are:
DISPLAY
Test IDs are displayed as the tests are run.
Results of a failing test are displayed.
All test IDs and results of failing tests are
displayed.
Results of all tests are displayed.
No test IDs or test results are displayed.
TEST 10 ONLY
ALL RESULTS ON ERROR
TEST 10 AND ERROR RESULTS
ALL ~ESULTS ALWAYS
p4 SUPPRESS PRINT
TARGET PU:
R RESTART DIAGNOSTIC MODE
COMMAND:
OPTIONS IN EFFECT: CD1P3TOSl
TO TERMINATE ON ERROR
T1 CONTINUE ON ERROR
UO PUO ONLY
Ul PUl ONLY
U2 BOTH PUG AND PUl
VERIFY S~LECTED OPTIONS AND
PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE
TEST SELECTION
For selections DO, 02, PO, and P2, failing tests are
identified by a • next to the test 10.
The options available are:
PO
Pl
P2
P3
BASIC TEST(S)
TERMINATION
MSMD TEST(S)
ALL MSMDS
ALL BASICS AND MSMDS
Note:
When a selection other than the default selection is keyed
in, the new selection is intensified on the screen as the
default selection.
D3
04
P1
TERMINATION
If no entry is made for any of the option fields, the default
(intensified) value is used. The options may be entered in
any order, but you must have two digits for each
selection and only one selection for any option.
DO
01
02
Test IDs are printed on the console printer as the
test runs.
Test results are printed on the console printer only
for failing tests.
AI! test IDs and the results of failing tests are
printed on the console printer.
Test results are printed on the console printer for
all tests.
No test IDs or results are printed.
TO
T1
2.
DIAGNOSTIC MODE
FIELD SUPPORT CENTER SCREEN
EC xxxxx
Basic Test(s) Input screen. Displayed when Option
SO is selected (page DIAG 170).
MSMD Test(s) Input screen. Displ~yed when Option
S 1 is selected (page DIAG 170).
TARGET PU
UO
U1
U2
Run diagnostics on processor 0 only.
Run diagnostics on processor 1 only.
Run diagnostics on both processor 0 and
processor 1.
If both processors are selected (option U2) with basic
diagnostics, each basic diagnostic is run first on PUO,
then on PU1.
If both processors are selected (option U2) with MSMDs,
each core load (0-5, and 7) is first loaded in PUO and
PU 1, run in PUO, then run in PU 1. Core load 6 is loaded
in PUO and PU 1 and each test case is run first in PUO,
then run in PU 1 before running the next test case.
Runall MSMOs Input screen. Displayed when Option
S2 is selected (page DIAG 175).
Runall Tests Input screen. Displayed when Option S3
is selected (page DIAG 175).
4381
81M 2676380
I~~g
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GE085
I~N
6169410
.10f2
II
EC
A20558I __________
.~.~0~1~O~c~t~8~4~~.
~
________~________~________~
DIAG 165
DIAG 170
Basic Tests Input Screen
MSMD Tests Input Screen
Enter the start and ending test identifiers for the tests you
want to run in the START TEST 10 and END TEST 10
fields. (For the Basic test IDs, see "Basic Diagnostic
Organization" on page OIAG 110.) If you want to run
only one Basic test, enter that test in the START TEST 10
field and leave the END TEST 10 field blank. Enter the
number of times you want the test or group of tests to
run in the TEST RANGE LOOP COU NT field. If you want
the tests to keep looping, enter four blanks in the TEST
RANGE LOOP COUNT field.
Enter the start and ending MSMO test identifiers or
section names of the MSMOs you want to run in the
START TEST 10 and END TEST 10 fields. (For MSMO
section names and a description of MSMO test IDs, see
"MSMO Test Organization" and "MSMO Test IDs" on
page OIAG 115.) If you want to run only one MSMO
test or section, enter the test 10 or section name in the
START TEST 10 field and leave the END TEST 10 field
blank. If you want to run only one ~SMO storage load,
enter the storage load as Mx (x= 1 through 6) in the
START TEST IDfield and leave the END TEST 10 field
blank. If you want to continue running after an error, enter
Y in the DISABLE MACHINE CHECKS field. If N is
entered, the diagnostics stop when an error is detected
with the error information displayed. To loop a test or
group of tests, enter the number of times you want the
loop to run in the TEST RANGE LOOP COUNT field, or
enter four blanks to keep the tests looping until you press
the ALT and MODE SEL keys. If you selected a group of
tests, enter the number of times you want each test in
the group to run in the TEST LOOP COUNT field.
DIAGNOSTIC MODE
BAS IC TESTfs) INPUT SCREEN
EC xxxxx
DIAGNOSTIC MODE
MSMD TEST(S) INPUT SCREEN
EC xxxxx
ENTER:
START TEST 10
RESTART
END TEST 10 =
(FOR A SINGLE TEST IGNORE END TEST ID)
END TEST 10
(FOR A SINGLE TEST IGNORE END TEST ID)
TEST RANGE LOOP COUNT = 0001
(FOR INDEFINITE LOOP ENTER 4 BLANKS ABOVE)
DISABLE MACHINE CHECKS (YIN)
R RESTART DIAGNOSTIC MODE
COMMAND:
OPTIONS IN EFFECT: CD1P4S0Tl
4381
81M 2676380
ENTER:
START TEST 10
rMI
l§!9
GE085
PN 6169410
20f2
TEST RANGE LOOP COUNT = 0001
(FOR INFINITE LOOP ENTER 4 BLANKS ABOVE
TEST LOOP COUNT = 0001
R RESTART DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RESTART
COMMAND:
==>
nnTt""I('"
uri
IU~~
.Il.
I~
r-r-rrrT ..
~rr~~I;
r
1'\" n I. T
==>
1 (" 1
~LlLr"I'~1
EC A20658I
•.________~________~________~~______~
~0~1~O~e~t~8~4~
CI Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
~o
=Y
0 0 000 0 0 000 0 0 0 0 0 0 000 0 0 0 0 0
DIAG 170
ooooooooc
r
!"
. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0
o o
o
00000
o 00000 o
DIAG 175
Runall Input Screen
All MSMDs Input Screen
Runs all Basic PU diagnostics on FUNC2 and MSMD
storage loads 1 through 6. If you want the MSMDs to run
more than one time, enter the number of times you want
the MSMDs to run in the TEST LOOP COUNT field. If you
want the tests to continue running when an error occurs,
enter Y in the DISABLE MACHINE CHECKS field. If N is
entered, the diagnostics stop when an error is detected
and the error information is displayed.
Enter the number of times you want the MSMDs to run in
the TEST LOOP COU NT field. If you want the tests to
continue running when an error occurs, enter Y in the
DISABLE MACHINE CHECKS field. If N is entered, the
diClgnostics stop when an error is detected and the error
information is displayed.
DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RUNALL INPUT SCREEN
EC xxxxx
ENTER:
TEST LOOP COUNTER (RELIABILITY COUNT)
DISABLE MACHINE CHECKS (YIN) = Y
DIAGNOSTIC MODE
ALL MSMDS INPUT SCREEN
EC xxxxx
02
ENTER:
TEST LOOP COUNTER (RELIABILITY COUNT)
DISABLE MACHINE CHECKS (YIN)
RESTART: R RESTART DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RESTART: R RESTART DIAGNOSTIC MODE
COMMAND:
OPTIONS IN EFFECT: CD1P4S3Tl
COMMAND:
OPTIONS IN EFFECT: CD2P4T1S3
==>
02
=Y
==>
4381
B/M 2676380
CI Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
DIAG 175
0'
, ,
•
---~.-.-
DIAG 200
Test Case Monitor Messages
Messaae
Reason
User Action Reauired
Messaae
Reason
User Action Re.Jluired .
BOTH IDS MUST BE SECTION IDS
OR TEST IDS
REENTER TEST ID(SI
A MSMD range consisting of one test 10 and
one section 10 was entered. When selecting a
MSMD range, both IDs must be section IDs or
both must be test IDs.
Enter a valid range of MSMD
test or section IDs.
PRINT ERROR
A TCM command to the console printer failed.
This is probably a printer problem.
Press ENTER to return to the
General Selection screen.
PROCESSING UNIT POWER DOWN
PRESS ENTER.
USE PWR SCREENS.
Processing unit power is off.
CONSOLE PRINTER NOT
AVAILABLE.
SUPPRESS PRINT OPTION
ASSUMED.
An error occurred while attempting to
configure a selected printer for TCM use. The
print option defaults to suppress print.
Press ENTER to continue.
Press ENTER to return to the
General Selection screen.
Power up the processing unit
bX thej!ower screens (OW).
RANGE ENTERED NOT ON ONE
DISKETIE
REENTER TEST ID(S)
The range of tests selected are contained on
more than one diskette.
Enter a range of test IDs that
are contained on one diskette
only.
CONTINUING WILL DESTROY
PROCESSING UNIT DATA.
PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE.
If PU diagnostic option F is selected, IML and
IPL are required before starting customer
programs again.
Press ENTER to go to the
Field Support Center screen
or key in a new selection and
press ENTER.
RANGE ENTERED NOT ON ONE
SECTION
REENTER TEST 10(5)
The MSMD range selected is not contained in
only one section.
Enter a range of MSMD test
IDs that are contained in one
section.
CONTROL STORE LOAD COMPLETE MSMDS RUNNING
A MSMD storage load is complete and the
tests have started.
None.
RECORD ALL INFORMATION ON
THIS SCREEN.
PRESS ENTER TO RESTART TCM.
Exchange the listed FRUs,
and run the selected tests
again.
DIAGNOSTICS ENDED
An R option was encountered.
None. The General Selection
screen is displayed.
A machine check occurred during a MSMD run.
x = the MSMD CS load number (1 to 7), but
the TCM .,cannot be certain of which test was
running when the check occurred.
DISPLAY ERROR
A TCM command to the console display failed
probably because of a microcode error.
Press ENTER to return to the
General Selection screen.
RDID ERROR MOD 10: xxxx
RC: xx
A diskette error occurred. Some common
return codes are:
Press ENTER to return to the
Diagnostic Mode PU
Diagnostic Selection screen.
DUPLICATE IDS NOT ALLOWED REENTER
TEST ID(S)
The start and end test IDs of a range were
identical.
Reenter a valid test range.
END OF MSMD TEST(S).
PRESS ENTER TO RESTART TCM
A MSMD run has completed.
Press ENTER to continue the
TCM.
ENTER Y TO BYPASS CONTROL STORE
LOAD
The requested MSMD storage load is the same
as the storage load just completed.
A not valid hex character was entered.
Enter a valid hex character;
INVALID INPUT CHECK YOUR ENTRY
PU diagnostic option V was selected and a not
valid character was entered.
Enter a valid character.
INVALID TEST 10: xxxxxxxx REENTER TEST
ID(S)
A wrong test or section 10 was entered. (The
not valid 10 remains in the input area.)
Reenter test or section ID(s).
An invalid QJ!tion was entered.
Enter
INVALID RESPONSE - REENTER
An invalid option was entered after PU
diajlnostic o~tion was selected.
Enter 0 or 1.
POWER GROUP NOT DEFINED
CHECK QFS SCREEN
Power group on QFS screen is not defined.
Change the power group on
QFS to a valid one.
MOUNT DIAG1 ON DRIVE 2.
PRESS ENTER WHEN READY.
The requested test is not on the diskette that
is now installed.
Install the requested diskette,
and press ENTER.
MSMD CONTROL STORE LOAD: CSLOAD n
Informs the operator that the next MSMD
storage load is loading. n = the load number
(1-7).
None.
MSMD MONITOR ERROR.
INVALID TEST !D.
PRESS ENTER TO RESTART TCM.
The MSMD monitor detected a wrong MSMD
Press ENTER to return to the
Diagnostic fv10de PU
Diagnostic Selection screen.
MSMD RESET IN PROCESS
Run status information.
None.
MULTIPLE TESTS MUST BE OF
THE SAME TYPE
REENTER TEST ID(S)
A range of tests was selected that included
both Basic and MSMDs.
Enter a range of test IDs that
includes only Basics or only
MSMDs.
NO PU REQUEST
PRESS ENTER TO RESTART TCM
A stop command was given to the TCM
without a request from the console. This can
be either a a hardware failure or a diagnostic
error.
Press ENTER to return to the
Diagnostic Mode PU
Diagnostic Selection screen.
Run Problem Analysis to
analyze the error.
B/M 2676380
rMI
l!!g
GE090
PN 6169411
EC A20558I EC A20559I
2 of 3
01 Oct 84
Diskette not ready
Module not found
Diskette read error.
RE-ENTER MESSAGES
A wrong response was entered to a request for
information.
Follow the displayed
instructions, and enter the
re~uested information.
RUN HALTED DUE TO
TERMINATE ON ERROR OPTION.
PRESS ENTER TO RESTART TCM.
An error was detected while running under the
stop on error option.
Press ENTER to return to the
Diagnostic Mode PU
Diagnostic Selection screen.
a valid option.
INVALID OPTION: x REENTER OPTION
4381
B1
Enter Y to request a different
CS load. Press ENTER (with
no Y) to run the same CS
load.
INVALID LOOP COUNT
REENTER LOOP COUNT
section or test !D.
OF
41
03 Dec 84
DI,AG 200
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
o o o o
000
o
00
o o o o o
o
••
-~---~.-
00 o
--
----------~-
o o o
0000
o o o o o
,
••
.1
"If!
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00
o
0 0 00
o
00
o o o o
0"0 0 0 0
o o
00
DIAG 205
User Action Required
Messaae
Reason
SECTION ZxxxxxOO ENDED (STARTED)
"Run status information.
None.
SELECTED TEST(S) xxxx TO xxxx
PROCESSED.
PRESS ENTER TO RESTART TCM.
The selected Basic tests have run to
completion.
Press ENTER to return to the
Diagnostic Mode PU
Diaanostic Selection screen.
SELECTED TEST{S) NOT FOUND
OR BYPASSED.
PRESS ENTER TO RESTART TCM.
Either no test exists in the selected range or
not all tests in the selected range can be
executed.
Press ENTER to return to the
Diagnostic Mode PU
Diaanostic Selection screen.
SELECT PU SIDE BY ENTERING "0" OR
PU diagnostic C was selected and a character
other than 0 or 1" was entered for the selected
PU.
Enter 0 or 1.
"1:'
TEST IDS MUST BE IN SEQUENCE
REENTER TEST ID(S)
Selected test IDs were not entered in
increasina order.
Enter test IDs in increasing
orda"r.
UNEXPECTED ERROR.
GO TO START 001.
USE REFERENCE CODE BELOW.
The support processor has detected an error.
Press ENTER to return to the
General Selection Screen.
VERIFY SELECTED OPTIONS AND PRESS
ENTER TO CONTINUE.
The selected options are highlighted. The user
is given a chance to either change selections or
leave it the way it is.
Press ENTER to go to the
next screen.
4381
81M 2676380
e ~ight IBM Cap.
I~~g
1984
GE090
DIAG 205
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOO.QOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
..~
0000000000000000000000000 0000000 ••
LOG 001
LOGS
Contents
Introduction .••••..•.......•...••••••. LOG 001
How to Display Processor Logs ..•.....•... LOG 010
Summary of Log Screens
••.•••.•••..••••
Reference Code History Log
••••••••..••••
LOG 010
LOG 015
Maintenance and Support Subsystem Logs •••
SP Logout Summary ...................•
SP Detail Log .................••....••
SP Event Counters ...........••........
RSF Line Error Statistics ..... . . • • . . . . . . .. ,
LOG 025
LOG 025
LOG 030
LOG 040
LOG 045
Processing Unit Logs .•.••••••••••••..••
Processing Unit Logout Directory ..•.......•
Processing Unit Microword Directory .......•
Processing Unit Logout Summary ...........
PU Reconfiguration Data ..............•..
LOG 050
LOG 050
LOG 055
LOG 060
LOG 065
Channel Interface Control Check (lFCC) Logs • LOG 075
Channel Interface Logout Summary ....••.... LOG 075
Channel Interface Logout Detail ......••.... LOG 080
Power Logs ••....•.•..•.••.••••••.... LOG 085
Power Error Logout Directory .............. LOG 085
Power Error Logout Detail ....... . . . . . . . .. LOG 090
4381-3
B/M 2676380
Cl Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
PN 6169379
1 of 2
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
EC A20560
18 Feb 85
LOG 001
LOG 010
Introduction
When a hardware failure or a microcode error is detected
in the processor, status information is collected,
formatted, and recorded in the logout area of the diskette.
For the MSS, support processor status and device
adapter latches are recorded. For the processing unit, the
scan ring latches are recorded.
Error Log Analysis (ELA) routines use the logged data to
isolate the failure by developing a reference code,
reference code extension, and FRU list. These are used
with the repair procedures to guide the service
representative in a repair action. See "Diagnostics" in
this volume for more information on reference codes.
When the processor is powered up, the TODC Equivalent
is set by the customer during support processor IML. The
TODC Equivalent is updated periodically during normal
machine operation from the system time-of-day clock.
•
Reference· Code History
•
Support Processor (SP)
•
SP Event Counters
•
Processing Unit (PU)
•
Channel Interface Control Check (lFCC)
•
Power.
Summary of Log Screens
Log Type
Screen Name
Support
Processor
(SP)
How to Display Processor Logs
To display a log:
The error logs. are:
4381-3
B/M 2676380
Time-of-day Clock (TODC) 'Equivalent: The TODC
Equivalent is recorded with each log to show the time the
error occurred. The TODC Equivalent is stored in the
support processor with a format of: yy/mm/dd hh mm
ss.
1.
Set the CE Mode switch to CE Mode.
2.
Press MODE SEL. The General Selection screen is
displayed.
3.
Refer to "Summary of Log Screens." Select the log
you want to display, and key in the digits shown in
the To Display, Enter column. Then press ENTER.
Power
Processing
Unit (PU)
Channel
I
MI
Seq GF005
I
PN 6169379
2 of 2
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
Summary
SP Event Counters
To display.
Enter:
OESE
Running totals of SP information,
RSF line
OEL
RSF line operations and errors.
SP Summary
OESD
Summary of last 16 SP logs.
SP Detail
OESDxx
Detailed information on SP
log xx.
Power Log
Directory
OEWD
Summary of last 16 power logs.
Power Log Detail
OEWDxx
PU Logout
Directory
OEPD
Detailed information on power
ttower log xx.
Last eight PU logs and last
irrecoverable PU log.
PU Summary
OEPS
PU error counters.
Microword
Directory
OEPM
PU control storage registers
at the time of failure.
PU Reconfiguration
Data
IFCC
Summary
OEPR
Areas of the processor
reconfigured because of an error.
OEI
Summary of last 16 interface
control checks.
IFCC
Detail
OEIDxx
Detailed information on
interface control check xx,
/
EC A20560
18 Feb 85
LOG 010
CI Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
:0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
o
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OIl,
·SH"'w'¥iwi"
o
JI
trim ,..
Iffi+&bitli '''''''''.f.'' [ I"illl'in" ,.11 IJ T"fM;'I;!wtl'n"]f ll "n 9["'rl"llnUrP"Rf
!1m,
,me"""
d'
.#f·I'
0 0 0 0 0 .0 0'"
·cr·····o
I!" ., . .
"(1''UW ."MW'ItIYlttHH'·"...............:"bI',.;",ill1\ttIBrth :",. \tHIM,I., t '''lIft'tt''*, d
,.lce..
we
'£d'
!
I....
'I
"f
L'"t'jlflHf
"'1"
'ft'':w'weiiw+,;w,w",'··• . . W""""&4*
'
A206681
.~.~0~1~O~c~t~8~4~_~______~________-L________~________~
LOG 015
"i : !II Siii
LOG 020
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
4381
B/M2676380
INiI
l!!9.
• Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
o
GF010
PN 6169380
2 of 4
I
EC A20668
01 Oct 84
I
11
..
LOG 020
0 0 000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Or
U 'h,
,t
,
11",tt"
HI"I! 'I',
IN! de UMW,,'. '"t.. Dr"
"e'f Itt
ltd ,II, L, I
",
til'!!!
,'"
t'
J
1'"
iii'! 'tUm
"HiI" twliL!M¥tMl 'w',.i'+ei
tii" '''",'
ft' Hi
'I" '"
"'Hn4WI:±U'"
tt
tH'., " '±thin"'"
...... rI'
i "i'*""
'''., ," ·,,'OFt
d!"
t"m
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
.LOG 025
MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT SUBSYSTEM LOGS
Maintenance and Support Subsystem (MSS) hardware
failures and microcode errors are logged if enough of the
MSS is operational.
SP Logout Summary Screen
***SP LOGOUT SUMMARY***
The SP Logout Summary contains a record of the last 16
SP error logs.
The MSS log screens are:
To display the SP Logout Summary screen:
•
SP Logout Summary
•
SP Detail Log
•
SP Event Counters
•
Remote Support Facility (RSF) Line Error Statistics.
1.
Press MODE SEL.
2. Key inOESD and press ENTER.
'fo clear the SP Logout Summary screen:
1.
Set the CE Mode switch to CE Mode.
2.· Press MODE SEL.
3~
Key in OESDPand press ENTER.
CURRENT TODC EQUIVALENT: yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss
================================================================================
LN EVNT CT TODe EQUIVALENT
00 0003 01 mm/dd hh:mm:ss
01 0002 01 mm/dd hh:mm:ss
02 0000 00 mrn/dd hh:mm:ss
03 0000 00 mm/dd hh:mm:ss
04 0000 00 mm/dd hh:mm:ss
05 0000 00 mm/dd hh:mm:ss
06 0000 00 mm/dd hh:mm:ss
07 0000 00 mm/dd hh:mm:ss
08 0000 00 mm/dd hh:mm:ss
09 0000 00 mm/dd hh:mm:ss
10 0000 00 mm/dd hh:mm:ss
11 0000 00 mm/dd hh:mm:ss
12 0000 00 mm/dd hh:mm:ss
13 0000 00 mm/dd hh:mm:ss
14 0000 00 mm/dd hh:mm:ss
15 0000 00 mm/dd hh:mm:ss
COMMAND: Q,ESD
LVL MM MC --MSW--- C-IC INST ADPT 51C- LMR- REF.CODE
07 00 12 63402F2E 6340 EE050000 0000 3900 EC517464
07 00 12 63402F2E 6340 EEOS 0000 1856 96C8 EC517A64
00 00 00 00000000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 00000000
00 00 00 00000000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 00000000
00 00 00 000000000000 0000 0000 0000 0000 00000000
00 00 00 00000000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 00000000
00 00 00 00000000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 00000000
00 00 00 00000000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 00000000
00 00 00 00000000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 00000000
00 00 00 00000000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 00000000
00 00 00 00000000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 00000000
00 00 00 00000000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 00000000
00 00 00 00000000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 00000000
00 00 00 00000000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 00000000
00 00 00 00000000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 00000000
00 00 00 00000000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 00000000
==>
4. When prompted, key in Pand ptess ENTER again .
"
.....
Label Identification
LN:
Log number. Log number 00 is the latest entry.
EVENT:
IML.
The total number of SP errors since the last
C-IC:
CT: The number of consecutive times the same failure
occurred.
TODC Equivalent:
Time of the log.
LVL: The level the SP microcode was running in at the
time of failure.
MM:
MSW:
The master mask value.
Microcode status word value.
Corrected instruction counter value.
INST: TheSP microcode instruction executing at the
time of failure.
ADPT: Adapter address the microcode was working
with at the time of failure.
SIC:
LMR:
Address of the last microcode instruction.
Last module read from the diskette.
MC: SP check register contents. For bit values, see
SPCK under "Label Identification" on page LOG 030.
4381
B/M 2676380
I~~g
o Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GF010
I
PN 6169380
.3m4
II
EC A20558
J
.~.~0_1_0_~~8_4~t____________________________~_________
LOG 025
UCS!5£!22i!i2i!iii2! ii.!!lii" I
I
laSEi"
LOG 030
SP Detail Log Screen
Label Identification
The SP Detail Log screen contains detailed error
information recorded at the time of a failure on the
support processor.
LEVEL:
SP Detail log for levels 2 through 6
level of the SP microcode at the time of failure.
MMASK:
Master mask setting.
SP LOG:OO
TOOC EQUIV:yy/mm/dd
hh:mm:ss 10:0000000000
Ec:866898
EVENT:0020
===============================================================================
To display the SP Detair Log screen:
CMASK:
1.
SPCK:
Press MODE SEL.
2. Key· in aESDxx and press ENTER. Where xx is a log
number (00-16) selected from the SP Logout
Summary screen (QESD).
Two different formats are used for the SP Detail Log
screen depending on the interrupt .level of the SP
microcode at the time of failure. The two formats are for:
Microcode levels 2 through 5 (see "S? Detail Log for
Levels 2 through 6").
Microcode levels 1, 6, and 7 (see "SP Detail Log for
Levels 1, 6, and 7").
o
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
LEVEL 03 10lRR 48 IC
7FOO CNFG:ABOOOOOOOOOOA201EDOO
RC:FE400324 00000000
MMASK 01 MIRR 13 C-IC 7FOO
DLAT
LVL
MSW.
LVL
MSW
CMASK OF 10ADT 00 LMR 9309
DATA 85
a 3010 2120
1 60DE 2322
SPCK 12 10CMD 00 LMRB 9309
INST 80
2 0800 2524
3 7F04 2726
LOMC 00
INST EE05 4010 CHAN 85
4 9404 A928
5 208E AB2A
------BURST MODE-----STAT 00
6 600E AD2C
7 89A4 AF2E
LCA 850000 DISK 811000 --------1/0 STATUS---------- -----------PLDA----------DCA 85FA52 85FB80
DISK1 02
LCA 002000
C1 0000 C2 0000 C3 8000
DCA 85FC80 85FD80
DISK2 38
eCA
0000000000 OP 0000 CK 0000 BF 0000
DCA 85ES80 85FCOO
PWR
01
DCA 0493
c4 00· OS 40 1M 90 PG 80
DCA 85FD02 85FEOO
SBA
03
PU
00000000
TM 04 TP 8000 CB QLM
REGISTERS:
SBA2
02
PUl
00000000
PP:26 0111 4200 2334 0000 8080 9978 0020 3AFO
SP:27 2000 1170 2020 3030 8400 8420 8440 8460
----------------------------DEVICE CONTROL BLOCK------------------------------2080 0000 0000 0000 0080 00F8 0000 0000 0000 0400 0000 0000 0200 0000 0000 0000
0000 A900 0000 0000 408C 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
COMMAND: QESOOO
==>
Common mask setting.
SP check register con.tents. Bit values are:
I/O parity error
I/O timeout
SP storage parity error
SP microcode check
Burst mode change
Always zero
Instruction Counter change
.Always zero
LOMC: SP check register contents after log (bits are the
same as SPCK).
IOIRR: I/O interrupt request register contents at the time
of failure.
MIRR: Microcode interrupt request register contents at
the time of failure.
IOADPT: I/O adapter address (if error occurred during an
I/O operation).
IOCMD: I/O·command to a device attached directly to
the SP bus.
IC:
Instruction· counter value.
C-IC:
Corrected instruction counter value.
LMR:
Last module 10 read from the diskette.
LMRB: Last module 10 base program read.
INST:
Instruction at time of failure.
CNFG: Configuration data for devices attached to the SP
bus.
DLA T:
REFCODE:
Reference code defining the failure.
RC EXTN:
Reference code extension.
MSWs:
4381
81M 2676380
e Copyrigttt IBM Corp.
1M!
l..§!9.
1984
GF010
PN 6169380
40f4
Directory lookaside tables.
BURST MODE: Burst mode registers for each SP
attached device.
I/O STATUS: Status of I/O devices attached to the SP.
(See "I/O Status Fields"on page lOG 035.)
Note: A letter can be displayed before the value in the
I/O status fields (except PUle The letters define the error
condition. The error conditions are:
C
P
T
Machine check
Parity error
Timeout
PLDA: Program link data area values. (See "PLDA
Fields" on page LOG 031.)
REGS:
PP:
Primary page active at the time of error.
SP:· Secondary page active at the time of failure.
SPIL CURRENT INSTRUCTION: Address and data of the
current SP microcode instruction at the time of failure.
SPIL LAST INSTRUCTION: Address and data of the last
SP microcode instruction at the time of failure.
SPIL BRN TABLE:
branch addresses.
Last 13 SP microcode instruction
DEVICE CONTROL BLOCK:
.dependent information.
Sixty-four bytes of device
Data values in the active register pages.
Microcode status words.
I"
ECA20558I
__0~1_0_~
__8_4__•___________~_________~._________~~________~
LOG 030
OOOOOOOOOO() 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0000008000000000000000000 000000000
LOG 031
PLDA Fields
SP Detail Log for Levels 1, 6, and 7
C2
C1
C3
Byte 0
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Soft stop
Hard stop
Not used
PU degraded
Machine check
Check stop
Off-line
Wait state
Async stop occurred
Address compare
Mode or swap key
Console function request
Start key disabled
Not used
Mode key disabled
Swap key disabled
CE switch on
Operation rate not normal
Check control not normal
Address control not normal
Diagnostic test active
Not used
Not used
Not used
Byte 1
No bits used
No bits used
No bits used
OP
Byte 0
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Byte 1
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bits 3-7
Instruction step
Word step
Clock cycle step
Clock pulse step
Repeat microword
Not used
Not used
Not used
Machine check channel detect
Not used
Not used
Not used
Machine check no retry
Log machine check no retry
Disable
Stop after log
No bits used
No bits used
Block active
Block invoked
Block processing start
Address compare command
Erase in progress
Save request
Verify block
Deactivate
TODC EQUIV:yy/mm/dd
hh:mm:ss 10:0000000000 EC:866898
EVENT:0002
LEVEL 07 10lRR 00 IC 6344 CNFG:ABOOOOOOOOOOA201EDOO RC:EC517464 00000000
MMASK 00 MIRR 01 C-IC 6344
DLAT
LVL
MSW
LVL
MSW
CMASK OF 10AOT 00 LMR 9000
DATA 81
0 3010 2120
1 600E 2322
SPCK 12 10CMD 00 LMRB 9000
INST 84
2 0800 2524
3 B068 2726
LOMC 00
INST EE05 8e60
CHAN 85
4 9304 A928
5 208E AB2A
------BURST MODE-----STAT 00
6 600E A02C
7 6348 2F2E
LCA 850000 DISK 810800 --------1/0 STATUS---------- -----------PLOA--~-------DCA B5FABE 85FB70
DISKl 02 LeA 000000
C1 0000 C2 OBOO C3 8000
DCA 85FC70 85FD70
DISK2 00 eCA 0000008000 OP 0000 CK 0000 BF 0000
DCA 85FE7C 85FBFO
PWR C 02 DCA 0002
C4 00 OS 40 1M 90 PG 80
DCA 85FCFO 85FDFO
SBA
02 PUO 300068EO
TM c4 TP 8000. CB QLIM
REGISTERS:
SBA2
10 PU1
3C100000
P~:2E C901 5101 FOOA 62EO 8262 90F6 10EE 8493
SP:2F OODC 00D6 8000 88DC 3EOO 0008 0000 663C
-------SPll CURRENT INSTRUCTION-------------SPIL LAST INSTRUCTION-------ADDR:OODC
DATA:OOEE 04FO 01A2 04FO
ADDR:00D6
DATA:5201 0000 0494 OOEE
SPIL BRN TABLE 0722 0000 007A 002C OOOC 26DC 268E 266C 2646 2628 260C OA66 OAS4
COMMAND: QESDOl
==>
QDD patch, special block
Not used
Deactivate
Not used
OS
C4
Byte 0
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
BF
CK
SP LOG:Ol
===============================================================================
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Start key
Stop key
External interrupt
4381
B/M 2676380
o Copyright IBM Corp.
I~~q
GF015
1M
Cold IML
Not used
Not used
Interval timer
Not used
Not used
IPL failed
IML failed
Not used
Configured
Not used
Not used
Ch~nnel to channel
Not used
Not used
Not used
I~N
6169381
.10f1
PG
II EC
A20558I
.~.~0_1~O~c~t~8~4~~.
3270 mode
Printer/keyboard mode
RCS code
Not used
Not used
RSAM code
Not used
ROCF monitor
____________~____________~____________~____________~
LOG 03 1
1984
•
.autZaa:S:::ia:iiiiJiiil.
Ii
._._-_....
.._ ... _...
,
_ .._._ ... -
.... _"- _...........
-_ ....
,,,
_._- -----_._---_..
--, ..........
_.
0000000000000000000000000000000000
--
---
- - - _..•
__
-
.. _ - - - - - - - _ . . . . .
... tNt i
±bt
0000000000000000000000000 0'00000000
LOG 035
I/O Status Fields
Bits
0-1:
2-4:
00
01
10
11
000
001
010
011
100
101
110
111
5:
6:
7:
4381
B/M 2676380
DISK 11 DISK2
Bits
PWR
SBA
Good ending
CRC error
Command error
Hardware error
Operation complete
Control complete
Drive error
Interrupt request
Overrun/underrun
Timeout
Record not found
Disk not ready
SP check
Adapter' enable
Interrupt pending
0
Not used
Not used
Not used.
Not used
Command check
SP machine check
Interrupt enable
Interrupt request
Control parity check
Data parity check
Command parity check
Address parity check
Shift register busy
SP machine check
Timer interrupt enable
Timer interrupt request
I~~g
~ Copyright IBM COrp. 1984
GF020
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Byte 0
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Byte 1
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Byte 2
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Byte 3
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Byte 4
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
LCA
CCA
DCA
PUO and PU1
Command received
Status received
Chaining
Stop transfer
Chaining cancel
Count = 0
Interface disconnect
Outstanding status
Input request
Output request
DeE interrupt
Timer interrupt
Exception
SP'machine check
Interrupt enable
Interrupt request
Counter overflow
Read timeout
line error
Read error
Stop poll
Timer
Error queue
Not used
Operate
Stop word
370 mode
EC/BC mode
OAT
Wait
Channel sequence match
CS address match
SP Interface error
370 interface error
Interface disable
Status pending
Adapter busy
SP machine check
Interrupt enable
Interrupt request
Overrun
Underrun
Receive clock
SDLC invalid
SDLC frame
. Wrong character
Break byte
Adapter in sync
Extended status
Command complete
DCA active
Key status
Not used
SP machine check
Interrupt enable
Interrupt request
Store address match
LS address match
Not used
System state
PU clock run
Channel clock run
Storage clock run
Instruction step
System reset
Stack status
Enable/disable chaining
Select reset
CU end error
Data cancel
Not used
Not used
Receive
Transmit
Inhibit 0 insertion
Auto, EBCDIC
ASCII,SOLC
Code length
Code length
NRZI
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Microword step
Clock step
Pulse step
Disable error
Control store error
Disable error
Channel error
Instruction step
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
OS ready
CTS
RLSO
Ring indicator
DSR transmit
Not used
RLSO transmit
CTS transmit
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Terminal ready
RTS
Wrap
Test
Standby
Half speed
New sync
DCE interface disable
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
LOG 035
LOG 040
SP Event Counter Screen
The SP Event Counter screen keeps a count of various
events in the support processor.
To display the SP Event Counter screen:
1.
Press MODE SEL.
2.
Key in aESE and press ENTER.
The TOTAL columns record the number of times the
event occurreq since the machine was installed. The
TOTAL columns are not reset when you clear the
counters. The DELTA columns record the number of
times the event has occurred since the last time the SP
Event Counters were cleared.
If a TOTAL or DELTA field reaches its maximum value, it
is reset and starts counting from zero. This can result in
the DELTA field at a higher value than the TOTAL field.
More than one screen is needed to display the SP
counters. If you want to move between screens, press
and hold the ALT key and press the PAGE UP or PAGE
DOWN key.
If you want to clear the DELTA columns on the SP Event
Counter screens:
1.
Set the CE Mode switch to CE Mode.
2.
Key in OESER and press ENTER.
3.
When prompted, key in R and press ENTER again.
*SP EVENT COUNTERS*
*ERROR LOG DISPLAY*
CURRENT TODC EQUIV: yy/mm/dd hh mm ss
o TOTAL POWER ON HOURS
o DELTA POWER ON HOURS
LAST RESET TODC EQUIV:
TOTAL DELTA
TOTAL DELTA
o
0 TIMES POWERED ON
o
o TIMES POWERED OFF
o
0 POWER FAULTS
o
0 HOURS IN CE MODE
o
0 HOURS IN DIAGNOSTIC MODE
0 0 SP PARITY ERR HARD RECOV
o
o SP PARITY ERR HARD UNREC
o
0 SP PARITY ERR SOFT RECOV
o
o SP PARITY ERR SOFT UNREC
o
o
o
o
o
o
o SP REIML
o SP RESETS
o
o
o AUTO SP-REIML
o AUTO SP-RESET
o SUCCESSFUL LCA RETRY
o LCA CYCLE STEAL ERROR
o
o UNSUCCESSFUL LCA RETRY
o SUCCESSFUL DCA RETRY
o DCA CYCLE STEAL ERROR
o
o UNSUCCESSFUL DCA RETRY
COMMAND: QESE
*ERROR
o
o
TOTAL
o
o
o
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
vn
0
LOG DISPLAY*
*SP EVENT COUNTERS*
TOTAL POWER ON HOURS
CURRENT TODe EQUIV: yy/mm/dd hh mm
DELTA POWER ON HOURS
LAST RESET TODC EQUIV: yy/mm/dd hh mm
DELTA
TOTAL DELTA
0 SUCCESSFUL CCA RETRY
o
0 UNSUCCESSFUL CCA RETRY
0 SUCCESSFUL DDA RETRY
o
0 UNSUCCESSFUL DDA RETRY
0 DDA CYCLE STEAL ERROR
o SUCCESSFUL PCA RETRY
o SUCCESSFUL SBA RETRY
0
0
o UNSUCCESSFUL PCA RETRY
o UNSUCCESSFUL SBA RETRY
o
o
o
o
o
0
o PU-IML S370
0
o PUl SUCCESSFUL RETRY
o PUl UNSUCCESSFUL RETRY
o PUl CHECK STOP
o PUi EXiGENT MACHiNE CHECK
o PUl CHANNEL RESET
1'\
PU-IML XA MODE
PU-IPL
PU SUCCESSFUL RETRY
PU UNSUCCESSFUL RETRY
PU ..CHECK
STOP
v. ,.. ..
r-" ....
1'\11
v ru
o PU
COMMAND: QESE
4381
81M 2676380
~
l!!s
• Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
Ie)
GF020
PN 6169382
20f2
==>
1.1 ........ AI""
~Alu~nl
a.lr-
n~~nln~
CHANNEL RESET
A ••
~n~~~
0
0
0
0
==>
EC A20558I
~0~1~O~m~8~4~.________~~______~________L -__~__~
LOG 040
0 () 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
.·,t",f;;;"',rl",j."w,w+, '
H,..j,.. I1"UUUU..:.;,fI......ijiy·· ,., ... - 'H&1~!W'!W''1?!I;,.:j'''"JllillUl!!ll.lIj!W[JjoJ,W!l!lll·.,.''-Iij!!S[_IfU"Ij·m!·,·IT! 'U''P3'P'''hm'!'B'II..,;';'..,', !!!II.I.I.!lEPWi'611a".rnu·....
++b&'
".w.
,m'''_'I!'_"U""","...._.....
' b....
· .........
' .....
":I:IIO.I'....
U '!_'",,,-,,,'l!',"",'lit'....
, '_t"9.....
""""""1'1""'"'
HW:I''''....
,'!I.~y+J.
............_
.,..."14....
.J '_I'_I'H..uW'_'
".="/"""",,_"W_IfI!t","",,,11I",",-ilIII",,"-,""""""LI'.....' ....wd'~!....
I,(' .............'....
'.J!,Ml.!......·u.U.;...Jo'1!~"r"I'....
'["fffM_DlH_'f("'"'.!¥W....
H' _/OIJIIIIIlI'MIlM_",
.....
Mo.'
'"""""'"_"_:1'
IJ ' •....
ulllii"bN""",
......
'j
"+....
6!J1!WjM""'"""'1L4IHl&,rl'/'"""",n_"UU
kHH...
""""','Ieb....
Y'I .....
I..JIW
....
' _MWI_,w......- . .::..'I'b'~ilUIl'
...
'.\I:.!!!.""'"_,1.t,_,!,.....
,....u.p.'
........
,.,W'_'lI
........
_ '....
'." ........
'; " ......' ......._'""'E
......
,'.........
" ..._.'._,.' .....
',...........
" 1 .....
".".....
' , .....
·t ' _ _tHtH"""'Y
_
______
9*·_hI'·H_ _ _ _ _~
t ........
' __
....
___
....
M!:!. . .
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
LOG 045
RSF Line Error Statistics Screen
*CNFG/REMOTE*
The RSF Error Statistics screen keeps a count of the
number of Remote Support Facility operations and the line
errors encountered.
NUMBER OF OPERATIONS
NUMBER OF ERRORS
To display the RSF Error Statistics screen:
NUMBER OF UNDERRUNS/OVERRUNS
1.
Press MODE SEL.
2.
Key in aEL and press ENTER.
o Copyright IBM Carp.
I~~q
GF026
SEND
0000
0000
RECEIVE
0000
0000
0000
Q GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
COMMAND: 'lEL
4381
B/M 2676380
*RSF LINE ERROR STATISTICS*
I~N
6169383
.1m5
II EC
A20658
==>
I
.~.~O~1~O~ct~,~8~4~.
________~________~______~________~
LOG 045
1984
za_*_SSClii2!2! I
ill
iii!:::::::: iii:: II" I
I ;
II
I ¥4 .. :aiU.! : I iii! liil IS
LOG 050
PROCESSING UNIT LOGS
The Processing Unit Log screens are:
•
Processing Unit Logout Directory
•
Processing Unit Microword Directory
•
Processing Unit Logout Summary
•
Processing Unit Reconfiguration Data.
Processing Unit Logout Directory Screen
The Processing Unit Logout Directory screen contains
information on the last nine processing unit logs if at least
one of them was caused by an irrecoverable error. If none
of the last nine PU logs were caused by an irrecoverable
error, the screen contains the last eight PU logs and the
last log caused by an irrecoverable error.
To display the Processing Unit Logout Directory screen:
1.
Press MODE SEL.
2.
Key in aEPD and press ENTER.
PROCESSING UNIT LOGOUT DIRECTORY
PU TODC EQIVALENT REF CODE ERR
00C9 1 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss 5DD218AE
KEY
00C8 0 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss
00C7 1 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss 5DD218AE
00C6 0 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss
00C5 0 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss 7093CBAE
FSS
00C4 1 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss
00C3 1 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss 5DD218AE DBE
00C2 0 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss
00C1 0 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss 5DD218AE
OOCO 1 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss
10
SERIAL NUMBER: 012345
MODEL: 4381
CHANNEL RST
STG ADRS MACH STATUS
UNSUCCESSFUL RETRY
-----------xxxxxxxx UNSUCCESSFUL RETRY
-----------EXIGENT MACH CHK
-----------EXIGENT MACH CHK
-----------CHANNEL ERROR
--2-------------------xxxxxxxx CHECK STOP .
-----------xxxxxxxx UNSUCCESSFUL RETRY
UNSUCCESSFUL RETRY
-----------CHANNEL ERROR
-----5-----SUCCESSFUL RETRY
------------
To clear the Processing Unit Logout Directory screen:
1.
Set the CE Mode switch to CE Mode.
2.
Press MODE SEL.
3.
Key in aEPDP and press ENTER.
COMMAND:
QEPD
==>
>
Label Identification
10: Log identifier number from 0001 to FFFF.
PU: The failing processing unit (0 or 1).
TODC:
Time of the failure.
REFERENCE CODE: The reference code that resulted
from the error, or blank if the reference code was not
available.
.
ERR: Storage error that occurred as follows:
DBE
FSS
KEY
Double-bit error
A soft-soft double-bit error was forced by retry.
Key error
STG ADDR: The location of a storage failure if a storage
error occurred or the message AD N I A if the address is
not available.
4381
81M 2676380
fMI
l.!!s
• Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GF025
PN 6169383
2 of 5
EC A20568I
01 Oct 84
MACH STATUS: The machine status after the failure is
logged and analyzed as follows:
CHANNEL ERROR
A channel error occurred. If the channel .
error cannot be corrected, the channel is
removed from use and the failing channel
10 is displayed next to the CHANNEL RST .
field.
CHECK STOP
An error occurred that cannot be retried.
LOGOUT NOT EXIST
No logout data is· available for the error.
LOGOUT PURGE
. The date and time the log was cleared.
SUCCESSFUL RETRY
The error condition was retried without
another error.
CHECK STOP (RESET)
An error occurred during system reset.
UNSUCCESSFUL RTY
The error condition was retried and
another error occurred.
EXIGENT MACHINE CHECK
An error occurred with processor damage
or system damage.
CHANNEL RST
An X indicates that the channel(s) (00
through 08) were reset because of the
failure. A channel 10 of 00 through 08
shows the 10 of a channel that was
removed from use because of an error.
I
.
LOG 050
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OOOOO()OOOO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8000000000000000000000000 000000000
LOG 055
Label Identification
Processing Unit Microword Directory·
Screen
Two Processing Unit Microword Directory screens contain
a record of the information stored in the PU control
storage registers at the time of a failure.
To display the Processing Unit Microword Directory
screens:
Note: A· next to one of the fields shows the field
contains microinstruction address or data existing at the
time of failure.
10: The same 10 as the Processing Unit Logout
Directory screen.
CREG: The microinstruction performed at the time of
failure.
1. Press MODE SEL.
2.
Key in aEPM and press ENTER. The first Processing
Unit Microword Directory screen is displayed.
CREGSA VEA, CREGSA VES, and CREGSAVEC: The last
three microinstructions performed.
3.
Press ENTER to display the second screen.
CSARSU: Address of the microinstruction performed at
the time of failure.
Examples of PU Microword Directory Screens
PROCESSING UNIT MiCROWD LOGOUT DIRECTORY
MODEL:4381 SERIAL NUMBER:012345
10
PU CREG
CREGSVA CREGSVB CREGSVC
CSARBU SAVERG CK STOP RTY FLAG
01B5 1 020057Fl *00800000 00000000 00000000 008004 000004 00400000 85428810
OtB4 0
7FF97FF8 *00800000 00000000 00000000 008004 000004 00400000 C4008800
01B3 0
020057Fl *D0800000 00000000 00000000 008004 000004 00400000 84200000
01B2 1 020057Fl *00800000 00000000 00000000 008004 000004 00400000 84010000
01Bl 0 *B8B06A30 F2001FOO FFFFFFFF B8B06A30 *01702C 01702C 00400000 84000000
01BO 1 020057F1 *00800000 00000000 00000000 008000 000004 00400000 84000000
OlAF 0
020057Fl *00800000 00000000 00000000 008000 000004 00400000 84010000
OIAE I
02105079 *02105079 91423B78 lC005871 017678 017678 00400000 84200000
OlAO 1 02105079 *02105079 91423878 lC005871 017678 017678 00400000 84010000
I
While either of the screens is displayed, pressing ENTER
will display the other screen.
SA VERG: Address of the next-to-Iastmicroinstruction.
CK STOP, RTY FLAG, GHERDARO, GHEROASP,
GHERDACC, and COMMUNICATION: Contain additional
error information intended for engineering use only.
COMMAND: QEPM
==> PRESS ENTER
>
PROCESSING UNIT MICROWO LOGOUT OIRECTORY
MOOEL:4381 SERIAL NUM8ER:012345
GHERDASP
- GHEROACC COMMUNICAT~ON
10
PU GHERDARO
01B5 1 050200CO 00000014 e4008000 00000000 00000000 12019281 00000000
41000040 00008200 00000000 00056000 00000000 92870000 00000000
0184 0
60000080 00005306 1440000e 680000AO 00000000 92870000 00000000
01B3 0
0182 1 020080CO 00080000 00000000 00000000 00000000 12019281 00000000
60000000 0000E87E 04000000 00000000 00000000 12019281 00000000
01 B1 0
01BO 1 020057FO 00080000 00000000 00000000 00800000 92879880 00000000
OlAF 0
020057FO 00080000 00000000 00000000 00800000 ,92879880 00000000
OIAE 1 60000000 04000000 008000eo 00000000 00000000 911201EO 00000000
01AO 1 600000CO 00005030 04000000 00000000 00000000 12019281 00000000
COMMAND: QEPM
==>
PRESS ENTER
>
4381
81M 2676380
I~~g
o Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GF025
I
PN 6169383
.3M5
II
EC A2055S1
.~.~0~1_0~c_t~84~_.________~________________~~______~
LOG 055
LOG 060
Processing Unit Logout Summary
Label Identification
A Processing Unit Logout Summary screen is provided for
each processing unit. The Processing Unit Logout
Summary screens contain error statistics for sections of
the processing units.
SUCCESSFUL RETRY: The processor retried a machine
check successfully.
UNSUCCESSFUL RETRY: The processor did not retry a
machine check successfully.
To display the Processing Unit Logout Summary screens:
UNRTY (RETRY 1): An unretriable machine check
occurred.
1.
Press MODE SEL.
2.
Key in one of the following:
•
•
3.
UNRTY (RETRY 2): An unretriable machine check
occurred during ret~.
OEPSO for processing unit 0 (PUO)
. OEPS 1 for processing unit 1 (PU 1).
UNRTY (NO RETRY): The processor was operating with
check control in no retry mode when a machine check
occurred.
Press ENTER.
Each entry on the PU Logout Summary screen has two
counters. The counters in the left-hand columns can be
changed or reset by moving the cursor to the counter
location and entering the desired value. The counters in
the center columns collect over the life of the machine;
they cannot be reset.
Machine status and storage error statistics are displayed
in the left-hand side of the screen. The rest of the screen
has error statistics for each area of the processing unit.
CK ST (RETRY 1): The processor went to check stop on
a machine check.
PU LOG SUMMARY MODEL: 4381 SERIAL:
0010 0010 SUCCESSFUL RTY
0064 0064
0006 0006 UNSUCCESS. RETRY 0018 0018
0022 0022 UNRTY (RETRY 1)
0014 0014
0014 0014 UNRTY (RETRY 2)
0015 0015
0000 0000 UNRTY (NO RETRY) 0011 0011
001B 001B CK ST (RETRY 1)
0020 0020
0030 0030 CK ST (RETRY 2)
001E 001E
0010 0010 CK ST (SKIP LOG) 0016 0016
00E7 00E7 CK ST (MC RESET) 0027 0027
0007 0007 KEYS
0015 0015
0000 0000 DBE HARD-HARD
001E 001E
0000 0000 DBE HARD-SOFT
0012 0012
0002 0002 DBE SOFT-SOFT
0021 0021
0002 0002 DBE UNCORRECTED
0017 0017
0000 0000 DBE CORRECTED
0000 0000
0008 0008 TOTAL RETRY
0000 0000
000000
HARDWARE COUNTER .
COMMAND: QEPSl
>PUl
MAN
PUO
MAN
CK ST (RETRY 2): The processor went to check stop on
a machine check that occurred during retry.
TEST
TEST
012345 LOCAL TOO
CS CONTROL
CS ARRAY 0
CS ARRAY 1
CS ARRAY 2
CS ARRAY 3
IPU DATA FLOW L
IPU DATA FLOW H
IPU SHIFTER
IPU SAR
IPU I-CYCLES
IPU INTRUPT
IPU TIMER
IPU LS/EXT
CL CONTROL 0
CL CONTROL 1
UNSUCCESSFUL I/O
EQU:
OOOB
0010
0015
0019
0010
OOOF
0069
OOOF
0002
OOOB
001E
001E
OOOC
OOOB
0035
0000
yy/mm/dd hh mm ss
OOOB
0010
0015
0019
0010
OOOF
0009
OOOF
0002
OOOB
001E
001E
OOOC
OOOB
0035
0000
CH DATA BUFFR
CH CONTROL
CH INTERFACEl
CH INTERFACEO
ST CACHE 0
ST CACHE 1
ST CACHE 2
ST CACHE 3
ST CTL/ECCl E
ST CTL/ECCl 0
ST BSM/ECC2 E
ST BSM/ECC2 0
ST SAR
ST KEYS
ST DLAT
SUCCESS. I/O
==>
>CHECK STOP
CSAR: 013A80
>CHECK STOP
CSAR: 018520
370 4381 RC= 5DD218AE 00008000
CK ST (SKIP LOG): The processor was operating with
check control in no log. A machine check occurred during
retry, the counter was updated but no log was recorded.
CK ST (MC RESET): A machine check occurred during
processor IML or system reset.
KEYS: A storage key error occurred.
DBE HARD-HARD: A storage double-bit error where
both bits are solid failures.
DBE HARD-SOFT: A storage double-bit error where one
bit is a solid failure and the other bit is an intermittent
failure.
DBE SOFT-SOFT: A storage double-bit error where both
bits fail intermittently.
HARDWARE COUNTER: Records the number of
single-bit main storage errors.
4381
B/M 2676380
rMI
l.§!9.
GF025
PN 6169383
4m5
EC A20558I
~O~1_0_~~8~4~·~.
____~__~_________~________~__~____~
LOG 060
C Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OOO! 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1
"-+'
"I,
N' ,I""
\
~'''rl''''W
"ew'"
ItdlO""!l'!'HU
fI,
II'".,
C
'"
'Nk"'m"
H .II"i," !!.t9'yiN'd.w/f,rf'.i'""
,I I
"
b' ,t"
W"CI!"'!IIM!U!
'I' "III
timirlbl''''''!!'!' I
!!oI'"
it Wdht! 'I!! '" !'IIM' l'Util.. " I"il "I'" ,Ij
j"
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000
LOG 065
•
PU ReconfigUTstion Dsts
To display the last 15 reconfiguration logs:
Press MODE SEL.
2.
Key in OEPR and press ENTER.
•
If there are more than 15 reconfiguration logs, the
message PRESS ENTER is displayed at the bottom of the
screen.
SERIAL: 012345 TOO: yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss
PU.RECONFIGURATION DATA MODEL: 4381
RECONFIGURATION DATA
PU TOO EQUIVALENT
--23------------ ADDR 0017E7CO
0008 0 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss SWAP BUFF. BYTE
ADDR 00103ECO
X03 Y05
CHANNEL
0007 0 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss COB
ADDR 00087EOO
RECONFIG
0006 1 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss MULT.
ADDR 00000048
-1-----BYTE
CACHE
hh:mm:ss
0005 0 yy/mm/dd
ADDR 00103AOO
2/6 20=1
BYTE
0004 1 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss CNT. STG
ADDR 0007ACOO
SLOT
00
10
CONGo
CL
CACHE
DIR.
hh:mm:ss
yy/mm/dd
0003 1
ADDR 001FCFCO
NC
SS
STG.
DBE.
0002 0 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss
The channel data buffer has four extra buffers that
can be used for reconfiguration: two extra buffers (X
and Y) for channels 0 through 5 and two extra
buffers (X and Y) for channels 6 through 8. The extra
buffers are shown with the channels assigned to
them.
The PU Reconfiguration Data screen records any
reconfiguration that takes place because of a processing
unit error. Up to thirty reconfiguration logs can be stored.
1.
CDS
10
STG DBE
If a double-bit error occurs in main storage, the error
type is displayed with the address of the failing
doubleword. The error types are:
SS
Both bits are failing intermittently (soft-soft).
This error is not correctable.
HH
Both bits are failing all the time (hard-hard).
This error is correctable.
HS
One bit is failing all the time; the other is
failing intermittently (hard-soft). This error is
correctable.
TODC: The time of the failure.
CR
The error is correctable.
Reconfiguration Data: Shows what areas of the
processing unit have been reconfigured because of the
error. The areas that can be reconfigured are:
NC
The error is not correctable.
ERR
A machine check occurred while trying to
analyze an error. The error type was not
determined.
Label Identification
LOGIO: The same 10 as the Processing Unit Logout
Directory screen (OEPD). Since all processing unit errors
do not result in reconfiguration, all log IDs on the OEPD
screen may not be displayed on the PU Reconfiguration
Data screen.
•
CACHE
Cache is reconfigured on a byte basis. If byte four of
cache is bad, byte four is assigned to the backup area
for all cache pages. The reconfigured bytes (0
through 7) are indicated by an X.
I
•
CACHE DIR
NE
LATEST LOGID: 0008
COMMAND: QEPR
•
==>
CNT STG
Control storage is reconfigured to a 2K backup area
on a byte pair basis. The screen displays the byte pair
that was reconfigured, bit 20, and the address.
No error was found
The error type is displayed to the left if an even
address failed and to the right if an odd address
failed. The sample screen on this page shows a
soft-soft, noncorrectable error for an even address.
•
If the multiply function fails, multiply instructions are
done by microcode.
•
If a part of the cache backup area is bad, the
associated cache directory entry is used to flag the
processor that this area of cache cannot be used. The
cache directory has 32 associated classes (CONG.
Cl) with eight slots each.
HW MULT
SWAP BUFF
The swap buffer is reconfigured on a byte pair basis.
The reconfigured bytes (0 through F) are indicated
with an x.
LA TEST LOGIO: The last log that required
reconfiguration.
:~~ 2676380 I~~g GF026
e Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
PN
6169383 II EC A20558I
.50f5
. L.~0~1~O~ct~8~4~~.__________~____________~____________~____________~
I
LOG 065
0000000000000000000000000000000000
m,,'wW=,,,:";,,i"'"I!!!"'f B1y"M';",,'f,i''f'd''!il/liUlUM'.'''' 'If! WU ""'"rtJHP'IIHWI\"!fr' ret "d"l'Hf't'fIlJI["
'wwg Wf":-:
f"'W'fd% wi.ijpmtfeu 'I' "\"IflWKl fi:tt'15'fkJl'uQI'm
t
"f !"iN' '&IiMQ 1",1, V 'f" FIHN"!" MIL'!' HI Itt KLr'IHMM'''e """1"'"o"'M,"I119"':'" '!fBJ'f.,rlr
O' 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
LOG 075
Channel Interface Control Check (lFCC) Logs
Channel Interface Logout Summary Screen
_Two channel IFCC log screens are available:
•
Channel Interface Logout Summary
•
Channel Interface Logout Detail.
put
DXXY DISPLAY
To display the Channel Interface Logout Summary screen:
1.
Press MODE SEL.
2.
Key in OEI and press ENTER.
Notes:
1.
If a reconfiguration has taken place, the LAST IFCC
SAVED field may point to a channel that is not
displayed on the screen.
3~
If multiple errors occur in a short time span, IFCC
logging can: be stopped to ~crease processor speed.
If logging has been stopped, you can start logging
again by clearing the channel interface logs or by
re-iMLing. The processors must be in instruction
stop while clearing. the log. '"'If a processor is in
. hardstop when the logs are c1eared,.Iogging will not
continue when the system ~ started again.
.
-
••
. 4.
5.
4381
B/M 2676380
If·· is displayed in the LAST IFCC SAVE[}1ield~ no ,IFCCs have occurred since the"1FCC logs were
purged.
If you display one of the Channel Interface Logout
screens (OEI or OEIDxxy) with the system running
and an interface control check occurs, the General
Selection (0) screen is displayed. (This will occur for
any console function screen.) If IFCCs are occurring
and you want to display a console function screen,
press STOP.
Nil
I PN 6169384 II EC A20558 ·1 EC A20559 I
IL~:::.e::.:g:a....:G::.:F-=O:.::3:.::0~--.&.• ..:.1..:o:.:.f.:::2:...._ _....... 01 Oct 84 . 03 Dec 84 .
o Copyright IBM Corp. ~19B4
P
PURGE IFCC LOGOUTS
Q
GENERAL SELECT
z
RTN TO SYSTEM
CHNL
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
LAST PURGE: yy/mm/dd hh mm
COMMAND: QEI
Only channels· which are configured for the processor
are displayed on the Channel Interface Logout
Summary screen.
2.
*INTERFACE CONTROL CHECK LOGOUTS*
*ERROR DISPLAYS*
XXY=CHNLXX,L Y
The Channel Interface Logout Summary screen displays
the number of Interface Control Check (IFCC) logs taken
for each channel up to eight logs per channel. For
channels with greater than eight logs, 8+ is displayed.
The last channel to have an IFCC is displayed under LAST
IFCC SAVED.
IFCC
LOGGED
LAST
IFCC
SAVED
03
00
02
00
01
00
00
00
00
00
PU/
CHNL
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
IFCC
LOGGED
00
00
00
00
00
00
08+
00
00
==>
To clear the Channel Interface Logout Summary screen:
1.
Set the CE Mode switch to CE Mode .
2: .If either processor is running, press STOP on the
operator console .
3.
Key in OEIP, and press ENTER .
4.
When prompted, key in P and press ENTER again.
The IFCC log screens for all channels are cleared.
LOG 075
f
LOG 080.
Note: Tags Out gives the tag values before the
interface drivers. The interface lines can be different from
the values of Tags Out if a driver fails.
Channellnterfsce Logout Detail Screen
On the Channel Interface Logout Detail Screen, log 1
always contains information about the latest failure. If
there are more than eight logs on the selected channel,
8+ is displayed for the selected -channel on the Channel
Interface Logout Summary Screen. Logs 1 through 4
contain information about the latest failures, and logs 5
through 8 contain information about the first four logs
occurring after the logs were cleared. In this case, log 8
is the first error to occur after the logs were cleared.
To display the Channel Interface Logout Detail screen:
1.
Press MODE SEL.
2.
Key in OEIDxx and press ENTER. Where xx is the
address of the PU/channel (00 through 08 for
channels on PUO or 10 through 18 for channels on
PU 1) that you want to display.
3.
TOO: yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss
*ERROR LOGOUTS*
*CHANNEL 00 INTERFACE LOGOUTS*
---ADDR--- -TAGS---BUS-ENGINEERING
CAT
DATA
L TYPE DEVA SCHID IN OUT SQ IN OUT CNT NUM
TOO
370X 0233 7777 44 32 11 55
77 FF 55 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss 00000000000000
2 370
OOOE ****
00
02
44
00
00
04
42 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss OEOOF01C20
3 370
OOOE ****
00
02
44
00
09
09
42 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss 2400201C92
4 370
OOOE ****
00
02
44
00
00
03
42 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss OEOOF01C20
5 370
OOOE ****
00
02
44
00
09
05
42 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss 2400201C92
6
OOOE ****
00
02
44
00
00
02
42 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss OEOOF01C20
7 370X 0233 8657
44
32
77
55
77
64
55 yy/mm/dd
370
8 370 OOOE **** 00 02 44 00 09 03 42 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss 2400201C92
TAGIN= REQ OPL DIS ADR SEL STA SRV/DAT TAGOUT= ADR CMD OAT SRV SUP OPL SEL
==>
COMMAND: QEID001
TYPE: ·370 if the device active at the time of failure
so:
Data on bus-out at the time of failure.
CNT: The number of times the same error occurred
sequentially.
CA T NUM: The microcode catalog number for the error.
For information on catalog numbers, see Volume A06,
"Service Aids," "Catalog Numbers (S/370)" or "Catalog
Numbers (S/370XA)."
TAGS IN: Tag in lines active on the channel at the time
of failure as follows:
Bit:
0
Tag:
REQ
OPL
2
3
4
DIS
ADR
SEL
5
STA
6
SRV/DATA
7
Not
used
0
1
2
3
4
Tag:
Not
used
ADR
5
2
'J
,.
"'T
;J
~
L
u
7
CMD
DAT
SRV
SUP
OPL
SEL
J
Additional data logged to help
identify the failure. The fields are all one byte long and are
labeled:
. ENGINEERING OA TA:
o
TAGS OUT: Tag out lines active on the channel at the
time of failure as follows:
Bit:
~.
TOO: Time-of-day equivalent of the error if the CNT field
is one, or the time-of-day equivalent for the last error of
the group if the CNT field is greater than one.
Byte Field 10
SCHID:
The microcode sequence count for the error. For
information on sequence counts, see Volume A06,
'-Service Aids," "Catalog Numbers {S/370}" or "Catalog
Numbers (S/370XA)."
Data on bus-in at the time of failure.
~
Note: Tags In gives the tag values after the interface
receivers. The interface lines can be different from the
values of Tags In if a· receiver fails.
The operating system's logical device address
(for 370XA mode only).
BUS IN:
\-."'\
uses 370 mode; 370X if the device uses 370XA mode.
DEVA: The address of the device the channel was
working with at the time of failure.
Address in/out
Select in/out
Command out
Service in/out
Disconnect in
Data in/out
Operational in/out
Status in
Request in
Suppress out
BUS OUT:
Label Identification
L: The log number.
ADR
SEL
CMD
SRV
DIS
OAT
OPL
STA
REQ
SUP
hh:mm:ss 00000000000000
To intensify the tag lines active for a specific failure,
key in OEIDxxy and press ENTER. xx is the same
PU/channel and y is the log number (1 through 8)
from the L field.
Note: If the sequence count (SO) contains 68, 6C,or
78, the device address (DEVA) a-nd logical address
(SCHID) are invalid.
The abbreviations used for the tag lines are:
6
CHSYNCO
CHDATAO
CHSYNC1
CHDATA2
CHCMDR
CHIMODE (370XA only)
VvRKPATH (370XA oniyj
TOO (top line):
Time you requested the IFCC Logout
Detail screen.
TAGIN= ... TAGOUT= ... (line 19): The tag lines active at
the time of failure are intensified on this line for the log 10
you entered.
4381
81M 2676380
I
MI
Seq GF030
• Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
o
I
PN 6169384
2 of 2
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
EC A20559
03 Dec 84
LOG 080
0 0 0 0 --O~·O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O· 0 0 0 0 0 O,c--{}--
EC A20658I
__.~________~________~________~______~
~.~0~1~O~c~t~8~4
LOG 085
o Capyright IBM Corp. 1984
au Za:l&iZSil$ as S"222ii1! Ali
!iiE$ii
Uii:
LOG 090
Power Error Logout Detail Screen
Label Identification
The Power Error Logout Detail Screen gives detailed
information about the power system at the time an error
occurs.
POWER LOGOUT xx: The detail logout number you
selected by entering OEWDxx.
TOO: The time of the failure.
To select the Power Error logout Detail screen:
1.
CONTROL LA TCHES AT TIME OF ERROR:
of power control latches up to the failure.
Enter OEWDxx; where xx is the selected line number
from the Power Error logout SummaI}' screen (00
through 03).
f
TOO = yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss
CONTROL LATCHES ON AT TIME OF ERROR:
REFERENCE CODE: The reference code that defines the
power error condition.
Note: Only the last four logs of the Power Error logout
Summary screen (00 through 03) can be displayed in
detail.
REFERENCE CODE = llD1350E
POWER LOGOUT: 00
01)
02)
03)
04)
05)
PICK K3
PICK K4
-2.2V PS103 START
-1.5V PS105 START
-4.3V PS106 START
06}
07}
08)
09}
10)
-1.5 PS111 START
-4.3 PSl12 START
+5V PS109 START
+5V PS108 START
+6V PS107 START
POWER ERRORS:
The sequence
+6V PS107 CURRENT LIMIT
POWER ERRORS: The power error(s) detected at the
time of failure.
COMMAND: QEWDOO
==>
l~
4381
81M 2676380
e CopYfittit IBM Corp.
rMI
l!!s.
1984
PN 6169385
GF035
20f2
ECA20558
I
~O~1~O~c~t~8~4~~.
I~
I'
________~~~~__~__~____~________~.
lOG 090
() O()OOOOOOOOOOOO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
SYS TEST 001
SYSTEM TEST
Contents
System Test/4381 ••••••••••••••••• SYS TEST 015
Introduction ..........••.•.••..•..•. SYS TEST 015
Wait State Codes .•..•..•.••..•..•. SYS TEST 015
ST4381 and ST4381XARun Flowchart •..•• SYS TEST 020
Channel-ta-Channel ...••.••••••••.•• SYS TEST 025
3890 Initialization Procedures ..••.••.• SYS TEST 025
Using MVS Utilities to Copy System
Test/4381XA ...••..•••.••••••••••• SYS TEST 030
4300-FRIEND ••••••••••••••••••••• SYS TEST 035
Introduction to 4300-FRIEND •.•••••••••• SYS TEST 035
How to Use 4300-FRIEND ..•.••.••.•..•. SYS TEST 035
Loading 4300-FRIEND from the DIAG1
Diskette .•..••••..•.••.••••••••• SYS TEST 035
Overview on Making a CCW Chain •••••• SYS TEST 040
Specifying a Single CCW Chain ••••.••• SYS TEST 040
Advanced Capabilities of 4300-FRIEND •.••• SYS TEST 045
Specifying Multiple CCW Chains ••.•.• ~. SYS TEST 046
Symbolic I/O Areas ••••..•••..••.•.. SYS TEST 045
CCW Chain Sequence Control and·Delay
Between CCW Chains •••.•••••••••. SYS TEST 050
Data Compare •...•.••.•..•.••.•••• SYS TEST 050
Increase/Decrease Counter ••.••••..••• SYS TEST 050
Data Ripple/Random •••.•.••.••..•.• SYS TEST 055
Predefined CCW Chains ..•••••.•..••• SYS TEST 055
Storage Protection Key Modification .•••• SYS TEST 055
Trace Function •••..•..•.••.••••••• SYS TEST 055
Special Storage Areas .•.•..•..•..•.••.• SYS TEST 060
Unit Control Block (UCB) .•.••••••.•.• SYS TEST 060
Information Requested by 4300-FRIEND •.•• SYS TEST 065
4300-FRIEND Messages .•...•.••.•.••. SYS TEST 075
Status and Operator Messages ••.•..•.• SYS TEST 075
Error Messages ••..•..••••..••••..• SYS TEST 080
4300-FRIEND Commands .••.••.•....•. SYS TEST 095
Changing Existing CCW Chains •.••..•.• SYS TEST 115
Change Commands .••..••.•.•..•..• SYS TEST 125
CCW Chain Execution Control .•..•••... SYS TEST 125
CCW COMMANDS •..••..•.•..••.•• ;. SYS TEST 130
General CCWs .•..•..••.•..••••..• SYS TEST 130
Disk CCWs •..••.••..•• ;.......... SYS TEST 130
Fixed Block (FB) Commands - 3370 ..•.. SYS TEST 135
Tape CCWs .;.................... SYS TEST 135
Card Reader/Punch CCWs ..••••..•... SYS TEST 140
Printer CCWs .•...•..•..•..•.•...• SYS TEST 140
CRT and Hard-Copy Printer CCWs
(3277/3278-3287) ....•..•..•..•. SYS TEST 140
Teleprocessing CCWs (270x, 370x) •.... SYS TEST 145
CCW FLAGS •••.••.•..•..••.•...•.•. SYS TEST 150
CCW COMMAND MODIFIERS .••.•..•..•. SYS TEST 150
4381
B/M 2676380
I~~g
CI Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
I
PN 6169386
GG005
.' of1
II
.
EC A20558
I
L.~O~1~O::ct~8~4~~.__________~________~________~________~
SYS TEST 001
IESSst!:::::
0000000000000000000000000000000000
-
...- _ . _ - - . - _ . - - -
. _... _ - - - - -
-
_._-
'nllI'H¥iww';' '#±'
o
w'!
j • •4!4JI,."/rI"
'1,1+( 'dtJ!.lt'rIMbi 4. "riA "HltNjI*'tiU,..;, It; I,u
.j,,IJ!l!e'
"'lew
ni&'
!!'i'!"'Fd
wm
If
['
Ii'
'3"
b'
j'd(UlllbltW!ljJ
WnW
"'Ii!
1I'(#'#'11,.,,"'Hi'" .yW'M!!5f!
'I'
![',Ir'~ iflPlffIFlMlrfy ,(,rLII "' ''''''''+II'ffi''H!l/"" '
th+s'wNI!"
'!'f""i'III,;.,''''''''i,·wairnlrlfRl'''r',M'n!fU "tHi'iiuw1.w'W'f
I,,',)
,t!!i':""'·""&!fW'U!'ra'"'-H"'fIOM'·/
PW
,,'1'\* 'H .... ·
,I
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0,0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SYS TEST 015
System Test/4381
Introduction
Wait State Codes
Reasons to Run ST4381
To Run ST4381, You Need:
There are two versions of System Test for the 4381.
Use System Test/4381 (abbreviation: ST4381) if your
system runs in 370 mode only. Use System
Test/4381XA (abbreviation: ST4381XA) if your system
runs in 370XA mode or in both 370 and 370XA modes.
To display the wait state codes, press the STOP key. The
code is displayed in the status area of the screen.
•
To test the I/O configuration
•
A tape load device
•
After you install an EC
•
An operator console
•
To attempt to repeat an earlier failure
•
Two megabytes of processor storage
Note: ST4381 XA is a limited use licensed maintenance
program.
OODEADO 1: An irrecoverable error on the operator
console is preventing communication with the operator.
More information maybe available on the printer.
•
To copy your ST4381 tape.
•
The I/O devices to be tested
•
An output printer (recommended).
Use the flowcharts on this page and page
SYS TEST 020 for general information on running either
ST4381 or ST4381 XA. The operation of either System
Test is the same.
OODEAD02: An irrecoverable error occurred on the
ST4381 load device. More information may be available
on the 'printer.
Warning:
This page provides information about System Test. If
you are not sure how to begin, read this page. Be
especially attentive to the information about protecting
customer data.
OODEAD03: The ST4381 control program was
damaged by an unexpected storage alteration or program
interrupt, or a tape for S/370 mode (ST4381) was IPLed
in S/370XA mode.
To run System Test, go to page SYS TEST 020.
OODEAD04: Unrequested continuous interrupts are
occurring when they are masked off. More information
may be available on the printer or the operator console.
For information on copying ST4381 XA using MVS
utilities, see page SYS TEST 030.
Note: For more information on running System Test,
see the information shipped with your ST4381 tape and
the information printed on the system printer after you
IPL.
OOOOFF01: Enabled wait state at IPL time; ST4381 is
waiting for the ENTER key to be pressed.
Data Protection
Have You Protected The Customer's Data?
Magnetic Tape Drives
•
•
•
OODEAD05: An irrecoverable error occurred while
changing processing units for an I/O operation.
•
OOEEEEEE: System Test is terminated in response to
the Terminate command. This is the normal end of test.
•
Do not test a tape drive if it is shared by another
system; always make it not available. Directions on
how to so this are displayed, when needed, on the
screen.
Always install a scratch (spare) tape on the tape
drives being tested.
Getting Ready To Run ST 4381
1.
Ensure that the processor is IMLed.
Note: An IPL from PU 1 in 370 mode requires a
channel attached display console.
2.
Ready your IPL device.
3.
Display the Program Load (OL)screen, and ensure:
•
Always remove a customer's tape from a tape drive if
you are not sure of its safety.
The correct mode is specified (S/370 or
. S/370XA).
To change the mode, display the
select the correct mode.
Write a tape mark on all blank tapes (the screen gives
directions when needed).
.
Do not change the switches on tape control units
with the communicator feature after the start of
preconfiguration.
au screen,
and
•
U IPL UNIT specifies the ST4381 load device.
•
The correct processor is selected.
To select the IPL processor key OTO for PUO or
QT1 for PU1.
DASD Devices
•
,
4381-3
B/M 2676380
I
MI
I
PN 6169387 II EC A20558I. EC A20560
01 Oct 84 . 18 Feb 85
L.S
=99::a.....;G:,:G::,0::",:.:O::.----I.....:1;.,.o;::,;f:...;2::.-_ _.....j• •
C> Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
.
Do not test a DASD device that is shared. This slows
system operation and may stop (lock out) the
customer's processor. To prevent this, either make
the shared DASD not available (drop it) or vary it to
Test Level 2 (the screen gives you directions when
they are needed).
Install a CE pack on DASD with removable packs for
level 1 testing.
4.
Display the QFO screen, and ensure that the console
is in DISPLAY mode and that the display consoles
have assigned addresses.
5.
Make ready the devices to be tested.
Note: The hard copy output printer must be
connected to the same processor used for IPl.
6.
Go to the next page.
SYS TEST 015
SYS TEST 020
ST4381 and ST4381XA Run Flowchart
From previous column
From previous column
~
~
to ---- This starts loading ST4381
and displays the ST4381
logo on all available
native display consoles
(for PUO only).
No
Press ENTER to display
the logo on the display
console you want to use.
If you used PU1 to IPL.
press ENTER on the channel
attached display console.
Enter the
following when
prompted.
Press ENTER to
load the ST4381
control program.I ••- - - - - -.......
Output address
Density.
When prompted.
set time-oF-day
clock.
ST4381 tape is
copied and the
selection menu
is d i sp layed.
Do you really
mean no?
No
To
Note: Press RESTORE
on all line printers.
(Channel 9 causes a
unit check during
configuration.)
)
Note: Processor tests
start.
Yes
Yes
column
Yes
~To
4381-3
81M 2676380
I
MI
Seq GG010
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
I
PN 6169387
2 of 2
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
channel-to-channel,
see "Channel-to-Channel"
on page SYS TEST 025.
2. If you are testing a
3890. see 113890
Initialization Procedure"
on page SYS TEST 025.
Vary the test
leve 1s.
I
I
Preconflguration
starts; a list
of system I/O
devices displays.
No
1. I f you are test i n9
....._ _ 1 _ _-
When prompted.
set time-of-day
clock.
We recommend
you assign an
output printer.
This supplies a
detailed copy
of ST4381 error
information.
Follow the
directions on
the screen.
Preconfiguration ends and
configuration
starts.
A table of the
available
devices is
displayed.
Enter S to test
the 4381 and I/O.
or enter C to
copy your ST4381
tape.
Notes:
~
BE SURE TO DROP
IALL SHARED
DEVICES.
Follow the
directions on
the screen.
Configuration
ends. The I/O
tests start to
run.
To display test
status, press
the ENTER key.
Activity Screen
is displayed.
Enter C for
a list of
commands.
I Follow the
directions on
the screen.
Write tape
ma r k ( s ). F0 1 1ow
the directions
.on the screen.
TEST LEtEL 0
Seek/read on DASD.
Buffer test on printers.
Read/write on tapes
and displays.
Read/write on TP
(wrap only).
CTCA not tested.
Sense/NaP test for
all other devices.
TEST LEVEL 1
Install CE pack/cell
for level 1 testing.
Seek/read/write on DASD.
Print test on printers
(load the UCS code).
Reads/punches cards.
CTCA is tested.
All other devices run
the same as level O.
TEST LEVEL 2
Testing is suppressed.
Enter T. The
ST4381 tests
stop running.
next column
EC A20560
18 Feb 85
SYS TEST 020
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
bWrM ..
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
SYS TEST 025
Channe~to-Channel
.3890 Initialization Procedures
No testing is done on a channel-ta-channel adapter or a
3088 unless they are varied to level 1 after configuration.
Also, either run in wrap mode or run one of the following
programs on the other CPU at the same time:
To test a 3890 Document Processor with System
Test/4381 or System Test/4381XA, do the following:
ST43 00
ST370
NST-2
System Test/4381
System Test/4381XA.
1.
Ensure that functional coreload * FAO is loaded and
that the test routine switch is set to image run.
2.
Set all features to off using the operator panel. For
details, se$ the 3890 Document Processor
Operator's Guide.
3.
Install a jumper from 01 B-C3J06 to ground. (This
prevents time-outs.)
4.
Set the On Line switch to On Line and press START.
5.
After starting System Test/4381, make the 3890
not ready.
6. . Vary the 3890 to test level 1.
4381
B/M 2676380
o Copyright IBM Corp.
I~~g
1984
GG015
I
7.
Set the Test Routine switch to Process.
8.
Place test documents in the hopper and press
START. Testing of the 3890 begins.
9.
Remove the time-out jumper "at the end of the test.
PN 6169388 II EC A20558I
.1M2
.~.~O~1~O~~~8~4~~.______________~______________~__________~____________~
SYSTEST 025
SYS .TEST 030
Use the following JCL for step 3.
Using MVS Utilities to Copy System
Test/4381XA
Note: All lowercase characters are installation
dependent and must be specified by the user.
Copy System Test/4381XA to one of the following Direct
Access Storage Devices (DASD):
IlwRIPL
IISTEP3
3330
3340
3350
3375
3380.
IISYSPRINT
IIIPLTEXT
II
IIS80
JOB
EXEC
DO
DO
parameters
PGM=ICKOSF
SYSOUT=A
OISP=SHR,OSN=S80.SYSM(UIPLOR),
VOL=SER=volid,UNIT=disk
OISP=OLO,UNIT=disk,VOL=SER=volid
DO
IISYSIN
DO
*
REFORMAT OONAME(S80) VERIFY(volid) IPLOO(IPLTEXT)
1*
To copy System Test/4381XA:
1.
Delete the System Test/4381 XA data set if it exists.
2.
Copy Syst«!m Test/4381/XA to DASD.
3.
Create an IPL record.
Use the following JCL for steps 1 and 2.
Note: All lowercase characters are installation
dependent and must be specified by the user.
I/COPYST
IISTEPl
IIDELOSN
IISTEP2
IISYSLIN
II
I/SYSLOUT
IITAPEFILE
II
IIOISKFILE
II
II
IISYSPRINT
JOB parameters
EXEC PGM=IEFBR14
00
DSN=S80~SYSM,VOL=SER=volid,UNIT=disk,0ISP=(OLD,OELETE)
EXEC PGM=LOADER,REGION=1024K
00
VOL=SER=S80TAP,UNfT=tape,LABEl=(3,NL),
.
DC8=(LRECL-SO,BLKSIZE-2000,RECFM-FB,DEN-3},DISP-OLD
SYSOUT=A
00
DO
VOL=REF=*. SYSL IN,UN IT-AFF-SYSL IN,LABEL-( ,NL),
DCB-DEN-3,DfSP=OLD
DO
DSN=SSO.SYSM,VOL-REF·*.DEL.OELDSN,UNfT-disk
DISP=(,KEEP),SPACE-(2000,()420,O,100),.CONTIG),
DCB-(LRECL=SO,BLKSIZE-2000,RECFM-FB)
.
DO
SYSOUT-A
Notes:
1.
Correct execution results in a return code of O. If the
return code is not 0, refer to the SYSPRINT output
for the error messages.
2.
System Test/4381XA requires a new or empty data
set. If the data set already exists, delete it and
reallocate it prior to the copy.
3.
The copy program requires a 100K region.
4381
B/M 2676380
~I'
I
.Seq
GG016
I ~N 6169388
.2012
II EC A20558 ·1
,.
_~.~O~1~O~c~t~8~4~_~______~~______~.________~~~____~
• Cclpyright IBM Corp. 1984
0000000000000000000000000
"\ "M#il" '"tH
rl
f
t+ttW
' ...
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
SYS TEST 035
4300-FRIEND
Introduction to 4300-FRIEND
How to Use 4300-FRIEND
4300-FRIEND (Fast Running Interpreter Enabling Natural
Diagnosis) is a test tool that lets you analyze complex I/O
problems. It is a stand-alone, offline program that
requires 64K bytes of customer storage and a display
console.
Loading 4300-FRIEND from the DIAG 1
Diskette
4300-FRIEND supports all channel command words
(CCWs) for most S/370 files, drums, tapes, card
reader/punch units, and teleprocessing devices. You
enter each channel command from the console keyboard.
Channel programs for up to 99 devices can be entered
and run at the same time.
11. Key OZ next to COMMAND, press the ENTER key.
12. Press the ENTER key twice (4300-FRIEND starts
running).
13. Enter your replies to the 4300-FRIEND requests.
Note: To run 4300-FRIEND to Processing Unit 1 (PU 1)
requires a display console attached to channel 0 on PU 1.
14. Press the ENTER key on the display console that you
want to use to control 4300-FRIEND.
To load 4300-FRIEND from the DIAG 1 diskette:
1.
Do a system IML (S/370 mode).
Note: If your normal console keyboard language is
Japanese/Katakana, use the OFL screen to select
. U.S. English before running 4300-FRIEND. For
information on changing console keyboard language,
see Volume A06, "(QFL) Language Configuration."
If 4300-FRIEND needs any additional information about
the command (such as record numbers or data length),
the program asks you for the information.
2.
Key OCLEAR next to COMMAND, press the ENTER
key.
3.
Key OFO next to COMMAND and then key N next to
PRT/KYBD, press the ENTER key.
4.
Set the CE Mode switch to CE Mode.
5.
Key either QTO or QT1 next to COMMAND to select
PUO or PU 1, press the ENTER key.
6.
Key QLKE next to COMMAND, press the ENTER key.
Message MOU NT PROPER DISK, ENTER is
displayed.
7.
Remove the FUNC2 diskette from diskette drive 2,
insert the DIAG 1 diskette into diskette drive 2, and
press the ENTER key. After 4300-FRIEND is loaded,
message REMOUNT FUNCTIONAL DISK is displayed.
8.
Remove the DIAG1 diskette and insert the FUNC2
diskette into diskette drive 2.
9.
Press the MODE SEL key on the system display
console (the keyboard near the OCP).
10. Key ORES next to COMMAND, press the ENTER key.
15. Enter your replies to the 4300-FRIEND requests on
the display console you selected in step 14. (You
can now use the system display console for normal
manual system console functions while the display
console you selected in step 14 is controlling
4300-FRIEND.)
The following lists 4300-FRIEND requests. For details
about these requests, see "Information Requested by
4300-FRIEND. "
ADR=
ATT=
BBCCHH=
BL OFFS=
BLCK CNT=
CMD=
CYL=
DATA=
DEV=
DEVADDR=
DEV TYPE=
DL=
HARD COPY(Y IN)=
HD=
IDAWS IN HEX=
KEY=
KL=
LOG END=
LOG START=
MASK=
MASK BYTE=
MLCCCBBCCHHRDDS=
MODE (BC/EC)=
MODE CMD=
MODEL=
NUMBER OF TIMES=
OP BYTE=
PHYSTART=
RCD NO=
REPL CNT=
SD=
SEC ~RINTER ADDR=
SECOND SD=
THIRD SD=
WCC=
The following lists 4300-FRIEND commands. For details
about these commands, see "4300-FRIEND
Commands."
$$1
$$nnn,*
$*=hh
? or?? .
ACTIVATE
ADD
ALARM
.ALTER KEY
ALTER nnn
BMPX
BTS
BUILD
CCW
CHANGE KEYBOARD
CHANGE nnn
CLEAR
CLEAR$c
COMPARE
CONFIG
CONNECT
COpy
COUNTER
CREATE
CSW=Xxxx
DATA DUMP
DECREASE
DEVICE=
DISCONNECT
DlSPLAY
DUMP $
DUMP KEY
DUMP
DUMPT
EX CLRIO
EXHD~
EX HIO
EX STIDC
EXTCH
EXTIO
FLAG
GO
HAlT
HELP
I
INCREASE
INT
KEY CAW
KEY CCW
KEY DATA
KEY IDA
LIST
LOOP
NO ALARM
NO BMPX
NO COMPARE
NO DATA DUMP
NO DECREASE
NO HALT
NO INCREASE
NOINT
NO TEST 1/0
NO TIME DELAY
NO WAIT
POINTER CCW
POINTER DATA
POINTER IDA
PRINT SENSE
PSW
QUIT
REMOVE
REP
RESET
RETURN
SCOPE
SENSE
SET FB
SIZE
START READER
STATUS
STOP
SUBST
TEST I/O
TIME DELAY
TRACE
WAIT
Note: If you are using a single console system, do
steps 11 through 13; if you are using a multiple
console system, skip steps 11 through 13, and go to
step 14.
4381
B/M 2676380
I~~g
It Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GG020
SYSTEST 035
2
=,_.
ES!!
Llil
PI'
SYS TEST 040
Summsryon Msking s CCW Chsin
Examples of a Single CCW Chain
Restrictions
To make a CCW chain:
The following example instructs 4300-FRIEND to first
seek cylinder 5, head 5 and then to seek cylinder 198,
head 9 on device address 260.
4300-FRIEND inserts TIC *-8 or SET FilE MASK CCWs
if you leave it out. This can cause a not valid CCW chain.
•
Respond to 4300-FRIEND requests (see
"Information Requested by 4300-FRIEND").
Example of an Invalid CCW Chain
DEV=DEVICE ADDRESS=260 (Enter address)
ENTER CCW LIST IN ENGLISH
(Enter command)
seek
(Enter number)
CYl=-5
HD =5
(Enter number)
seek
(Enter command)
CYl=198
(Enter number)
(Enter number)
HD =9
go
reset
•
Respond to 4300-FRIEND messages (see
"4300-FRIE,ND Messages").
•
Optionally specify a predefined CCW chain (see
"Predefined CCWChains").
•
Specify 4300-FRIEND commands (see
"4300-FRIEND Commands").
•
Specify CCW commands (see "CCW Commands").
Specifying s SingleCCW Chsln
To specify a single OCW chain:
1.
Specify the device address of the unit you want to
test when 4300-FRIEND asks for it (DEV= ).
2.
When COMMAND appears on line 20, key a CCW
command and press the ENTER key.
3. Key any additional information 4300-FRIEND
requests.
4.
After you have specified the entire CCW chain, key
GO and press the ENTER key. The device performs
the operation you requested.
5.
If you want to specify another CCW chain, press the
REQUEST key.
6.
When the PROCEED indicator turns on, key RESET or
I.
7.
Go to step 1, and specify the new CCW chain.
4381
B/M 2676380
e Copyright IBM Corp.
~
l!!9
GG020
PN 6169389
20f2
The next example instructs 4300-FRIEND to read one
block of data from a fixed block device (3370).
DEV= 240
1/0= 438100-337000
CHAR= 3008210102 ...
set fb
ENTER CCW LIST IN ENGLISH
def ext
MASK BYTE= cO
PHY.START=
lOG.START=
lOG.. END = 31
locate
OPt BYTE == 06
REPl. CNT=
BLCK. CNT= 32
BL. OFFS.=
. read fb
Dl= 16384
loop 1
go
lOOP IS FINISHED ON UNIT 0240
. seek
CYl= 5
HD= 1
search ha eq
write rO
N 10
SET FilE MASK INSERTED
(Placed before the WRITE RO)
Kl=O
Dl= 100
The above CCW chain is not valid because the write rO
command is. not directly preceded by a SEARCH CCW.
You must specify a Set File Mask before the search ha
command.
EC A20558I
~0~1~O~c_t~8~4~.~______~________~______~~________~
SYS TEST· 040
1984
OOO()OOOOOOOOOOO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1
wr '''8itni d WI' '·hffil!U'I" .,.'"
W1 r
",HM.!!.M"•• m.",w" riLl
.!"
, 'l"OUHN"··Woi"SIIJ!
'(
"
··"rl'D'eM""'WH'IIm!' :Id+±'.!1
."
:-'!
I'N','n',Ju..
,"'+ .........
' .....
1t"Kf·,;,M,NlHMllAylw.yi'Juu.ll......
hlj.,/;,....
·&H
...._'....
·,y!e""'WI4_,.nih...
' .....
tih'....
' 'oII;I'·Mllllliii·.....
·!
/ I . . .". . .. . . .
i. · '.
m ...
,.t",
...
• ....
'''"''''wldl''.......
iu....
,w...
- ,.
·.·N""",-_
..
_
+wiilllj·*""'w.....
"....
• _ _....._
1.<01
• '. . . .
................................· ...
·'~,:_·'11_d=
_ _ _ _ _ _ _........_ _ _~_ __
000000000000000000.000000 000000000
SYS TEST 045
Advanced Capabilities of 4300-FRIEND
Example of a Multiple CCW Chain
Symbolic I/O Areas
Specifying Multiple CCW Chains
This example assumes that you are overlapping a seek
operation on devices 160 and 161.
You can reference the data address specified in one CCW
from another CCW by using 4300-FRIEND. This lets you
first read and then write the same data or vice versa.
Also, by using the same area to read into and write from,
you can conserve storage space.
To enter (and run) mUltiple CCW chains for the same or
different devices, do the following:
1.
Perform steps 1 through 4 in "Specifying a Single
CCW Chain." (After you key GO and press the
ENTER key, the first CCW chain begins to run.)
2.
Press the ENTER key again (while the first CCW
chain is running).
3. When PROCEED appears on line 20, key dev= xxx
(xxx is a device address). You can enter the
previously-specified device address or a different
device address.
4.
Do not key RESET.
5.
Enter the CCW chain to be overlapped.
6.
Key GO.
7.
Repeat steps 2 through 6 to specify another CCW
chain.
DEV= 160
ENTER CCW LIST IN ENGLISH
seek
CYL=O
HD = 1
seek
CYL= 100
HD = 2
go (First CCW chain starts to run)
(Press ENTER)
For disk files, the symbolic I/O area applies only to the
data area of any count-key-data (CKD) or key-data
command. 4300-FRIEND uses data chaining to get the
data field of these commands.
To use symbolic I/O areas:
1.
dev=161
(Enter address for next CCW chain)
seek
CYL= 100
HD = 3
seek
CYL= 200
HD =4
go
(Both CCW chains run)
To change one or more of the CCW chains in a multiple
CCW chain, see "Changing CCW Chains."
Key the normal READ, WRITE, or PRINT commands
followed by a comma and into $x if the command is
an input command, or from $x if the command is an
output command.
x can be any keyboard character, but we recommend
you use characters a to z for easy cross-referencing.
Characters entered in lowercase are converted to
uppercase.
2.
If your data is in character and hex format, use the
CREATE/BUILD command. This command builds a
symbolic output area that can be used by following
write-type CCW commands.
3.
If this is the first time you use a symbolic character,
4300-FRIEND asks for the more information. If you
have already used the symbolic character and have
not issued a RESET command, you are not asked for
the data length or the data field. (The Symbolic
Table generated by 4300-FRIEND contains the
corresponding data address and the implied length of
the data area.)
To get a list of the assigned symbolic names, use the
DUMP$ command.
4381-3
B/M 2676380
.CC>
I
MI
Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
I
DEV= 160
ENTER CCW LIST IN ENGLISH
seek
CYL= 5
HD = 1
set file mask
MASK= cO
search ha eq
tic *-8
write rO,from$a
($a points to data area)
KEY=
DATA= 500xfOfO (1000 bytes of data)
write count key data, from $a
RCD NO.= 1
KEY=
go
Example 2: Using the CREATE / BUILD Command
DEV= 184
create 50,$b
(Creates area $b with length 50)
DATA= x02
DATA= 4cABCDEFGH 1234
DATA= x03
DATA= (Press ENTER to end requests)
write,from$b
read backwards
read into $a
DL= 50
1-compare $a,$b
(Specifies data compare)
go
(Press ENTER)
counter
(Prints loop counter)
01-UNIT=0184, LOOP= 0000000/0001585-A
go
(Restarts operation)
II
PN 6169390
EC A20558I ~C A20560 t
g:::L-.G
;::;.G;;::;.;:;.O:;2,;.5_...&.._.;..1..;;o~f.-;4~_ _-oI_. 01 Oct 84 _ 18 Feb 85 _
L-.:.
S.:.
e
Example 1: Writing Disk Records 0 and 1 from Same
Area
SYS TEST 045
SaxSi: is
&iii'"
I I;;
tJUlPSi
SYS TEST 050
CCW Chain Sequence Control and Delay
Between CCW Chains
The WAIT command causes 4300-FRIENO to wait until a
CCW chain routine completes (device-end interrupt)
before the next chain starts. You usually use the WAIT
command with symbolic I/O areas when you are writing
data that was read by a previous CCW chain. This
ensures that all the data is read before the write CCW is
run. You can also use the WAIT command for a single
CCWchain.
2.
Example 2: Write and Read a Tape Record
Example 1: Record Counter for Tape
Specify the COMPARE command anytime during the entry
of a CCW chain. If you are using symbolic I/O areas, you
must have already defined them. 4300-FRIENO
compares the areas when it completes each CCW chain.
In this example of the COMPARE command, dOOO and
d3e9 are the addresses of the areas you want to
compare. (To obtain the addresses, use the CCW
command.) 1000 is the number of bytes to be
compared in decimal or hex.
DEV= 1S0
write, from $a
DATA= 100c1234567890
(See data pointer address
on the status line or enter
STATUS command .... C= 00A008,
1 0= 00D3ES, 1 I.... ..
To use last 4 bytes of write
data field as counter, subtract
4 from (0) data pointer.)
increase 4,d3e4, 1,0,1
loop 1000
(Writes 1000 records)
go
LOOP IS FINISHED ON UNIT 0180
1-stop
(Stops first CCW chain)
dev'" 180
(New UCB)
rewind
loop 1
go
LOOP IS FINISHED ON UNIT 01S0
rep1
read, into $b
OL= 1000
increase 4,d3e4, 1,0, 1
(Updates old $a area)
compare $a,$b
(Compares record to expected one)
loop 1000
go
Example 1: Write and Read Disk Record Zero
In this example of the COMPARE command, $r and $s
are any previously defined symbolic I/O areas. If you do
not specify a compare length, 4300-FRIEND uses the
length of the operand r for the amount of data to be
compared.
To use WAIT:
1.
Data Compare
Specify WAIT anytime during the entry of the CCW
chain •.
DEV- 161
ENTER CCW LIST IN ENGLISH
seek
CYL- xaO
HD-7
write ha (Writes home address
from seek argument)
SET FILE MASK INSERTED
write rO,from$r
KEY=
DATA= 1S00xfOfO
read rO,into$s
After you key WAIT in the last CCW chain, key GO.
Example 1: Tape to Printer (80/80 List)
DEV- 281
ENTER CCW LIST IN ENGLISH
read,into$a
OL= 80
wait
OEV= e
print,from$a
csw=01
sns=01
wait
go
KL=
DL= 3600
compare $r,$s (Uses length of $r)
go
reset
OEV- 180
ENTER CCW LIST IN ENGLISH
write
DATA- 1000xff
backspace
read
DL- 1000
ccw
(Displays a CCW chain)
1-00AOOO 01 000000 6000 03ES
2-00AOOS 27 00D3ES 6000 0001
3-00A010 02 00D3E9 6000 03ES
compare dOOO,d3e9, 1000
'(Compares data addresses)
go
Increase / Decrease Counter
Use the INCREASE or DECREASE command to increase
or decrease a one- to four-byte field by a specified
amount after each running of the CCW chain. You can
use this function to change seek arguments in the data
field of a CCW chain or to step a hex record counter.
Example 2: Change a Device Address
Example 2: WAIT with Time Delay (Single CCW
Chain)
This example shows how to test a certain range of device
addresses for availability (see also CONFIG command).
reset
OEV= 1S5
ENTER CCW LIST IN ENGLISH
write
DATA= 100xfOfO
wait 500 (Causes delay of 500 ms
after device end before
starting the next write CCW)
DEV= 0
sense device,into$x
list= 1 (Gets UCB address)
01-UNIT= 0000, UCB= 000000, FL=0019
OOAOOO E4 000000 6000 0007
increase 2,dOOOO, 1,xff,0
(Changes device address from
X'OOO' to X'OFF')
data dump$x, *
(Dumps result of sense I/O)
go
go
I
I,'
II
I·,:
1,1
Ii
i'll
d
i':1
IIIII
4381-3
B/M 2676380
I
MI
Seg GG025
I
PN 6169390
2 of 4
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
EC A20560
18 Feb 85
SYS TEST 050
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
....
__..---_.-
1
44 1
:
I
.'
I
,t
II"!
' r
, : :"
5
:!:r '"
"d6H!tItbt!l.
tt
:'UM ,,: , 'f'
t
It'
:"
' : , . ,.
"Ii • .,'·, ,: ,,,. "'Md••
'.!.",," .... ·,, ".,!Wl;\",!lM,@'"W'"t!'1lMt"h'iL'd:I!\J!.#,
\1,'1"' JOWl
"btl" , !!W' *1
'!!!'I"'!f)[!'HM"Wh"""
1!j.t!,J'j'ldtlN,·w¥lUW'"@,v)ltj'K'tMt'"VWltlY"'''W'
!r""If""I!!!:
"'".r:!!"fK'
!!bH'*iiH+w"
'IIIII'"!!"!',
".r'l!"lrrur,'w
.
."' ,t",'
M'M If. 9 "ITlr1[IJIIlL1'.Wnre'IdIftJ''''fl'lm'MIHIW!'"'!iUM4giYfi'WWWiw, ..........P,;,.
'tbJ
±
5gu
0000000000000000000000000 00000.000
SYS TEST 055
Data Ripple/Random
Predefined CCW Chains
Example 1: Load 1403/3203 with PCS-AN Image
RIPPLE and RANDOM are CCW command modifiers that
you can specify with a CCW command. If you specify
RIPPLE or RANDOM, 4300-FRIEND searches for all
CCWs to be rippled or randomized in the CCW chain and
either ripples (moves the data pattern one byte to the left)
or generates a random data pattern at each completion of
the CCW chain. Random data is generated four bytes at
a time. and data is rippled in blocks of 256 bytes.
SEARCH, WRITE HA, and the count field of WRITE
COUNT KEY DATA CCWs are bypassed.
Specify $$xxx to use the predefined CCW chains (and
data strings) provided by 4300-FRIEND. To display the
available CCW chains, key $$?
DEV= OOe
$$010
(Loads 4 UCS images
into symbolic area)
$$004
(Loads UCS buffer with peS-AN image)
go
LOOP IS FINISHED ON UNIT OOOE
Restrictions: Do not use RIPPLE or RANDOM with
indirect data addressing (IDA) or with WRITE SPECIAL
COUNT KEY DATA CCWs.
Example 1: Write Random Data on Disk
DEV= 161
ENTER CCW LIST IN ENGLISH
seek
CYL= 5
HD = 1
set mask
MASK= cO
write ha
write rO,random
KEY=
DATA= 3600xff (Data used for first
. record and establishes data length)
read ha (Verifies home address)
read rO (Verifies record zero written)
KL= 0
DL= 3600
go
Example 2: Ripple Data on Printer
reset
DEV= e
ENTER CCW LIST IN ENGLISH
space 1 ,ripple
DATA= 4cABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
csw=0100
loop
NUMBER OF TIMES= 500
go
You may need to specify a RESET command or the device
address (DEV=cuu) before using a predefined CCW chain.
In some cases, the device address is fixed, and you must
change it with the n-DEV=cuu or SUBcuu,nnn command.
The predefined chains are;
$$001 Card to Printer (OOC/OOE)
$$002 Sets Tape to 1600 BPi (181) and Copies Tape
to Tape (180/181)
$$010 Defines four UCS images for symbolic data
areas $A, $H, $1, and $2. $A = AN-train, $H
= HN-train, $1 = PCS-AN train, $2 = PCS-HN
train. (Use Examples 1 and 2 below as a guide
in the use of $$010.)
$$101 3287 Ripple Print 1 (specify DEV= ... before).
$$102 3287 Ripple Print 2 (specify DEV= ... before).
$$103 3287 Color Print (specify DEV= ... before),
$$104 3287 Color Print of programmed symbols
(specify DEV= ... before).
$$110 327x Display/read (specify DEV= ... before).
Two SIOs are used with increments on the
screen buffer addresses, and the read data is
compared.
$$111 3278 Display/read (specify DEV= ... before).
Same as 110, but with a single SIO.
$$119 327x Display with Increment (specify DEV= ...
before).
$$5nn Type RESET before $$50n commands, and
specify the device address DEV=.,.
$$500 3310 - CE Track Initialization
$$501 3310 - Read FB with Increment
$$510 3370 - CE Track Initialization
$$511 3370 - Read FB with Increment
$$520 3370 - Verify CE Track
$$521 3370 - Repair
Note: The 3262 Models 3 and 13 also run the 3287
CCW chains.
4381-3
81M 2676380
I~~g
C> Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GG025
Example 2: Load 1403/3203 with AN. HN. or
PCS-HN Image
DEV= OOe
$$010
gtld (Needed for 1403 only)
load ucs,from $x
(x is either A (AN),
H (HN). or 2 (PCS-HN))
loop 1
go
LOOP IS FINISHED ON UNIT OOOE
Example 3: Ripple Print Using the AN Image
This example assumes that you have loaded the UCS
buffer with the AN image (see Example 2 above).
DEV= 2e
$$010
(Gets train data images)
print, from$a, ripple
(Ripples AN-train image)
csw=01
(Masks unit exception)
sns=O 1
(Masks sense X'O 1')
loop 100 (Do 100 times)
go
LOOP IS FINISHED ON UNIT 002E
Storage Protection Key Modification
Use the KEY CAW. KEY CCW, KEY DATA, KEY IDA,
DUMP KEY, and ALTER KEY commands to display or
modify the storage keys of the different storage areas
used for CCW chains. Initially, and after a RESET
command, all areas are storage protected with key one
(1). The current assignments are displayed on line 20 or
after the STATUS command.
You can dump or !3lter the storage keys of any area with
the DUMP KEY or ALTER KEY commands. You can alter
the special areas for CCWs, data, and IDAW with the
KEY CCW= , KEY DATA= , or KEY IDA= commands.
You can display for each CCW chain the key used for the
CAW with
the CCW= or LIST = commands in the third flag digit; you
can alter it with the nn-KEY CAW= command.
Trace Function
Use the TRACE command to make a trace table in
storage of all SIOs issued for, and all interrupts received
from, the test devices during the running of the CCW
chains. You can use the TRACE command instead of the
GO command. If you specify the TRACE, * command, all
SIOs, TIOs, and HIOs are traced, including those for the
operator console and the secondary printer. You can
restrict the trace to one device by specifying a device
address with the TRACE command. The trace table start
address is stored at location X'040C'; the current trace
table pointer is stored at address X'04l4'. Use the
DUMP function after the trace loop is finished (or the
running is stopped).
Example:
dump12,40c
00040C 000D2000000D3F70 000D28FO
The trace function stores trace information in l6-byte
records.
The CPU timer value stored in the trace entry represents
bytes 3 to 5 of the doubleword binary counter. The last
digit of the stored value is decremented every 16
microseconds.
The one-byte repetition counter is incremented if identical
trace entries (except the time value) are stored in
sequence. The first entry is stored and all others are
ignored.
An entry of 16 bytes containing all X'FF' indicates the
end of the current trace area. If the trace reaches the last
trace area entry, the trace again uses the first entry and
all following. You can display the last trace entries or the
complete trace table with the DUMP command; for
example, DUMP x300,d20eO. The DUMPT command
automatically displays the last trace entries (up to a
maximum of 36).
Because the same storage area is used for predefined
chains, these chains (command $$nnn) are destroyed
after a trace run as well as the HELP command text.
SYS TEST 055
SYS TEST 060
Special Storage Areas
X'0300'
Special TIO/SIO loop area.
X'0400'
Four-byte data area address (standard
X'DOOO'). This address should point behind
all other FRIEND areas because FRIEND uses
the data space up to the end of the storage.
X'0404'
Four-byte CCW area address (standard
X'AOO,O' must start on double word
boundary).
X'040B'
To change where 4300-FRIEND locates the data area,
the CCW area, or the IDA area, use the following patch
(REP) card before the END (Jast) card, or alter the storage
areas after 4300-FRIEND is loaded by the ALTER
command. Note that CCWs start on doubleword
boundaries and IDAWs on word boundaries; these areas
must not overlap. Assign the data area to the last part of
the storage.
Unit Control Siock fUCS)
For each CCW chain that is made, 4300-FRIEND uses a
special control block celled a UCB. The address of each
can be displayed by the CCW= or LIST= commands.
The length of one UCB entry is 4B bytes.
uce
Patch Card Format
column
1234 7
Four-byte IDA area address (standard
,X'9F80' must start on word boundary).
X'040C'
Four-byte trace area start address (standard
X'4FFF' before storage end).
X'04 10'
Four-byte trace area end address (standard
X'2FFF' before storage end).
X'0414'
Four-byte current trace entry pointer.
X'0418'
Four-byte sddress of first unit control block
(UCB).
X'04 1C'
Two-byte internal program version/level
(xxyy).
X'041 E'
Two-byte secondary output station (printer)
address.
X'0402'
Two-byte keyboard device address.
X'0422'
Two-byte printer device address (for internal
use).
X'0424'
Two-byte current test device unit address
used for TIO.
X'0426'
Two-byte last test device used unit address
used for HIO after 2x external interrupt (lNT
command).
X'044C'
Control indicator byte (lNOBYTE)
17
&REP 000400
XXXX,XXXX
(XXXXXXXX is the address of the
new data area)
2
9
Byte
Deci
Size
Hex
00
02
00
02
2
2
04
08
10
12
16
04
08
OA
OC
10
4
2
2
4
4
20
24
28
30
32
36
40
42
44
14
18
1C
1E
20
24
28
2A
2C
4
4
2
2
4
4
2
2
4
ALTER command example:
DEV-DEVICE ADDRESS=(Any
device address)
alter 8,400,xxxxxx (xxxxxx is address
of new data area)
0003t8 ................ xxxxxxxx
(Altered storage is displayed)
reset
(Activates changes)
OEV=
Contents
Device address
Chain flags:
8000 Wait
4000 Compare
2000 Increase/decrease
1000 Ripple/random/zero (plus
indicator In CCW byte 5)
0800 Data dump
0400 Data dump on operator console
0200 Continue if loop is flnished
0100 FB device
OOxO CAW key
0008 UCB is used
0004 Device or control unit is busy
0002 Chain being executed
0001 Device ready (active)
CCW pointer = address of first CCW
CSW mask bytes set by CSW=command
Sense bytes mask set by SENSE= command
Time delay set by WAIT command
Time out counter for missing device end
(TIME DELAY)
Operand one address of COMPARE
Operand two address of COMPARE
Length of compare fie1ds
Length for DATA DUMP function
Address for DATA DUMP function
Address of the INCREASE/DECREASE tab1e
Loop count; set by LOOP cmd (threshold)
Number of SI05 run
Not used
x
'0 l' = 3277 -type console
X'10' = EC mode.
X'044F'
SP console control byte X'01' = SP console
unit control block area; storage end =
X'6FFF'.
4381-3
B/M 2676380
I
MI
Seq GG025
«> Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
I
PN 6169390
4 of 4
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
EC A20560
18 Feb 85
SYS TEST 060
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
I
1M!
,I",""'IU
JI'.ukie!,yll.',
lNJ!++mU,,!"!'"
t
.,/110"), J,W'
.+
" 1 ' ....;/• ••... ·'Y·. . . . t"·'NS,,,·,!t""·:
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
SYS TEST 065
Information Requested by
4300-FRIEND
Listed below are the 4300-FRIEND requests and your
replies to them. Enter decimal data with no separation;,
that is, 123456 (not 123,456 or 123 456). Enter an x
before the hex data; for example, x60. If you enter
wrong information, 4300-FRIEND asks you to try again.
CMD=
Example of DA T A=
Specify a 3277 command.
DATA=
DATA=
DATA=
DATA=
DATA=
DATA=
DATA=
'EM'
'EU'
'FF'
'IC'
'MF'
'NL'
'PT'
'RA'
If a program loop occurs, enter the character i or perform
a program (PSW) restart.
'SA'
ADR=
Specify (in hex) a two-byte 3277 buffer address.
'S8'
'SF'
'SX'
ATT=
'.'
Specify (in hex) a one-byte 3277 attribute character. The
default is x60.
CYL=
End of message - for printer
Erase unprotected + address
Forms feed - for printer
Insert cursor
Modify field + attribute character
New line - for printer
Program tabulator
Repeat to address + address and fill character
Set attribute + attribute character
Set buffer address + address
Start field + attribute character
Start,field extended + attribute character
ENTER = no command
End of data stream (no code generated)
BBCCHH=
Specify (in decimal or hex) a cylinder number for a seek
command. The default is O.
Specify (in hex) a six-byte 2321 seek argument.
DATA=
100xff
1000xfOfO
SOcl
12cabc
12cABC
12cAaB
Press ENTER
DL=
(100 bytes of X'FF')
(1000 groups of X'FOFO')
(80 bytes of X'Fl')
(12 groups of X'S18283')
(12 groups of X'C1C2C3')
(12 groups of X'C181C2')
(after all data is entered)
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
Function/Range (hex)
-/00
Cell/OO-09
Subcell/00-13
Strip/00-09
Head position/00-04
Head number/00-13
Specify data. 4300-FRIEND repeats the DATA= request
until no more data is entered. (You can specify both hex
and decimal data for one symbolic data area by using the
CREATE/BUILD command.)
BL.OFFS.=
nn
is an optional decimal duplication factor.
x
indicates hex data.
hhhhh
is the hex data.
BLCK.CNT=
c
indicates EBCDIC data.
Specify a block count value for the LOCATE fixed block
command. Enter either a decimal value (1 to 65535) or a
hex value (x 1 to xffff). The default value is 1.
ddddd
is the EBCDIC data (up to 242 characters).
4300-FRIEND does not convert lowercase
characters to uppercase.
Specify a block offset value for the LOCATE fixed block
command. Enter either a decimal value (0 to
4294967295) or a hex value (xO to xffffffff). The default
value is O.
.
4381
B/M 2676380
I~~g
GG030
I
PN 6169391
.10f5
II
.
EC A20558
If the device did not respond to the Sense 10 command,
4300-FRIEND requests the printer device type for the
UCSB load.
ENTER TIME hh:mm:ss=
(appears first time only)
DEV-
Enter the current time of day. The default time-of-day is
zero.
(all other times)
HARD COpy (Y IN)=
Specify a device address in hex. Leading zeros are not
required. If you do not specify a device address,
4300-FRIEND uses the last entered device address or
enters the command input mode ,if you didn't specify a
device address before. For more details, see the
"DEVICE=" command.
Specify Y for· a copy of all console messages; press the
ENTER key if you do not want a copy (4300-FRIEND
defaults to the N reply).
Specify the device address of the new operator console or
the address of the secondary output station, the printer.
If the secondary output station address is set to zero, the
secondary printer function is not active.
Specify the data in one of the following formats:
nnxhhhhh or nncddddd
ENTER DEVICE TYPE (32xx)=
DEV ... DEVICE ADDRESS==
DEV.ADDR=
o
Specify the data length; either a decimal (1 to 32767) or
hex (x0001 to x7ffff) value. The default value is 1.
DEV.TYPE
Specify the type of new console.
1052
327x
PRT
SP
TP
1052-type console
327x-type console
Secondary output printer, which must accept a
X'Og' print command. The PRT function is not
used for a 1052 and SP console.
System console with X'83' op code enabled.
Terminal printer as secondary output required.
HD=
Specify (in decimal or hex) a head number. The default is
head O.
IDAWS IN HEX=
Specify the real storage addresses for the IDA address list
(lDAWs). Enter as many addresses as required,
separated by commas (leading zeros are not required).
Do not use storage range X'OOOO' to X'AOOO' (the
4300-FRIEND program resides there). If data is
requested for the CCW, 4300-FRIEND automatically
moves the data to the specified real storage area(s).
KEY=
Specify the key for the data field. Enter the data as
shown for DATA=.
I
L_~0~1~O~ct~8~4~~.________~~________~________~________~
SYS TEST 065
CI Copyright IBM Corp, '984
Ai
:AIM i!Ii
Ii! i i i
$4# a:
! IS 2!iilllliil2i!Jii!iiiililiii 1III¥4#i242iiliilllll:
~;
;
SYSTEST 070
KL=
MLCCCBBCCHHRDDS=
NUMBER OF TlMES=
SELECT UCS-TYPE (xx,xx,xx.xx)
Specify the key length. Enter either a decimal (0 to 255)
or hex (xOO to xff) value. The default value is O.
Specify (in hex) 15 bytes of buffer control information for
the buffer control record· (this is the record transferred to
the 2314 on an INIT BUF command).
Specify the number of times you want to run the last
entered CCW chain or the CCW chain specified in the
LOOP command. Enter 1 to 32767 in decimal.
Select a UCS buffer type from a displayed menu.
M
L
OP. BYTE=
Specify (in decimal) the third defect skip displacement for
the 3340/3350 home address.
THIRD SD=
LOG. END=
Specify the logical end for the DEFINE EXTENT fixed
block command. Enter a decimal vaJue(up to
4294967295) or a hex value (up to xffffffff). The default
is the value read by the READ DEVICE CHAR fixed block
command.
Mode byte; 81 (needs write buffer) or 01
Length byte; 60
Command 1 (00, 07, 13)
Command 2 (29, 31, 69, A9, E9)
Command 3 (05,06,00, OE, 16, 1A, 35,
3D)
Seek argument
Record number
Data length
Search key length
CCC
BBCCHH
R
LOG.START=
DO
Specify the logical start for the DEFINE EXTENT fixed
block command. Enter a decimal value (up to
4294967295) or a hex value (up to xffffffff). The default
value is O.
MASK=
Specify (in hex) a one-byte file mask for the SET FILE
MASK command (for example, MASK=: 18). The default
is X'CO' (press the ENTER key).
MASK. BYTE=
Specify (in hex) a one-byte mask for the DEFINE EXTENT
fixed block command. If you do not provide a mask, the
default mask for the first 12 bytes of the data area is
X'OO'. 4300-FRIEND sets the last four bytes in the data
area to the value read by the READ DEVICE CHAR
command (logical end).
S
Example:
Specify (in hex) the operation byte for the LOCATE fixed
block command. The default is X·06·.
PHY.START=
Specify the physical start for the DEFINE EXTENT fixed
block command. Enter a decimal (up to 4294967295) or
hex value (up to xffffffff). The default is O.
Reo NO.=:
INIT BUF
MLCCCBBCCHHRDDS= 816d0731350
00000c3000101005000
WRITE BUF
DATA= 40XfOfO
MODE (BC/EC)=
Specify the control mode;BC for Basic Control mode or
EC for Extended Control mode. The default is EC.
MODECMDSpecify (in hex) a MODE SET command code. The
default is x93(7-track tape/800 bpi).
Specify the record number to be used in the file identifier
field. Enter a decimal (0 to 255) or hex value (xOO to
xff).
WCC=
Specify (in hex) the 3277 write control character. The
default is X·C3'.
XATT
Enter 327x extended data stream attribute TYPE/VALUE
pair as four hex digits. If commands START FIELD
EXTENDED or MODIFY FIELD were specified, you can
enter more than one attribute pair. To end the sequence,
enter •*'. If you press the ENTER key only, value
X'C040' is entered and the sequence ends.
REPl. CNT=
Specify the replication count for the LOCATE fixed block
command. Enter a decimal (0 to 255) or hex value (xOO
to xff). The default is O.
so=
Specify (in decimal) the defect skip displacement for the
3340/3350 home address.
SEC. PRINTER ADDRESS ...
IVIODEL=
Specify 81 .for the processor model. This chooses the
proper time calculation for the WAIT and TIME DELAY
commands.
Specify either the device address of the secondary output
printer on which a hard copy of all operator messages are
to be printed or UCSB which invokes the UCBS load
routine to load a UCS buffer. You can enter the optional
LOG operand after the printer address; for example,
OE,LOG. This causes the call of the PRINT LOG function.
If you want to modify the secondary printer address later,
use the CHANGE KEYBOARD command.
SECOND SO=
Specify (in decimal) the second defect skip displacement
for the 3340/3350 home address.
I"
I:i
I;i
I
Ii'
I
II,'
I
4381
81M 2676380
o Ccpyright IBM Corp.
JMI
l.!.!s1
1984
II
GG030
PN 6169391
20f5
I
EC A20668 ·1
_._0_1_0~~~8_4~~.
·1
________~.________~________~________- d
SYS TEST 070
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0-·000- 0 0-0 0 0
t,_ ,
¢*11
""'1'
I
$
ft rt rtt
:10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
/»
'!;
)J
SYS TEST 075
4300-FRIEND Messages
If a message starts with *, 4300-FRIEND waits before
displaying the message so you can use the ENTER key to
stop the processing. Status information is displayed as
follows (the current UCB is displayed together with area
pointers):
aa nn-ccuu-ff C=xx,kf D=xx,kf I=xx,kf mm
•
•
nn = Chain number
COND CODE= n ON UNIT xxxx
HALT
•
ccuu
Displayed after 4300-FRIEND detects a condition that
requires a program halt. To continue, specify GO.
•
ff = Flag bytes
Displays condition code n for device xxxx after an XTIO,
XCLRIO, XHIO, XHDV, XTCH, or XSTIDC command. This
message is also displayed to indicate the status of the
Test I/O.
•
C=xx
•
k = Area key
•
f = Fetch protection on if F
Condition code 0 indicates that device xxxx is ready and
available. Condition code 2 indicates that the channel or
subchannel to which the device is attached is busy.
Condition code 3 indicates that the address is not
recognized by a channel or any device on the channel. To
enter commands, press the ENTER key and enter
NOTEST. If SCOPE is active, 4300-FRIEND requires a
PSW restart to exit from the scope loop.
Indicates that an error occurred during the running of a
CCW chain. It also indicates a unit check or a permanent
CU-busy condition at the device used for the START
READER command.
=
=
Unit address
aa indicates the following:
COMMAND
Keya 4300-FRIEND command.
REPLACE
Keya replacement CCW
command.
RESPOND
Key requested information.
RUNNING
4300-FRIEND is running CCW
chain(sL If stop address
X'ODEADO' is displayed,
4300-FRIEND is waiting for an
I/O interrupt from a device being
tested. You can enter
4300-FRIEND commands during
this mode without stopping the
processing.
TRACING
4300-FRIE'ND is tracing CCW
chain(s) as they run.
SCOPING
4300-FRIEND is looping on a SIO
or TIO command.
D=xx = Data area address
•
I=xx = IDA area address
•
mm = Block multiplexer mode (BMPX) or selector
mode (SEll.
Status and Operator Messages
$x aaaaaa 1111·
Appears after the DUMP$ command. x = the symbolic
I/O area name; aaaaaa = address (in hex) of the area; 1111 =
length (in hex) of the area.
aaaaaa
K=k,F=f.R=r.C"'c
Displays the storage protection keys of a 2K storage area.
Address aaaaaa is the first byte of the area; k '" storage
key in hex; f = fetch protection on if 1; r = reference bit
on if 1; c = change bit on if 1.
CHAR= xxx •••
4300-FRIEND is repeating a TID
command.
TIOLOOP
PRINT LOG function; copies the
screen to a printer.
PRNTLOG
4300-FRIEND commands are
running; no action is required.
WORKING
4381
B/M 2676380
I~~g
~ Copyright 113M C()(p. 19134
HALT ON ERROR
CCW area address
Displays the data received for a READ DEVICE CHAR
fixed block command.
COND CODE= 1 ON UNIT xxxx
CSW yy yy ... yy yy
SNS zzzzzzzzzZ.zzzzzzzz
Displays the condition code, CSW, and sense bytes for
device xxxx after an XTIO, XCLRIO, XHIO, XHDV, XTCH,
or XSTIDC command.
This message is also displayed to indicate the status of
the TEST I/O. Condition code 1 indicates that the CSW
was stored.
EC-MODE SET. NO RESET POSSIBLE
Indicates that the Extended Control mode was set, and
return to Basic Control Mode is not possible unless you
re-IPL 4300-FRIEND.
ENTER CCW LIST IN ENGLISH
Displayed after you enter reply to DEV= at the beginning
of a new CCW chain.
EXT -INTRPT BROKE CHAIN
Indicates that the INT feature was active and that the
second external interrupt stopped 4300-FRIEND. The
TIO mode is reset.
10 = xxxx ...
Displays the ID of the processor.
1/0= cccctf-ddddtt
Displays bytes two to seven of the Sense I/O command
for the new device specified. This message does not
appear if the Sense I/O command is not supported by the
device (first byte is not X'FF').
LOOP IS FINISHED ON UNIT xxxx
Displayed if the CCW chain of unit xxxx has run the
number of times specified by the LOOP command. The
running of all active CCW chains is discontinued after
waiting for outstanding I/O interrupts. If busy devices do
not present their interrupt in the time specified by the
TIME DELAY command, a Halt I/O is issued.
nn*UNIT=ccuu, LOOP=xxx/yyy - I
Appears after the COU NTER command. nn = CCW chain
number; ccuu = unit address; xxx = loop threshold; yyy =
SID counter. I = active/stopped line indication.
nn*UNIT=ccuu. UCB=aaaaaa. FL=cccc
Indicates the UCB entry if you specified the CCW= or
LIST:::. nn = CCW chain number; ccuu ::: unit address;
aaaaaa = address of 34-byte long UCB entry; ecce =
active UCB flags.
GG030
SYS TEST 075
~------'-
..-..-.. ..
~
,.~-.~
SYS TEST 080
n'n-ccuu-ff C"'xxx,kf D*'yyy,kf I-zzz,kf mmm
UCSB LOAD SUCCESSFUL FINISHED
EXT-INTRPT, PSW - xxx/yyy E
PGM-INTRPT, psw ... xxx / yyy E
Appears after the STATUS command. The current UCB is
displayed together with area pointers. nn = CCW chain
number; ccuu = unit address; ff =: flag bytes; xxx = CCW
area address; k ... area key; f .,. fetch protection if F; yyy .,.
data area address; zzz = IDA area address; C= CCW area;
0= data area; 1= IDA area; mmm - block multiplexer
mode if BMPX or selector mode if SEL.
The UCS buffer load was successful.
4300-FRIEND detected an unexpected external interrupt.
xxx is the old PSW for the interrupt.
4300-FRIEND detected an unexpected program interrupt.
xxx is the old PSW for the interrupt.
E at the end of the message indicates an EC mode
interrupt. In this case, yyy is the interruption code.
E at the end of the message indicates an EC mode
interrupt. In this case, yyy is the interrupt code.
-IOAW POINTS TO PROGRAM AREA
If PGM interrupts start to be displayed, do a PSW restart.
If this does not help, reload 4300-FRIEND. For the
DUMP, DISPLAY, or ALTER commands, this error can
occur if the specified address is out of storage or the page
is disconnected in VSE mode.
UNIT'=xxxx - COUNT=nnn
Indicates a DATA DUMP print out. xxxx
nnn = SIO counter.
= unit address.,
WAIT UP TO 5 SECONDS UNTIL LOAD IS FINISHED
PRINTER NOT READY
Indicates that the UCS buffer load is in process.
Displayed if the secondary printer is not available or not
ready. Make the printer ready or correct the device
address.
4300-FRIEND STANDARD OPTION SET
SET FILE MASK INSERTED
Indicates that you did not specify a SET FILE MASK
command. Therefore, 4300-FRIEND automatically
inserted a Set File Mask CCW preceding the last CCW
entered. Because the CCW chain being generated
requires a set file mask if you specify a WRITE HA (home
address) or WRITE RO (record zero) command, a not valid
CCW chain may result.
Displays all the standard options of 4300-FRIEND set
during program initialization. If you want to change
options, use the BMPX, NO BMPX, TIME DELAY nn,
HALT, ALARM, or NO INT commands.
Error Messages
I/O-INTRPT, PSW
Indicates that a working device did not issue an I/O
interrupt within 15 seconds.
Displayed after you start running the CCW chain by
pressing the ENTER key without input GO.
PRINTER NOT READY
-INVALID MODEL, USE 31-41-81 OR 11 5-1 68 OR
25-75
DEVICE END OR OTHER I/O INTERRUPT MISSING
START
Indicates that one of the specified IDA addresses points
inside the 4300-FRIEND program. 4300-FRIEND
ignores all entered IDAWs and repeats the request for
IDAWs.
CC=O was not received from the printer during the UCSB
load.
Indicates that you specified the wrong model.
SVC-INTRPT, PSW
= xxx/yyy
E
= xxx/yyy E
4300-FRIEND detected an unexpected input/output
interrupt (usually from other devices becoming ready).
xxx is the old PSW for the interrupt. The CSW and sense
data are also displayed.
DEVICE NOT AVAILABLE. CC=3
E at the end of the message indicates an EC mode
interrupt. In this case, yyy is the interruption code.
Indicates that the specified printer is not operational.
MCK-INTRPT, PSW = xxx/yyy E
-DEVICE QUEUE FULL, LAST CMD IGNORED
4300-FRIEND detected an unexpected machine check
interrupt. The log out area is saved so that it can be
displayed by the DUMP command. xxx is the old PSW
for the interrupt.
4300-FRIEND detected an unexpected supervisor call
(SVC) interrupt. xxx is the old PSW for the interrupt.
E at the end of the message indicates an EC mode
interrupt. In this case, yyy is the interrupt code.
-SYMBOL TABLE FULL, LAST CMD IGNORED
You tried to enter more than 40 symbolic characters. To
clear the symbol table, key CLEAR$.
STORAGE SIZE= xxxxxx
Displays (in hex) the storage size of the system.
You have tried to enter more than 99 devices' into the
device queue. Enter RESET to clear the device queue,
and start again.
TIC *-8 INSERTED
Indicates that you did not specify a TIC. Therefore,
4300-FRIEND automatically inserted a TIC *-8 CCW
before the last CCW entered. Because the CCW chain
being generated requires a TIC if you specify a Search
CCW command, a not valid CCW chain may result.
-ENTER
E at the end of the message indicates an EC mode
interrupt. In this case, yyy is the interrupt code.
"DEV=" OR "ADD" BEFORE CCW- You entered a CCW
command with an incorrect UCB (device) assignment.
NO UCS SUPPORT FOR THIS DEVICE
ERROR DURING UCSB LOAD
The specified printer is not a 3203, 321", 3262, or
3289 device.
rMI
l§!.9.
GG030
PN 6169391
4of5
Displayed for misspelled statements or information,
invalid or wrong number of characters. undefined CCWs.
missing delimiter (cammal. unknown verbs, etc. Key?
and correct the error.
".
-SYNTAX ERROR- ON INPUT
Indicates that an error was detected in the CSW during
the UCSB load.
4381
B/M 2676380
-SYNT AX ERROR-
EC A20558
4300-FRIEND detected an error in the information
entered for a DATA=, KEY=, or 88CCHH= request.
Possible data field errors are missing x or c (indicates type
of data) or no data after x or c. Enter? and correct the
error.
I
~0~1_0~c~t~8~4~~.________.....~__________~__________~____________~
SYS TEST 080
C Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000
.='~'_:"_•. '.'''' ••~'''.''''''''''.' ..~_
__~=-=:-~....,...~=_...,..-o_-_-::~.":--~~--_--
't'!IN '1!"""K'"lIu".Ir,W.'H
"M'Nt "ty'tlttr'Ttrt",ut:ft'W1l!!tD'Mr",wR't"rr"u" 'rib'
ft'W'Hili'!f
'" T tl'H
",1,1 ,
,
IfIHdUNI#&
UWUMI\',!/ft!"fwe
Wnt±t'tI!t'U,,!I
,I
t
ltit
W
ttl
' " ,
;'MN
. "ttt,
DOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SYS TEST 085
·UNIT==xxxx -INCORRECT CSW
CSW YVY
LOOP nnn
-UNDEFINED SYMBOL(S)
4300-FRIEND detected a symbol that was not previously
defined. You cannot COMPARE or DUMP from a
symbolic I/O" area unless it has already been defined by a
BUILD or CREATE command or the FROM or INTO CCW
command modifier.
Indicates any unusual status; for example, attention, unit
exception, and any channel status in the CSW.
·UNIT=xxxx -I/O INTRPT,UNIT CHECK
CSW 00 00D4EO OE 00 0000
SNS 1 00020C800 0000000000 •..
LOOP 00662
·UNIT=xxxx - CC=1 AFTER SIO
CSWyyy
SNS zzz
LOOP nnn
Indicates that 4300-FRIEND received an I/O interrupt,
and unit check is on in the CSW. 4300-FRIEND displays
the device _address that gave the unit check, the actual
CSW,and the sense bytes received from the device. If
the message ERROR ON SENSE is displayed in front of
the sense data, the SID sense ended with an not valid
status.
Indicates that the Start I/O command is not accepted
(condition code == 1). The CSW device status is not
control unit busy or device busy or not a single channel
end or device end/channel end (immediate commands).
Check that the device is ready and online. LOOP counter
nnn is not incremented and indicates the number of
successfully initiated I/O operations.
,,-
·UNIT=xxxx - NO DEV-END OR CU-END I/O INTRPT
·UNIT=xxxx - CC=3 AFTER SIO
LOOP nnn
Indicates that 4300-FRIEND did not receive a device end
or control uriit end within five to ten seconds after
starting a CCW chain or receiving a control unit busy.
The delay time depends on the number of devices
running.
Indicates that the Start I/O command is not accepted
(condition code = 3). LOOP counter nnn is not
incremented.
·UNIT==xxxx - DATA COMPARE ERROR
BYTE NO.==aaaa $X=bb $V=cc
'(one entry for each byte
, that failed to compare)
LOOP nnn
Indicate~
xxxx
nnn
aaaa
X
Y
bb
cc
a data compare error.
Device address.
Loop number that failed.
Relative byte number of the two areas compared
(first byte == 1).
Represents the first area and is a symbolic
character if symbolic I/O areas were used
(otherwise == 1).
Represents the second area (= 2, if no symbolic
area).
Represents the hex byte in the first area.
Represents the hex byte in the second area.
4381
B/M 2676380
C)
You can change the time delay with the TIME DELAY
command. If a timeout occurs, 4300-FRIEND issues a
HALT I/O to reset the device and then waits another time
period for a device interrupt from the HALT I/O.
I~~g
Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GG030
I
PN 6169391
.50f5
II
.
EC A20558
I
~.~0~1~O~c~t~8~4~•.________~~________~________~________~
SYS TEST 085
us :iE:as:aasaiZ:ii":d1a::m :: :
oasu:::,
0000000000000000000000000000000000
'Iopt '"' "'
,f'
III'"H
b'J"
"fl[,
H' f'~' ',,!!Wflltll.H,tti'YI'!'I'f'II"UC"flet'
\
",rl 'Uf'tHt""HHtH·="'W.,:"y.,··e."yUI=I'\ij"'W'no'..."puI'
'''/'.WJi!pI''I'_~''' b"W!II!!! I"w"" 'L""'i"'I'11i!
IEdt!
0000000000000000000000000 000008000
SYS TEST 095
4300-FRIEND Commands
ADD·
BTS
In general,4300-FRIEND ignores all vowels, blanks,
periods, and asterisks input except in data. You can use
a comma to separate a parameter from the command.
Use this command to add a CCW to the last CCW chain
entered. (4300-FRIEND turns on the command chain bit
in the preceding CCW.) For an existing CCW chain,
additional CCWs can be added by using the nn-ADD
command (see "Modifying· Existing CCW Chains' ').
Branch to TIO/SIO loop
For syntax errors or to repeat the previous input, enter a
question mark (1).
If storage addresses are entered for a command, they
must be entered in hex. Other numeric data (for example,
data length) can be entered in either decimal or hex (an x
must precede the hex value).
ALARM
Use this command to sound an audible alarm after a
message appears that requires operator action.
To reset ALARM, see the "NO ALARM" command.
The first line of the commands shows the primary form of
the commands; accepted alternate forms are listed after
the primary form.
SS7
Use this command to display the first 79 source
characters of all predefined CCW chains.
SSnnn,*
Use this command to display the source of predefined
CCW chain nnn.
S*=hh
Use this command to assign two hex digits (hh) for the
characters $ and *. The characters $ and * in hex input
fields are replaced by the digits assigned. The default
value is X'FF'.
ALTER KEY nnn,addr,k,f
ALTER KEY nnn,Se,k,f
ALTER KEY Se,k.f
Use this command to alter the storage key for storage
area addr or symbolic I/O area $c (c can be any
alphabetic character) to the key specified by k. This
command also sets fetch protection on if you specify an f
as the last operand. The length is nnn bytes.
ALTER nnn.addr,hhhh
ALTER nnn,Sc.hhhh
ALTER Se,hhhh
Use this command to alter up to 80 bytes at address
addr or symbolic I/O area $c (c can be any alphabetic
character). Data hhhh is moved to storage. The length
nnn of the area to be altered can be specified in decimal
or hex. After the alter operation, the changed data is
dumped (this includes the preceding and following eight
bytes).
7 or 11
BMPX
Use this command (1) to display (and modify) the last
input entered on a 3277-type console (up to 30 bytes).
If you specify two question marks (11), the next to last
input is displayed.
nn-ACTIVATE, •
nn-ACT
Use this command to loop (using a small TIO/SIO loop at
address X'300') the last CCW chain entered. Stop the
loop by pressing the external interrupt button twice if I NT
is active. If INT is not active, do a PSW restart.
Enable block multiplexer mode
Use this command to set block multiplexer mode on
(standard if you specify EC mode).
To disable block multiplexer mode, see the "NO BMPX"
command.
BUILD nnn,Sc
BLD nml,Se
CREA TE nnn.Se
CRT nnn,Se
Use this command to reserve a symbolic data area $c (c
represents any alphabetic character). You can specify the
length nnn of the area in decimal or hex. If you specify
length zero (0), a data area with length one is created and
no data is requested (pointer). The created data area can
be used in all following CCWs until you specify the RESET
command. (Enter data in response to message DATA....
4300-FRIE NO repeats the DATA= request until you enter
no more data or the length count decrements to 0).
CCW or CCW=xxx
LIST
CHANGE KEYBOARD
CK
Use this command to request a new keyboard address for
command input or the address of the secondary printer
for CRT hard copy.
Note: 4300-FRIEND asks for the device type of the
new console/secondary output station. Secondary output
station printing produces a hard copy of all messages for
the console. If a secondary output station is specified,
make sure that it can handle the print CCW X'09'. Reset
the secondary output by specifying address = 0 and type
= PRT.
CHANGE nnn,addr,cccc
. CHANGE nnn,Sb.ccee
CHANGE Sb.cccc
Use this command to alter up to 80 bytes at address
addr or symbolic I/O area $b ($b represents any
alphabetic character). Data cccc is moved to storage
(lowercase characters are accepted). You can specify the
length (nnn) of the area in decimal or hex. After the
storage alter operation, the changed area is displayed.
CLEAR
List CCWs Use this command to display the channel
program being generated together with up to 16 data
bytes in hex. If you specify a device address, all CCW
blocks for this specific device are listed. If you specify a
device address of 0 or CCW= alone, 4300-FRIEND
displays all CCW blocks of all devices.
Use this command to clear all CCW execution flags in all
active UCBsand to reset the execution counters. You
can use this command after an error stop to reinitialize
the CCWrun sequence.
CLEARSc
eLRS
If you have not entered GO, the command chain bit is on
in the last CCW. If you enter CCW immediately after an
I/O error message, the displayed CCW chain is the one
that detected the error. The actual failing command is
flagged by ** (CCW address in CSW minus 8).
Use this command to clear the reference to symbolic data
area $c or to all symbolic references if you do not specify
a symbolic data area.
Example:
COLOR TEST
UCB= unit control block address for this CCW chain. FL=
flag bytes in this UCB. Use toe nn-CCW command for
one UCB; for example, 2-CCW to display UCB chain two.
Use this command to invoke an interactive test case for
. extended data stream orders (requires 327x extended
features).
Use this command to reactivate a CCW chain(s). nn is
the UCB number displayed by the LlST= function. If the
optional parameter * is specified, all stopped CCW chains
are activated (see "LOOP" commmand).
4381
B/M 2676380
I~~g
co Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GG035
SYS TEST 095
In ..
-.-~----
..
-~-.-.---
..
SYS TEST 100
COMPARE Sx.Sy.nnn
CMP addr1.addr2.nnn
Use this command to compare two data areas (addr 1 to
addr2 or symbolic t/O area $x to $y). Specify the length
(nnn) of the area in decimal or hex format (maximum
length is 65535 or X'ffff'). If you do not specify a length,
the length of the first symbolic I/O area is used. Only
two areas can be compared for one CCW chain. The two
areas comp~red can be different in any CCW chain(s).
You can enter COMPARE anytime during the generation
of a CCW chain, and you can specify it for each CCW
chain entered .. Any symbolic I/O areas to be used must
have been defined before. 430Q-FRIENDdoes the
comparison when it completes the CCW chain.
CONNECT nnn. addr
CONN nnn. Sc
CNNSc
DECREASE n.addr .incr .thr.ini.·
OCR n.addr.incr.thr.ini.n2.
addr2.incr2.thr2.ini2. •
DISPLA Y nnn.addr.xxx
DISPLAY nnn.Sc.xxx
DSPL $c.xxx
Use this command to connect a storage block of length
nnn (full 2K blocks are used).
.
Use this command to decrement a counter after each
completion of a channel program. You can specify a
second counter which is updated if the threshold of the
first counter is reached. Use this command with the
INCREASE command only. For an explanation of the
parameters, see the "INCREASE" command.
.Use this command to display the contents of storage in
character format. Storage is displayed in lines of 64
bytes (maximum) along with the address of the first byte.
addr indicates the beginning address; nnn indicates the
length
decimal or hex) of the area to be' displayed.
Optionally, you can specify a line printer address xxx for
output.
COpy xxx
Use this command to copy the last-entered CCW chain
for device xxx. The CCW chain is not actually duplicated.
Instead, the same physical CCW chain is used. This
permits the same CCW chain to be run on several devices
(of the same type) at the same time.
DEVICE=xxx
DEV=xxx
COUNTER
CNTR
Toreset COMPARE, see the "NO COMPARE" command.
Use this command to display the LOOP values and the
510 counters for all active CCW chains/UCBs.
CONFIG xxx,yyy
CNFG
Use this command to test a range of devices (from
address xxx to address yyy). If you do not specify device
addresses, all device addresses from X'OOO' to X'FFF'
are tested.
430Q-FRIENDissues a TIO command, a 510 sense, and
SIO sense I/O command to each device. The resulting
condition codes, first four sense bytes, and sense I/O
information bytes one to seven are displayed. In addition,
TCH and STIDC commands are issued for the first device
and for all following channel addresses ending with
X'OO'. The first byte of the channel 10 means X'QQ' ...
selector channel; X'10' = byte-MPX channel; X'20' =
burst-MPX channel. Devices or channels that store
condition code 3 after TIO/TCH are not displayed.
All outstanding t/O interrupts are cleared before the
CONFIG command; If an I/O interrupt is encountered
after one device is tested, a message is displayed.
To reset the DECREASE command, see the "NO
DECREASE"command.
CREATE
See the "BUILD" command.
. CSW-xxxx
CSW status mask
Use this command to generate a CSW device and channel
status mask. The two-byte long hex xxxx field indicates
those bits that you want 430Q-FRIEND to ignore. You
can enter CSW= anytime during the generation of a CCW
chain and you can specify it for each CCW chain entered.
The device-end bit cannot be turned off.
DATA DUMP nnn.addr.·
DATA DUMP nnn.Sc."
. DTDMP Sc.·
Use· this command to dump the specified data area (addr
or symbolic I/O area $c) on the secondary printer after
running each CCW chain. You do not have to specify the
length (nnn) of the area for a symbolic I/O area. If the
secondary printer is not specified. the operator console is
used for the display. If the optional parameter" is
specified, the dump also appears on the operator console.
To reset DATA DUMP, see the "NO DATA DUMP"
command.
Use this command to create a new UCB for the next
CCW chain entered with the unit address of xxx (leading
zeros are not required). If the device address is ., the
address of the operator console is used. The last-entered
UCB entry is completed by turning the command chaining
bit off in the last CCW.
Note: 4300-FRIEND analyzes the device type at this
time. The following commands are run if the device is
ready:
For FB device type determination: Sense I/O (X'E4')
2321 determination (if Sense I/O not accepted):
Seek Cylinder (X'OB') - length 4 X'FF.FF'
Seek (X'07') X'000010000000'
After previous checks:
Sense (X'04') - if any error occurred before to clean
status.
If the specified device does not handle the above
commands, you can specify a dummy device address (for
example, 0) and later specify the real device address with
the nn-DEVICE= command.
DISCONNECT nnn. addr
DISC nnn. $c
DSC$c
Use this command to disconnect a stoiage block of
length nnn (full 2K blocks are used). Reconnect the
block(s) before using the DUMP/ALTER commands.
(in
DUMPS
Use this command to dump the names of all assigned
symbolic I/O areas along with their storage address and
. length in hex.
DUMP KEY nnn.addr
DUMP KEY nnn.Sc
DMPK Se
Use this command to dump the storage keys of storage
area addr for nnn bytes.
DUMP nnn.addr.xxx
DUMP nnn.$c.xxx
DMP Se,xxx
Use this command to dump nnn bytes of storage starting
a~ address addr. You can specify nnn in decimal or hex.
You can specify a line printer address xxx for output. $c
is any symbolic I/O area specified by a previous BUILD or
CREATE command or by the FROM or INTO CCW
command modifiers (if you do not specify a length, the
one stored for the symbolic field is used). Symbolic
address can be offset $c+a (a = offset 1.. F).
DUMPT
. Use this command to dump the last entries (36
maximum) of the TRACE area.
EX CLRIO.xxx
XC
Execute Clear I/O Use this command to display the
condition code received after running the Clear I/O
command to device xxx.
11
]:I
4381
B/M 2676380
rMI
l!!.9.
o Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GG035
PN 6169392
20f5
EC A20558I
·1
~0~1~O~~~8_4~.~~____~.~~____~________~________~
SYS TEST 100
1
0000000000000000000000000 00000000
01
0000000000·000000000000000 000000000
SYS TEST 105
EX HDV.xxx
XHD
Execute Halt Device
Use this command to display the condition code received
after running the Halt Device command to device xxx.
EX HIO.xxx
XH
GO
•
n = length of the counter (field) 1 to 4.
KEY OAT A=k,f
Use this command to start running all active CCW chains.
After they have started running, the CRT console accepts
commands (for example, STOP, ACTIVATE, COUNTER,
EXHIO. etc.) without halting the run. You can stop
430Q-FRIENO with an I/O interrupt by pressing the
ENTER key on the operator's console.
•
addr
•
inc = optional increase value (in decimal or hex). The
default is 1.
•
thr = optional threshold value (decimal or hex) of the
counter at which the counter is initialized. The
default = O.
Use this command to specify storage key k for the data
area (for the next CCW chains to be entered).
4300-FRIEND increments the data area pointer to the
next 2K storage boundary and sets the specified key up
through the end of storage. The standard key is 1
without fetch protection. Specify f to fetch-protect the
data area.
•
ini = optional value (decimal or hex) to which the
counter is initialized at the beginning and when the
threshold is reached. The default is O.
HALT
=
hex address of the counter.
KEY IDA=k.f
Execute Halt I/O
Use this command to display the condition code received
after running the Halt I/O command to device xxx.
Use this command to halt processing after an I/O error or
false PSW swap occurs. No device is restarted, but
additional errors can be indicated.
To not halt after an I/O error occurs, see the "NO HALT"
command.
EX STIDC,xxx
XS
Execute Store Channel 10
Use this command to display the condition code received
after running the Store Channel 10 command for device
HELP
Use this command to display operating hints.
xxx.
Initialize
Execute Test Channel
Use this command to display the condition code received
after running the Test Channel command for device xxx.
EX TIO,xxx
XT
Use this command to initialize 4300-FRIENO. (This
command is the same as RESET, except it is accepted in
all input fields: for example. in data request.) The device
queue, CCW area, data area, and IDA areas are zeroed.
All references to symbolic I/O areas ($a to $z) are reset.
A new device address is requested.
INCREASE n.addr.inc.thr ,ini. •
INCR n.addr,inc.thr ,ini,
n2,addr2,inc2.thr2.ini2. •
Execute Test I/O
Use this command to display the condition code received
after running the Test I/O command to device xxx. If you
do not specify device address xxx, 430Q-FRIEND uses
the last device address entered.
To reset the INCREASE function, see the "NO
INCREASE" command.
INT
Use this command to advance a counter after each
channel program completes. You can specify a second
counter that is updated if the threshold of the first
counter is reached. Use this command with the
DECREASE command only.
Use this command to discontinue the running of CCW
chain(s) after the external interrupt button has been
pressed twice. A Halt I/O instruction is issued after about
five seconds to those I/O devices that are still active. The
TIO mode of 430Q-FRIENO is reset.
To handle external interruptions normally, see the "NO
INT" command.
KEY CAW=k
Use this command to specify CAW key k for the rulining
of the CCW chain. k can be any hex digit 0 to F. The
standard key used is 1.
KEY CCW=k,f
Use this command to specify storage key k for the CCW
area (for all CCW chains). The standard key is 1 without
fetch protection. Specify f to fetch-protect the CCW
area.
FLAG nn,xx
Modify Flag Byte
Use this command to modify the flag byte in CCW nn to
hex value xx. If you specify no value, the flag is set to
zero.
C)
* = stop processing if threshold of the only or second
counter is reached.
Interrupt
EX TCH,xxx
XTC
4381
B/M 2676380
•
I~~g
Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
Use this command to specify the storage key k for the
IDA area (for all CCW chains). The standard key is 1
without fetch protection. Specify f to fetch-protectthe
IDA area.
LIST
See the "CCW" Command.
LOAD UCSB
Use this command to load the UCSB buffer of the 3203,
3211, 3262 or 3289 printers (4300-FRIEND requests all
necessary load information). The Block Data Check
function is set for the printer.
LOOP
I LOOP nnn,·
Use this command to specify the number of times to loop
the entered CCW chain. Specify the loop number nnn in
decimal (the maximum number is 65535). The SIO
counter is reset to zero.
If you specify the optional parameter * , the CCW chain is
stopped when the specified loop count is reached. You
can activate the stopped CCW chains again with the
ACT, * command. If you do not specify the parameter *
and the CCW chain has looped the specified number of
times, 4300-FRIEND stops running all active CCW
chains, displays LOOP IS FINISHED ON UNIT xxxx, and
requests a new command.
Enter GO to repeat the CCW chain(s). You can display
the current loop values (thresholds) with'the COUNTER
command.
GG036
SYS TEST 105
SYSTEST 110
NO ALARM
NLRM
NO TIME DELAY
NTD
QUIT
Use this command to reset the audible alarm on the
operator console.
Use this command to instruct 4300-.FRIEND to go to
wait state after all active UCB devices are started until an
I/O interrupt occurs. Devices that do not return a
device-end interrupt are not restarted. This mode is
recommended, in order to save processor time, if
4300-FRIEND is used in the VM environment.
Use this command to 'quit (cancel) a 4300-FRIEND
request for console input (for example, DATA=). The last
command is ignored, and a new command is requested.
The REPLACE function is reset.
NO BMPX·
Use this command to set block multiplexer mode off
(standard if you specify Be mode).
Use this cornmand to reset the compare indication for the
last entered chain or for the chain specified in the
nn-NOeOMPARE format.
NO DATA DUMP
NDTDMP
SENSE=xxxx
Use this command to reset the wait indication for the last
entered chain or for the chain specified in the nn-NOWAIT
format.
Use this command to remove all eew chains for device
xxx from the device queue. If you are running several
different devices in overlap mode, the complete eew
chain(s) of a device can be removed with this command.
To remove a single eew chain, use the STOP command.
Use this command to create a sense byte status mask.
The two-byte long, hex xxxx field indicates those bits
4300-FRIEND will ignore in the first two bytes of the
sense field. You can enter this command anytime during
generation of a CCW chain, and you can specify it for
each cew chain entered.
POINTER CCW=xxx
PTRCCW=xxx
REP nn
SET FB
Replace CCW
Set Fixed-Block Device
Use this command to replace CCW nn in the last CCW
chain entered with the next CCW entered. Use the
nn-REP command to modify a specific CCW chain. When
you are entering a CCW chain, specifying REP alone
replaces the last entered cew with the next one.
Use this command if a device does not store the correct
FB 10 aftera sense I/O.
Use this command to specify the next. CCW address (xxx)
(must be on doubleword boundary).
Use this command to reset the Data Dump command.
POINTER DATA-xxx
PTRDT=xxx
NO DECREASE
NDCR
Use this command to specify the next CCW data area
address (xxx).
Use this command to reset the Decrease command.
RESET
POINTER IDA-xxx
PTRD-xxx
NO HALT
Use this command for a no halt after an I/O error occurs.
,NO INCREASE
NINCR
U$ethis command to specify the next IDAW address
(xxx) (must be on word boundary).
Use this command to reinitialize 4300-FRIEND. The
device queue, CCW area, data area, and IDA areas are
zeroed. All references to symbolic I/O areas ($a to $z)
are reset. A new device address is requested.
PRINT SENSE
PRTSNS
RETURN
NOINT
Use this command to display the 32-byte long standard
sense area. The TID mode of 4300-FRIEND is reset.
Use this command to change from card/tape input to
operator console input. Otherwise, use the GO or TRACE
command.
Use this command to instruct 4300-FRJEND to handle
the external interruptions normally (no interrupt).
.PSW
NO TEST I/O
Program' (PSW) Restart
Use this command to reset the TIO mode,
In execution mode, use this command to request a Clear
function without a counter reset.
Use this command to reset the Increase command.
Use this command to loop on a Start I/O or Test I/O
instruction. SCOPE can only be used in single CCW chain
mode. If you specify SCOPE after a TEST I/O, do a PSW
RESTART to exit SCOPE mode. If you specify SCOPE
after a START I/O, use the console REQUEST to exit.
REMOVE=xxx
RMV=xxx
NO WAIT
NO COMPARE
NCMP
SCOPE
Q
SIZE
Use this command to display the storage size in hex.
START READER.xxx." .nnnn.B
S.xxx
Use this command to read the cew chain(s) from either a
card reader or a tape drive with address xxx. If the
second parameter is *, all records read are displayed. As
an optional third parameter, a four-digit test case number
can be specified. This number must be located in
columns 3 to 6 of the first record of a test case. If a tape
is used and a desired test case has been passed, a fourth
parameter B for backward read can be used.
4300-FRIEND skips all test cases up to the one
specified.
STATUS
Use this command to print all the program indicators
normally displayed on line 20.
nn-STOP
Use this command to deactivate cew chain nn. nn is the
UCB number displayed by the L1ST= function.
4381
B/M 2676380
e Copyright IBM Corp.
rMI
l.!.!,g
1984
GG036
PN 6169392
4 of 6
ECA20668I
01 Oct 84 .
I
.
SYS TEST 110
OOOOOOOOOOOOO()O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
SYS TEST 115
TRACE xxx
TRC
SUBST xxx, yyy
Substitute
Use this command to start running all active CCW chains
and to build up a trace area that contains information
about all SIOs and I/O interrupts of all test devices. If you
specify an asterisk (*) for device address xxx, the SIOs
and TIOs for the operator console and the secondary
printer are also traced. If you specify device address xxx,
only trace entries for this device are stored in the trace
area. You can dump the last entries in the trace area with
the DUMPT command.
Use this command to search all channel programs for
device address yyy and then change the device address to
xxx. If you want to change the device address in a
specific CCW chain, use the nn-DEV=xxx CCW chain
control command.
TEST I/O
T
WAIT nn,n
Use this command to repeatedly run the TIO instruction
(using the last-entered device address only} and to display
the resulting condition code, CSW, and sense bytes. If
you specify a loop count for the last entered UCB, the TIO
loop can be restricted. To execute the TIOonly once, use
the EX TIO command. By entering SCOPE instead of GO,
the results are not displayed.
Use this command to instruct 4300-FRIEND to complete
the current CCW chain (device end interrupt) before
starting the next CCW chain. If you do not specify nn,
4300-FRIEND starts the next CCW chain when it
receives the device end interrupt. Otherwise, it waits for
nn milliseconds before starting the next CCW chain. The
second parameter (n) is optional and specifies 0.1
milliseconds.
Reset TIO mode by pressing the ENTER key twice (if tNT
feature is active) or by commands NO TeST I/O, PRINT
SENSE, or RESET.
Changing Existing CCW Chains
I)uring the generation of a CCW chain, all entered
commands are related to the current UCB (the number of
the current UCB is displayed on the screen). To change
an existing CCW chain (UCB), specify the UCB/CCW
chain number (get the UCB/CCW chain number by using
the CCW= or lIST= commands), a hyphen (-), and then
the command.
Example 1
This command changes the loop count for CCW chain 12:
12-loop 5000
Example 2
This command copies CCW chain number 2 to the current
UCB by using the same CCWs and data:
2-copy
To reset the Wait function, see the "NO WAIT"
command.
TIME
Use this command to get the current time. This is either
the time-of-day or the elapsed time since the program
was started.
TIME DELAY nn
TMDL nn
Use this command to set the timeout counter (for the
running of all CCW chains) to decimal nn seconds. An
error message is displayed if 4300-FRIEND does not
receive a device end for a CCW chain within the specified
time period. Also use this command if an operator
console or secondary printer is used as a test device.
For no time delay, see the "NO TIME DELAY" command.
4381
B/M 2676380
I~~g
GG035
I
II ~c
PN 6169392
,50f5
.
A20568
I
~.~0~1~O~ct~8~4~~,__________~________~__________~________~
SYS TEST 115
C Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
_sa i "":::liil::
II I
:
$2i
::::" : IiIU:::::: : UiiJj:::U . :is:a2iiU2!ii::::::li! IUili 11$1
0000000000000000000000000000000000
0000000000000000000000000 000.00000
SYS TEST 125
Change Commands
nn-NO DECREASE
nn-STOP
For more information on these commands, see
"4300-FRIEND Commands."
Deactivates DECREASE for CCW chain number nn.
Stops/deactivates UCB/CCW chain number nn.
nn-DEVICE=
nn-WAIT nnnn
Changes the device address for CCW chain number nn.
Specifies/changes WAIT for CCW chain number nn.
nn-FLAG nn,xx
nn-NO WAIT
Changes the flag byte in CCW chain number nn.
Deactivates WAIT for CCW chain number nne
Adds a command after CCW chain number nn (see also
"nn-SETFB").
nn-INCREASE ••
CCW Chain Execution Control
nn-CCW
Specifies/changes the INCREASE values.
Lists the CCWs of UCB/chain number nne
nn-NO INCREASE
Before an SID is issued, 4300-FRIEND checks the CCW
chain and zeros all input areas indicated by the ZERO flag
in the CCW.
nn-COMPARE •••
Deactivates INCREASE for CCW chain number nne
Specifies/changes COMPARE values.
nn-KEY CAW=
If an I/O interrupt or condition code 1 or 3 occurrs after a
Start I/O, 4300-FRIEND analyzes the CSW and issues
the specified UCB control commands:
nn-NO COMPARE
Specifies/changes the CAW key.
1.
Deactivates COMPARE for CCW chain number nn.
nn-L1ST
nn-COPY
Lists the CCWs of UCB/CCW cha'in number nne
Copies CCW chain number nn to the current UCB.
nn-LOOP
nn-COUNTER
Specifies/changes the LOOP count.
Lists the counters of UCB/CCW chain number nn.
nn-REP nn
nn-CSW=xxxx
Replaces a CCW in CCW chain number nn (see also
"nn-SETFB").
a.
nn-SENSE=nnnn
b.
Specifies/changes the sense bits to be ignored.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
3.
Condition Code 1 (CSW stored) after Start I/O with
unexpected CSW status.
a.
If all the CSW status error bits are masked,
handle it as immediate interrupt.
b. Issue sense command in case of unit check in
CSW.
c. .If all the sense bytes are masked and no other
error is in CSW, handle it as immediate interrupt.
d. Display error message.
e. Increment or decrement storage field.
f. Retry Start I/O (510 counter is not incremented).
The 510 is not retried if the loop count is one.
nn-ACTIVATE
Activates UCB/CCW chain number nn.
nn-ADD
4.
Condition Code 3 after Start I/O.
a.
b.
C.
2.
Specifies/changes the DATA DUMP values.
nn-SETFB
nn-NO DATA DUMP
Sets FB type for device (nn-REP and nn-ADD commands
require a previous nn-SETFB command for 3370).
Deactivates DATA DUMP for CCW chain number nne
Condition Code 2 (busy) after Start I/O.
Successful completion of a CCW chain (either no
error detected or error was masked out by
CSW=/SENSE= commands).
•
If WAIT specified, wait until device end is
signaled by device, or stop execution if interrupt
not received after about five seconds.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
•
If WAIT was not specified, start next device (if
specified).
Data compare
Data dump
Data ripple or random
Increment or decrement storage field
Compare loop count
Unsuccessful execution of a CCW chain (error in
CSW after I/O interrupt and CSW status not
masked).
Specifies/changes the CSW bits to be ignored.
nn-DATA DUMP
5.
Display error message.
Increment or decrement storage field.
Retry Start I/O (510 counter is not incremented).
The 510 is not retried if the loop count is one.
6 • Test I/O Loop (last entered device address at storage
location X'420').
a.
b.
C.
Print condition code.
Increment or decrement storage field.
Compare loop count.
Issue sense command if there is a unit check in
CSW.
If all the sense bytes are masked and no other
error is in CSW, handle it as· normal interrupt.
Display error message.
Data dump.
Data ripple or random.
Increment or decrement storage field.
Compare loop count.
nn-DECREASE ..
Specifies/changes the DECREASE values.
4381
B/M 2676380
I~~g
o Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GG040
I
PN 616. 9393
.10f6
II
EC A20558l
.~.~O~1~O~c~t~8~4~~.
1
__________~________~________~________~_
SYS TEST 125
SYSTEST 130
CCW COMMANDS
In general,4300-FRIEND ignores all vowels, blanks,
periods, and asterisks except in requested data. All
commands can be' entered in either uppercase or
lowercase characters.
READ (X'02') ·S·
READ BUF (X'E2')
SENSE (X'04') ·S·
SNS
Read Buffer - 2314
Length is always 32 bytes. The standard sense bits (byte
zero) are:
RESERVE (X'B4')
RSV
Device Reserve - string switch
READ BUFFERED LOG (X'A4')
RBL
RESET BUF (X'C3') ·S·
RSTBF
Read Buffered log - 33XX
Following the CCW command, a CCW flag or CCW
command modifier can be entered, separated by a
comma.
The CCWs that have an ·S· following the command are
automatically generated with the Suppress Incorrect
Length Indicator (Sill) set on. If you do not want the Sill
bit set on, specify NOSILI after the CCW command.
For a detailed description' of the device CCWs, refer to the
Component Description manual for that device.
General CCWs
X'SO' = Command reject
X' 40' = Intervention required
X'20' = Bus-out check
X'10' = Equipment check
X'OS' = Data check
X'04'. = Overrun
SENSE I/O DeVICE (X'E4') ·5·
SNSDVC
.
TIC ·-n .• n or -n .•n (X'OS')
TIC ·+n ••n or +n ••n
Transfer in Channel
CMD HH ·S·
Command Code in Hex
Enter any hex command code. If the last hex digit is odd,
data is requested.
noon is the decimal number of bytes for the channel to
transfer to (displacement) the • and + or - are optional. If
only TIC is entered. ·-S is assumed. If X is the first
character of n ..n, the following characters are taken as
hex displacement.
WRITE.(X'Ot'} ·S·
HEX HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
Complete CCW in Hex
Enter a complete ccW in hex. Sixteen hex characters are
packed into an S-byte CCW and inserted into the CCW
chain. The data address in the CCW is changed to point
to the next available data area location of 4300-FRIEND
(if SKIP bit is not on in CCW flag). Blanks can be inserted
to separate fields. No CCW flag or CCW command
modifier can be specified.
NOP (X'03') ·S·
Reset Buffer - 2314
READ COUNT (X'12')
RC
READ COUNT KEY DATA (X'1E') ·S·
RDCKD
SEARCH ID HI eX'S1')
SOH
Read Home Address
SEARCH 10 HI EQ eX'71')
SDQH
READ IPL (X'02') ·S·
RDPl
SEARCH KO EQ (X'2D') ·S·
SOT
READ KEY DATA (X'OE') ·S·
,RKD
Read Record Zero
DIAGNOSTIC WRITE (X'73') .
DW
READ SECTOR (X'22')
RSC
Initialize Buffer - 2314
SEARCH 10 EQ (X'31')
SQO
READ HA (X'1 A')
RH
DIAGNOSTIC LOAD (X'S3')
DGL
INIT BUF (X'E3')
NTBF
Search Home Address Equal
READ DIAGNOSTIC STATUS (X'44')
RDDGS
DiskCCWs
·S·
SEARCH HA EQ (X'39')
SHQ
READ DATA (X'OB') ·S·
READ RO (X'1 6') • S·
RRO
ERASE (X'tt')
RESTORE (X'17') • S·
RSTR
Search Key and Data Equal
SEARCH KD EQ HI (X'6D') ·S·
SKDQH
Search Key/Data Eq/Hi .
SEARCH KO HI (X'4D') ·S·
. SCHKDH
RECALIBRATE (X'13') ·S·
RCL
Search Key and Data High
RELEASE (X'94')
RL
SEARCH KEY EQ (X'29') ·S·
SQK
Device Release - string switch
SEARCH KEY EQ HI (X'6S'; ·S·
SKQH
MT.+CCW
!.
Set multitrack bit for specified CCW .
"
:1
1M!
i
4381
81M 2676380
I
• Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
!.
l.§!.9 GG040
PN 6169393
2m6
EC A20558 .,
~O~1~O~~~8~4~_~____~~____~__- L__~__~-L~______~
'I
:0 () 0 0 0 0 0 () 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
_.----_.------_.. --_._--_.
o
o0
SYS TEST 130
000 0 0
I
I"
oi
riN'
"6
,I,'",
\f P II,..' ""!tIHt" • • .
d
1
'±""i'ZliwfMhHw."+4+¥ il\, i.J"mm ..M' " .• "\!MH ........ ;,. , ';" ...t
'w
'
1 {'"'' "'dl\!
"
III',,, inlli ... "''!)I!' ,','. .
".y".i.".. ,y' .... f4n'··
,., ,t,'WXttw'tt""
n
",tit,.,."
t
'u' ''tWC''' . . . . .
"'&,#
.
t.,
""F.",tlt'euwdf jj't'AfH
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
SYS TEST 135
DIAGNOSTIC SENSE {X'C4'} ·S·
SEARCH KEY HI (X'49') ·S·
SKH
WRITE RO (X'15')
WRRO
DGSNS
SEEK (X'07')
SK
Write Record Zero
LOCATE (X'43')
BACKSPACE (X'27') ·S·
BSR
lC
SEEK CYL (X'OB')
SKCL
SEEK HEAD (X'1 B')
SKHD
WRITE SPECIAL COUNT KEY DATA (X'01')
WSPCKD
(8 bytes)
Fixed Block (FB) Commends - 3370
Requested parameters are:
SET SECTOR (X'23')
SS
Fixed block (FB) devices are identified during device
address specification time (DEV= •.. ). If the device
handles FB (depends on SENSE I/O bytes 4 and 5 which
must be X'3370'), the DEVICE CHARACTERISTIC is read
and saved for later use. If the device does not store the
correct FB to after the sense I/O command, the SET FB
command can be used after DEV= •
SPACE COUNT (X'OF') ·S·
SPCNT
DEFINE EXTENT (X'63')
DX
WRITE BUF (X'E1')
WBF
(16 bytes)
SET FILE MASK (X'1 F')
SFM
LOG.START= (decimal value
preceded by "X").
WRITE HA (X'19')
WH
or up to 8 hex digits
LOG. END= (decimal value or up to 8 hex digits
preceded by "X").
.
Write Home Address
If nothing is entered, the defaults are:
WRITE H40 (X'19')
WH40
First three parameters are all O.
Write 3340 Home Address
LOG. END is the value read by the READ DEVICE
CHAR command (reduced by 1).
WRITE H50 (X'19')
WH50
DIAGNOSTIC CONTROL (X'F3')
DCNT
Write 3350 Home Address
Backspace File
OP. BYTE =(two hex digits)
REPL. CNT=(decimal value or up to 2 hex digits
preceded by "X").
BLCK. CNT=(decimal value or up to 4 hex digits
preceded by "X").
ERG eX'17') ·S·
Erase Record Gap
FSF (X'3F') • S·
Forward Space File
FSR (X'37') ·S·
PHY.START= (decimal value or up to 8 hex digits
preceded by "X").
WRITE DATA (X'05')
WD
BSF (X'2F') ·S·
If nothing is entered the defaults are:
MASK BYTE= (two hex digits)
WRITE COUNT KEY DATA (X'1D')
WCKD
Backspace Record
BL. OFFS.=(decimal value or up to 8 hex digits
preceded by "X").
Requested parameters are:
Write Buffer - 2314
Tape CCWs
WRITE KEY DATA (X'OD')
WKD
OP. BYTE = X'06'
REPL. CNT= X'OO'
BLCK. CNT= X'0001'
BL. OFFS.= X'OOOOOOOO'
READ BUFFERED LOG (X'A4')
RBL
Forward Space Record
MODE SET (X'93')
MOST
·S·
READ DEVICE CHAR (X'64')
RDDVC
Mode Set 7-track, 800 bpi
MODE SET 800 (X'CB')
MOST 8
Mode Set 9-track, 800 bpi
READ FB (X'42') ·S·
RFB
MODE SET 1600 (X'C3')
MOST 1
READ IPL (X'02') ·S·
RDPL
Mode Set 9-track, 1600 bpi
RELEASE (X'94') ·S·
RL
Device Release - string switch
RESERVE (X'B4') ·S·
RSV
Device Reserve - string switch
MODE SET 6250 (X'D3')
MDST6
Mode Set 9-track, 6250 bpi
READ (X'02') • S·
RD
READ BACKWARDS (X'OC') ·S·
RDBK
SENSE EXTENDED (X'84') ·S·
SNSX
WRITE FB (X'41')
WFB
4381
B/M 2676380
I~~g
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GG040
I
PN 6169393
.3m6
II
EC A20558
I
.~._O~'~O~c~t_8~4~.________~________~________~________~
SYS TEST 135
sa 5
SYS TEST 140
REWIND (X'07') ·S·
REW
FOLD (X'43')
FLO
READ UCSB (X'OA') ·S·
RCSB
ERASE WRITE CRT (X'05') ·S·
RSW3277
UNLOAD (X'OF') ·S·
RUN
Fold -3211 + 3203-4
Read UCSB 3211
Erase Write 3277 Data
GA TE LOAD (X'EB')
GTLD
SKIP n ·S·
SKPn
Instead of DATA= 3277, specific requests are keyed. To
end them, enter * after CMD= is keyed. See "Command
Table." po not specify indirect addressing (IDA).
Gate Load - 1403
Skip to Channel n; n is 1 to 12
IMM + CCW command
MM
SKIP a (X'S3')
SKPO
Immediate - use with SPACE/SKIP commands
Skip to Channel 0 immediate - 3211
READ MODIFIED (X'06') ·S·
RMD
LOAD FCB (X'63') ·S·
LOFCB
SPACE n (X'CC') ·S·
SPCn
SELECT (X'OS') ·S·
SLCT
Load Forms Control Buffer
Print with n Spaces After
WRITE (X'01') ·S·
LOAD UCS (X'FB') ·S·
LOCS
n is 1,2, or 3; command is X'09', X'11', or X'19';
immediate X'OB', X'13', or X'lB'.
WRITE CRT (X'01') ·S·
W3277
Load UCS Buffer without Folding
UNFOLD (X'23')
NFLD
Write 3277 Data Stream
Unfold [3211 + 3203-4]
Instead of DATA= 3277 specific requests are typed. To
end them, enter • after CMD= is typed. See "Command
Table" below. Do not specify indirect addressing (IDA).
WRITE (X'01') ·S·
WRT
WTM
(X'1F') ·S·
Write Tape Mark
Card Reader/Punch CCWs
PUNCH (X'01') ·S·
PCH
2540 punch, feed, select stacker
PUNCH BINARY (X'21') ·S·
PNCHBNR
2540 punch binary, feed, select stacker
For 1403, a GATE LOAD command must be executed
before a LOAD UCS.
PUNCH 42 (X'C1') ·S·
PNCH42
LOAD UCS F (X'F3') ·S·
LDCSF
1442 punch, eject, select stacker 2
PUNCH 42 BINARY (X'E1 ')·S·
'PNCH42BNR
Load UCS Buffer and Fold; not for 3211
,PRINT (X'OS') ·S·
PRT
1442 punch binary/eject/select stacker
READ CARD (X'02') ·S·
, ReD
. Print with one Space after
RAISE COVER (X'6S')
RSCVR
Printer CCWs
READ FeB (X'12') ·S·
'RFCS
ALLQW DC (X'7B')
LLWDC
Allow Data Check
Read FCB 3211
BLOCK DC (X'73')
BLCKDC
READ PLB (X'02') ·S·
RDPLS
Block Data Check
ReadPLB 3211
4381
I MI
IPN
6169393
B/M2~~~S"GOO~4~6
~ Copyright IBM Cofp. 1984
'
"I
READ BUFFER (X'02') ·S·
RBFF
WRITE (X'01') ·S·
Write without Space Warning:
ribbons.
This can destroy printer
CRT and Hard-Copy Printer CCWs
(3277/3278-3287)
ERASE ALL U (X'OF') ·S·
RSLL
Erase All Unprotected
ERASE/WRITE (X'05') ·S·
RSW
Command Table
If you specify WRITE CRT or ERASE WRITE CRT,
4300-FRIEND asks for the 3277 command (buffer
control order).
'SB'
'Sf'
'1C'
opt'
'Ra'
'Eu'
'EM'
'FF'
'''II'
'%%'
'·St'
Set Buffer Address (X' 11') + address
Start Field (X'l 0') + attribute character
Insert Cursor (X'13')
Program Tabulator (X'05')
Repeat to Address (X'3C') + address and 'fill'
character (DATA=)
Erase Unprotected (X' 12') + address
End of Message (X' 19') - for printer
Forms Feed (X'OC') - for printer
New Line (X' 15') - for printer
ENTER key = no command
end of data stream (no code generated)
EC A20668I
~~O~1~O~c~t~8~4~'~_ _~~_ _~_~_ _ _ _~_ _ _ _~
SYS TEST 140
OOOO()OOOOOOOOOO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
.",
t'j"t'"jj'""
,,"tt"
.',##'
0000000000000000000000000 0,00000000
SYS TEST 145
POLL (X'Og') ·S·
Teleprocessing CCWs (270x, 370x)'
ADPREP
ADp·
ex"
PolilAutopoll
E') • S·
POLL SCB (X'Og') ·S·
PLLS
Address Prepare
Poll seB -SOLC Autopoll
Enter scas as for Control sca command. End command
with answer on' after Y-N=.
BREAK (X'OD') ·S·
BRK
CONTROL SCB (X·OS')·S·
CS
POLL SDLC (X'OF') ·S·
PLLSO
(Ctl sca SOLC -16 bytes)
Address aligned on fullword boundary.
OFS
ADR
FLG
NSC
NSA
NRA
lOT
PREPARE (X'OS') ·S·
pp
Enter buffer offset indecimal (default= 2).
Enter SDLC station address.
Enter control flag byte· in hex:
X'SO' Inactive station (0= active).
X'40' Datapoll station (0= contact).
X'20' Send rnr poll (0= rr).
X'10' Reply rnr to poll (O= rr).
Enter ns current.
Enter ns acknowledged.
Enter nr of next frame to be received.
Enter four byte identification field in hex.
READ (X'02') • S·
READ PIU (X·OS')·S·
ROP
Read PIU - SOLC
SAOn ·S·
SOn
SAD n -270x; n is 0, 1,2, or 3
DIAL (X'29') ·S·
DL
SET MODE (X'23') ·S·
Dial, switched line with autocall
SENSE SCB (X'14') ·S·
SNSS
DISABLE (X'2F') ·S·
OSBL
Sense sca SDLC - 24 bytes
Disable Line
Address aligned on fullword boundary.
ENABLE (X'27')·S·
NSL
WRAP (X'OS')
WRP
Enable Line
WRITE (X'01 ') ·S* ,
INHIBIT (X'OA')
NHBT
·S·
WRITE PIU (X'OS') ·S·
WP
LISTEN (X'OA') ·S·
LSN
Write PIU - SDLC
SOLC X.2 1 switched
4381
B/M 2676380
i~~g
o Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4
GG040
I
II
t
PN 6169393
EC A20558
.Sm6
. _.~0~1_0~c~t~8_4~___________~______________~________________~
SYS TEST 145
w:;
SYS .TEST 150
CCW FLAGS
CCW COMMAND MODIFIERS
RIPPLE
RP
You can enter a CCW flag after a CCW command, a CCW
modifier, or another CCW flag (separated by a comma).
Note that some CCW flags are automatically set by
4300-FRIEND. After the CCW has been specified, you
can change these flags with the 4300-FRIEND FLAG
command.
Add the following CCW command modifiers to a CCW
command for the indicated reasons. You can combine
these modifiers when needed.
Moves the data area one byte to the left for all write
CCWs.
CRT or 3277
ZERO
ZR
DC (X'SO')
Requests a special 3277 data stream after WRITE and
ERASE WRITE.
Clears input area of CCW before performing a Start
command.
Data Chaining
FROM
Uses address portion of next CCW (command chaining is
not turned on)
Specifies a symbolic
I/O
I/O area is to be used.
INTO
IDA (X'04')
Specifies a symbolic I/O area is to be used.
Indirect Data Addressing
LENGTH
LN
Note: This parameter must be the last one you enter in
the CCW command. 4300-FRIEND requests IDA areas
for IDAW. Do not specify a CCW command modifier with
IDA.
Data Length
Reset Suppress Incorrect Length Indicator
4300-FRIEND requests key length and data field length
for the file count instead of using the amount of data
entered from KEY= and DATA= •. For commands which
have a fixed data length assigned by 4300-FRIEND, use
LENGTH to change the fixed data length.
PCI (X'OS')
NEW
Program Controlled Interrupt
ResetCCW indicators.
Causes a channel controlled interruption. 4300-FRIEND
ignores aU interrupts with PCI on in the CSW until device
end is posted in the CSW.
This modifier resets the disk indicators for:
NOSILI (resets X'20')
NSL
•
•
•
Sill (X'20')
TIC required
Seek argument not required
Set File Mask required.
RANDOM
RN
Suppress Incorrect Length Indicator
Causes suppression of possible incorrect length indication
inCSW.
Generates random data, bypasses 'home address' and
'count fieids'.
SKIP (X'' a')
Suppresses transfer of information to storage.
I
I
i
t
I"i
4381
B/M 2676380
fMa
l!!,g
CI Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GG040
PN 6169393
60f6
EC A20558
·1
~O~1~O~~~8~4~.~
Ij
______~____~__~____~__~________~
11
SYS TEST 150
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OO()OOOOOOO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1
I
01
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000
INSTALLATION
INST 001
Contents
Installation Time Guideline ••••....•••••.•••.•••.•.••..•
Processor and Ship Group Checkout ........................ .
INST 002
INSTD02
Final System Check ..•...........•......••...•....•. .tNST 061
Running System Test/4381 ................................ INST 0'61
Completing the Installation ................................. INST 0'61
Relocation or Discontinuance Procedure ........................ INST 0'61
Power Plug Installation (If Required) •••••.••••••••.•••••.• INST 011
Preparing the Power Cable for Plug ...............•........... INST 011
Installing the Power Plug .................................. INST 0' 11
Site and Processor Safety Checkout ...•••...••••.•..••.•. INST 012
Checking the 4381 Processor Power Plug ............••........ INST 012
Checking the Customer Power Receptacle ••••........•••••..... INST 012
Measuring the Customer Primary Power ••••••••••••.••••••
INST 015
Physical Setup ..............••.....••••.•••.••...••• INST 016
Processor Location ....................................... INST 0' 16
Channel To Channel Adapter (CTCA) Only .....•.............. INST 016
Installing
3278-2A
3279-2C
320'5 and
Operator Console. . • • • • • • • . • . • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ..
.......................•••••.•..•..•...••....
........•....•.........•••••..•.....•••••••...
Operator Control Panel ...••.........•••.....•.....
INST 0'21
INST 0'21
INST 0'22
INST 0'25
Installing Remote Support Facility (RSF) ...••....•.•....••. INST 0'31
Unpacking the Cable Box .............................•.... INST 0'31
External Cable -- Part 8482931 •..••....••••.•••••.••..• INST 032
Set Modem Adapter Card (Canada/U .S.A.) ..•...•............ INST 032
• Set Modem Adapter Card (Japan) ......•..•••.••...•.....•. INST 0'32
External Cable -- Part 8482930' (External Modem) ••••••••••• INST 035
Set Modem Adapter Card (External Modem) ...... , ........... INST 0'35
External Cable -- Part 8482934 .•••••••••••••.••••••...• INST 0'36
Set Modem Adapter Card ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. INST 036
External Cable - Part 8482933 ••••••••••.•••••••••••••• INST 0'41
Set Modem Adapter Card (External Modems) ..........•....... INST 0'41
External Cable -- Part 40'1441 •••••.•••.• ~ . • • • . . • . • • • . .• INST 0'42
Set Modem Adapter Card ....................•••......... INST 042
MSS Power-On Checks and Diagnostics ••.••.••••..••••... INST 0'45
Running MSS Extended Diagnostics •••.••.........•.. ,'........ INST 045
Running Additional MSS Tests .....•..•.....•...•. ! • • • • • • • • • INST 0'45
Running PU Diagnostics Based on Initial Install or Relocation ••••
General Instructions ....................................
OCP Checkout ..........................................
Running Cable Wrap Test (CWT) .............................
INST 0'46
INST 0'46
INST 0'46
INST 0'46
System Configuration •••••••••••••••••••••••••...•••..
3279 Display Console Aids ...........••....................
Configuration Aids ................................•..•...
Diskette Aids ...........................................
Remote Support Facility Aids ..........................•....
Patch Aids ............................................
Running Channel To Channel Adapter (CTCA) Test ................
INST 0'51
INST 0'51
INST 051
INST 0'51
INST 0'51
INST 0'51
INST 0'51
Installing Interface Cables •••••••••••••••••.••••••••••.•
INST 0'55
4381-3
BIM 2676380'
I~~g
ID Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GHOO'5
IPN 6169590'
1 of 2
EC A2O'558
0'1 Oct 84
EC A2O'559
0'3 Dec 84
EC A2O'56O'
18 Feb 85
INST 001
_i
INST 002
Installation Time Guideline
Clock Time
Area
1.0
Processor and Ship Group Checkout
Power Plug Installation (If Required)
Site and Processor Safety Checkout
Physical Setup
.6
Instali Operator Console
Install RSF
2.0
1.4
1.5
2.0
MSS Power-On Checks and Diagnostics
System Configuration
Install Interface Cables
Final System Checkout
8.5 Hours Total Install Time
Processor and Ship Group Checkout
Note: If the Remote Support Facility (RSF) feature
(8/M 1806885) was ordered, cable and coupler
assembly (part 401441) will be installed in gate
01 G. Go to "Site and Processor Safety Checkout."
DANGER
Do not touch any customer power receptacles at the
installation site until instructed in the "Site and
Processor Safety Checkout" procedure.
Start here after completing the unpacking instructions.
1.
Check the processor for physical damage.
2.
Ensure that the processor history matches the
features listed on the customer order, and notify your
manager of any differences.
3.
Ensure that possible last minute processor location
changes have not affected I/O cable lengths or power
outlets.
4.
Unpack the large shipping group package and open
the boxes. Ensure that the following items were
shipped:
5.
6.
If the RSF feature other than 81M 1806885 was
ordered, verify the correct external RSF cable is part
of the ship group. For the correct cable part number,
refer to the RSF table shown at
g.
•
Vol A01 thru ADa, COl, Operations Manual, and
the PA Guide.
•
RSF phone with hardware (if featuredi, DCP with
OCP cable, coax cable, channel wrap blocks,
CTCA interface cables (if featured), module pin
alignment template, module pin aligner, leveler
assemblies, and terminators.
IJ
Cable Part Number
Feature Code
8482931
8482934
8382934
8482931
401441
8482930
9510
2837
2836
2944/2943
9514
9511
I ;;;;ILOUO
oJlo,\n.,n
",. ..... "" /"'n ..... n
I;;;;;;;
Verify that one DIAG 1, two FUNC 1, and two FUNC2
diskettes are packed in the storage pocket near the
service panel.
4381-3
81M 2676380
rMI
~
GH005
PN 6169590
20'12
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
EC A20559EC A20560
03 Dec 84
18 Feb 85
INST 002
~ COIlyright IBM CorP. 19B4
0-" , 0'"
,.,
,
"
o o o
()
o 000 o o
""~
o () o
""-.-,,'"
....
~.
o
·-~
() O
o ". o
I, 'J;:)
...,~'"
'-'
'--'
t)
'-.J'
n
~,
()
'--",
())
'J
o 00
'-'
I)
(\
'-'
'-'
0 0 0 OJ
000000000000000 0000000'000 000000000
INST 011
Power Plug Installation (If Required)
This procedure applies only in countries where the
machine is shipped without a plug on the power cable.
Because of the various styles of power plugs, This
Procedure is for Reference Only. The shield must be
properly terminated at the plug to ensure proper
grounding of the power cable.
Preparing the Power Cable for Plug
Installing the Power Plug
Note: Nonraised Floor Only. Slide the power cable
under the machine frame before connecting the power
plug.
Line Cord Identification
Black
Line
Cord
The following steps show you how to attach one style of
the power plug to the line cord.
Review. the figure before starting, and refer to this figure
during the procedure.
1.
Remove the tape from the shield, and then loosen
and separate the strands.
1. Remove about 65 mm (2-5/8 in) of the cable jacket
2.
Slide the rubber insulator up against the shield.
Phase 1
Blue
Phase 2
Red
Phase 3
Green/Yellow
Shield
Ground
Blue
Neutral
Black
Phase 1
Black
Phase 2
starting at the plug end of the cable.
Note: Ensure that the ground wire is slightly longer
than the adjacent wires.
2. Unbraid (do not cut), and carefully comb out the
shield exposing the cable core.
3.
3. Remove the Mylar separator and cable filler exposing
the conductors.
4. Carefully fold the shield back over the cable jacket,
Complete the installation of the power plug by
installing the contact assembly to the proper .
conductors of the power plug. Ensure that the shell
makes contact with the shield at all places (360
degrees).
Line Cord Identification
and temporarily wrap tape to protect the shield.
5.
6~
Install clamp, rubber insulator, and connector shell
over the cable core.
Line
Cord
Remove 14 mm (9/16 in) of insulation from the
conductors.
Brown
Phase 3
Green/Yellow
Shield
Ground
* For 220V wiring, tie the neutral to the line cord.
Cable Bulk
Clamp
Connector Shell
Contact. Assembly
Rubber Insulator
Green/Yellow
Phase 3 (Red)
Phase 2 (Blue) - -....
J...... . . . - - -
Ground (Green/Yellow)
14
4381-3
81M 2676380
&l Copyright IBM
I
I
II
MI
PN 6169591
EC A20558I EC A20562
...,;:;,S,;;eg:a..,.:G::H:.:,;0::.,1:..:0:...-.....I.•..:1..;o::,,:f..:2=--_ _- I. . 01 Oct 84 . 30 Aug 85
Corp. 1984
Phase 1 (Black)
INST 011
INST 012
Site and Processor Safety Checkout
Tools required:
Make the following resistance
3. measurements; a reading of less than
ohm shows a safe grounding conductor.
CE Tool Kit
Checking the Customer Power
Receptacle
CE Meter (part 8496278)
If any problems are found:
High Voltage Test Probes (parts 1749249 and·
1749250).
•
Alert the responsible Field Manager.
•
Call your Installation Planning Representative (lPR) for
assistance.
This procedure must be performed to ensure that the
installation environment is safe. For plug and receptacle
pin locations, see figure
Place a CHECK MARK next
to each completed step.
EJ.
Checking the 4381 Processor Power
Plug
Repair all IBM product problems if any are found.
1.
Verify CB 1 and CB2 are in the OFF position.
2.
Make the following resistance measurements; a
reading of less than . 1 ohm shows a safe
grounding conductor.
a.
b.
Measure the resistance between the
ground pin of the processor power plug
and the processor frame.
Measure the resistance between the
processor power plug shell and the
processor frame. If there is no plug,
measure between the green/yellow wire
and the processor frame.
•
DANGER
With the customer branch CB in the OFF position,
do not touch the exterior shell of the customer
receptacle with anything except the test probes
until you have completed step 2.
Measure the resistance from the phase
pins to the processor power piug sheiL
b.
Measure the phase-ta-phase resistance
of the processor power plug.
b.
Measure the resistance between the
ground pin of the customer receptacle
to the building ground.
Note: Digital meters may give unstable
readings if leakage current is flowing in the
building ground circuit. If the reading
appears unstable or greater than 1 ohm,
use an ECOS 1020, 1023, or equivalent
to measure ground impedance only. If the
resistance is less than 1 ohm, the
customer receptacle has a safe ground.
Power must not be applied to the processor if the building
ground cannot be located and verified.
Note: Water pipes, raised floors, and electrical conduit
MA Y be connected to building ground; therefore, provide
a usable ground reference. If you are unable to locate
building ground, contact your IPR for assistance.
1.
Ensure that the customer branch CB is in the
OFF position.
2.
Perform the following voltage measurements; all
voltage values should be less than 1. Vac.
a.
b.
Make the following resistance measurements; a
value greater than 2000 ohms shows a safe
processor power plug.
a.
Measure the resistance between the
ground pin of the customer receptacle
to the exterior shell.
Notify the customer of the problem.
Note: If the resistance values are less than . 1
ohm, the processor power plug has a safe
. ground. Continue this procedure.
3.
a.
c.
4.
Measure the voltage between the
exterior shell of the customer receptacle
and the building ground.
Perform the following voltage measurements of
the customer receptacle; all voltage values
should be less than 1 Vac.
a.
Measure the phase-to-phase voltage.
b.
Measure the phase-to-ground voltage.
c.
(World Trade Only) Measure
phase-to-neutral voltage (if present).
d.
(World Trade Only) Measure
neutral-to-ground voltage (if present).
Measure the voltage between the
ground pin of the customer receptacle
and the building ground.
Notes:
1. If voltage values are less than 1 Vae, continue.
(World Trade Only) Measure the voltage
between the neutral of the customer
receptacle (if present) and the building
ground.
2. Ensure that the language on all safety labels match
the country to which the processor is being installed.
Refer to "4381 Processor Safety Inspection Guide"
for the correct locations and part numbers.
m
Note: If the voltage values are less than 1 Vac,
the customer receptacle is safe to touch.
Phase Pins
Ground
Ground
4381-3
81M 2676380
rMI
i..§!.g
GHO 10
PN 6169591
2 of 2 '
Power Plug
EC A20558I ECA20562I
01 Oct 84
30 Aug 85
Customer Receptacle
INST 012
o Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
f
0000000000
o o o
00 o
o o
0 0 iO n
'"'
Or
~,.
()
'-'
o o
n
"-'
o
10)
(\
'-"
o
n
'-'
o
1\
'='
d'tlftiMW!'@UWMIWP
f'
i9
, [I w:, '. It'" . ·'Ht#TW"'IPT"IJ 1[WrtT'dr'f'gr "PrY"(r ==+"'H'rf' niL .. ,HbrlHb,j,' ,
w.;..rl*ttfKeW¥ t'tWW!g'j
0"
'"
, '" :
"!I, r II
lUIIHW'''''R'bj'P,tlbrl"IIUM''''.,.d,' LJ,'df## TJHHlrl'1"W'tt,"'·'#1ICfN'W
iHt·'kt!·
rw*·'Whtbhi.M'·'· 'h"J 'trl'Yr1t rHtmi! ,:' H!"WMt tt¥",'''H!M,I. ·t' J '.'#"'& r Mum
t
'"
..!t', .... , ..• ,
",,,.
0, 0 0 0 -0 0 0.- 0---0-0--=0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
o
0-----0-0-----0 0
d.
DANGER
This procedure must not be performed until you
have completed the following procedures.
"Checking the 4381 Processor Power Plug"
"Checking the Customer Pow8r Receptacle"
Do not touch the internal parts of the customer
receptacle with anything except the test probes.
e.
Place the customer branch CB in the ON
position.
2.
Perform the following voltage measurements; all
-voltage values should be less than 1 Vac.
a.
Measure the voltage between the
exterior shell of the customer receptacle
and the building ground.
b.
Measure the voltage between the
ground pin of-the customer receptacle
and the exterior shell.
c.
o· 0
INST 015
Measuring the Customer Primary Power
1.
1"'..
a 50/60
Impedance-grounded neutral power
systems only. Measure the voltage
between neutral of the customer
receptacle. and building ground. If the
'voltage is greater than 10 Vac, check
the phase fault indicator for a phase
fault and notify the customer. Do not
continue until the phase fault is
corrected.
Nominal
50 Hz
200
220
380
400
415
60 Hz
200
208
220
240
Measure the phase-to-phase voltage of
the customer receptacle. Continue only
if the voltage values measured meet the
requirements as indicated in chart
g.
_
f.
Check the voltage label on the cover of
the Primary Control Compartment (PCC)
box to ensure the processor is correctly
wired for the customer outlet. If there
is a problem, see Volume C01, "Power
Logics" on page YA081 for proper
wiring, or invoke your support structure.
g.
Place the customer branch CB in the
OFF position.
Hertz Primary Power Voltage
Minimum
Maximum
180
193
333
350
363
220
238
410
432
44a
180
180
193
208
220
220
238
254
(World Trade only) Measure the voltage
between the neutral of the customer
receptacle and the building ground.
Note: If the voltage values are less
than 1 Vac, the customer receptacle is
safe.
m
Phase Pins
Ground
Ground
Power Plug
4381
81M 2676380
o Copyright IBM Corp.
I~~g
1984
Customer Receptacle
GH015
INST 015
a=
2£ lid:
0.;
Physical Setup
INST 016
Leveling Pads (4X)
lhIE]
Processor Location
1. The cable ent~nd exit holes in the processor frame
are shown at iii. The opening in the subfloor hole
must be large enough to accommodate all I/O,
Power, and Power Control Interface (PCn cables.
DE!
Note: Excessive cold air on the Air Flow Sensors
can cause a power-on failure.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the I/O cable cover 01 E, and route the
power cable through the frame opening.
rorrn'
t:iL...lJ
Instell two plate .assemblies (part 401502) under the
. frame as shown at
Adjust the levelers until the
casters are free to rotate. The levelers will stabilize
the processor.
[]EJ
~
II .
""
Top View of Frame
Front
Top View
of Frame
For nonraised floor installations only.
a.
Remove two setscrews shown at
iii·
Plate Assembly
b .. Remove rubber a ring, and slide locking collar
away from power plug.
c.
Slide the power plug under the processor frame.
d.
For replacement reverse the procedure.
Note:. Ensure that the a ring is seated in the
grooved area of the- plug.
5.
(Japan only). For machines with S/M ·1806743,
install leveler retainers as shown at [iJ.
6.
Install. cable tie (part 2637668) from the frame
to the cable.
support shown at
7.
Connect the power plug to the customer receptacle.
II
(2\
Channel-To-Channel Adapter (CTCA) Only
m
~R"'ln"C11P
---.
ForCTCA switch settings, see Volume A06, Service Aids,
"CTCA Switch Settings."
~~Ii~P~
m
"\
4381
81M 2676380
e Copyright IBM Corp.
o
IM'
Seg GH015
I
PN 6169592
2 of 2
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
EC A20559
03 Dec 84
INST 016
'984
0 0 0 0----0-0-·--0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0
O~O--O---·
0 0 0 0 0
o
0- o~
-.'
".I'.! .....
0000000000000000000000000 0,00000000
INST 021
Installing Operator Console
3278-2A
CAUTION
The weight of the display console is approximately
36 kg (80 Ib). Get aid in lifting.
Note: For the correct setup procedures, see 3278-2A
Setup Instructions, and follow normal safety practices.
1. The operator console consists of a keyboard with the
operator control panel (OCP) and display consolp. unit.
This unit is placed on the operator console table.
2.
8.
Perform the offline test using the 3278 Model 2A
Display Console Maintenance Information, Order No.
SY27-2546.
9.
Connect all optional printers or displays to gate 01 F
at positions 1, 2. or 3.
3278-2A Display Console
(Front View)
10. If RSF is featured on this processor, go to INST 031.
--
11. If RSF is not featured on this processor, go to INST
045.
Remove the cover on gate 01F/01H as shown at
rJ·
3.
Ground
Post
Connect the coaxial cable (part 5578477) to the
display console, route the cable to gate 01 F. and
connect to socket 0 as shown at
Processing Unit 01 F Gate
m·
Note: If the processor was shipped with a
stand-alone OCP, do not use it with the 3278-2A
console. Disconnect the the OCP cable (part
401462) from the OCP unit. This cable connects the
3278-2A to the processor. The OCP unit should be
left on-site with the customer.
4~
Connect the OCP cable (part 401462) to the display
console, route the cable to gate 01 F. and connect to
socket J 1 and ground tab as shown at
KEYBD
Optional
Printers or
Displays
20
m·
5.
Install the EMC clamp (part 167338) to the OCP
cable, and then fasten the clamp to the grounding
stud
using a flat washer (part 1622305),
lockwasher (part 1622319), and nut (part1622404).
iii
6.
Connect the power cord to the customer-supplied
outlet.
Note: If the display has a Security lock feature,
ensure that the key is in the ON position.
7.
Replace the cover on gate 01 FlO 1H.
mJ
Right Side ,
__
.",,1
4381-3
81M 2676380
INST 021
C Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4
ilkli::"""".:::::;::""::::: ::S:;;;iiiiiZiiiii!i!i!ii
iiiil! i
,." 1m
INST 022
8.
3279-2C
3279-2C Display Console
Perform the offline test using the 3279 Display
Terminal Maintenance Information, Order No.
SY33-Q069.
CAUTION
The weight of the display console· is approximately
36 kg (80 Ib). Get aid in lifting.
9.
Note: For the correct setup procedures, see 3279-2C
Setup Instructions, and follow normal safety practices.
10. If RSF is featured on this processor, go to INST 031.
1.
The operator console consists of a keyboard with the
operator control panel (OCP) and display console unit.
The unit is placed on the operator console table.
11. If RSF
045.
2.
!J.
3.
Connect the coaxial cable (part 5578477) to thedisplay console, route the cable to gate 01 F, and
connect to socket 0 as shown at
(Back View)
Connect all optional printers or displays to gate 01 F
at positions 1, 2, or 3.
;s not featured on this processor, go to INST
Remove the cover on gate 01 F/01 H as shown at
-
m·
yboard
Note: If the-processor was shipped with a
stand-alone-DOP, ·do not use it with the 3279-2C
console. Disconnect the the DCP cable (part
401462) from the OCP unit. This cable connects the
3279-2C to the processor. The OCP unit should be
left on-site with the customer.
4.
Processing Unit 01 F Gate
10
Connect the OCP cable (part 401462) to the display
console, route the cable to gate 01 F, and connect to
socket J 1 and the ground tab shown at
1iJ·
5.
Install the EMC clamp (part 167338) to the OCP
cable, and then fasten the clamp to the grounding
using a flat washer (part 1622305),
stud
lockwasher (part 1622319)' and nut (part
1622404).
Optional
Printers
Displays
EI
6.
20
Connect the power cord to the customer-supplied
outlet.
Note: If the display has a Security Keylock feature,
ensure that the key is in the ON position.
7.
Replace the cover on gate 01F/01H.
4381-3
B/M 2676380
I
MJ
. Sea GH020
I
PN 6169593
. 2 of 2
EC A205.58
a....::O:..!.l...:01:~t..::a:::;::;4;........1I:...:::..::==~~
I
I'
I'
I,
INST 022
ID Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
ii'i:
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ' 0 () 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 , 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1
n
\::,#
-""'.
V
~::
\31 i
It
,mer
o
'''''''_ri·''
"'M,!"'L \"lffl "'IL'li'z!I.fI1!!",i,·",,• •iI:i,'w.t+ri,;,p;ft,'
"t"'j/t l 't
J
•
t ',tf,*"tW"!+'"
M
'\LlJiI %'" t' Il'n "1'/'A"p' ·'J"*idW't" ....'
"wrm.'
"-"J"
'--'bji'!"'
'''p'C''f'mrq'T;U;''''lf[!J!!!!!!IIW;'''U ' ' 111
'Y . rr: 1 "Z"%'t'f'%U!!R"·., 'HI ere
""",tt',ttU'W"if
0·00000000000000000000000 000000000
INST 025
9.
3205 and Operator Console Panel
CAUTION
The weight of the display console is about 20 kg (45
Ib). Get aid in lifting.
Note: For the correct setup procedures, see 3205 Color
Display Console Maintenance Information, and follow
normal safety practices.
1.
The color display console consists of a keyboard,
video unit, and logic unit. The OCP is part of the
processor ship group.
2.
Place the Color Display Console and the OCP on the
operator console table.
3.
Install OCP plate (part 401345) under the right end
of the console base, and place the OCP on top of the
plate adjacent to the keyboard as shown
Replace the cover on gate 01F/01H.
10. Connect all optional printers or displays to gate 01 F
at positions 1, 2, or 3.
11. If RSF ;s featured on this processor, go to INST 031.
12. If RSF is not featured on this processor, go to IN ST
045.
Front View 3205
g.
4.
Remove the cover on gate 01F/01 H as shown at
5.
Connect the coaxial cable (part 5578477) to the
display console, route the cable to gate 01 F, and
connect to socket 0 as shown at
m.
Processing Unit 01 F Gate
B.
6.
Route the OCP cable (part 401462) from the OCP to
gate 01 F, and connect the cable to J 1 position and
connect the ground tab shown at
m.
7.
Install the EMC clamp (part 167338) to the OCP
cable, and then fasten the clamp to the grounding
stud
using a flat washer (part 1622305),
lockwasher (part 1622319), and nut (part
1622404).
II
8.
OCP Plate
Optional
Printers or
Displays
Connect the power cord to the customer-supplied
outlet.
Note: The display has a Security Keylock feature;
ensure that the key is in the ON position.
EMC Grounding Stud
~
/
~J
4381
B/M 2676380
I~~g
~/
Right Side" ' - ..,,/
GH025
~ Coovriaht IBM Corp. '984
INS T 025
=.:=Z=iIi!Uiiiiiilli. liii' : : :
a
i $ Ji
0000000000000000000000000000000000
,J
"
,
''':!I ......
""'He t·
t """1 ....'
"etW
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
INST 031
Installing Remote Support Facility (RSF)
Note: If this installation does not include the Remote
Support Facility feature, go to page INST 045.
This section describes the installation of the RSF cable to
gate 01G.
Unpacking the Cable Box
If feature 81M 1806885 was ordered, cable assembly
(part 401441) is installed in gate 01 G; go to page IN ST
042 to continue the cable installation.
1.
For external cable (part 8482931), go to page INST
032.
2.
For external cable (part 8482930)' go to page INST
035.
3.
For external cable (part 8482934), go to page INST
036.
4.
For external cable (part 8482933)' go to page INST
041.
5.
For external cable (part 401441), go to page INST
042.
4381-3
B/M 2676380
I~~g
IPN
GH030
6169595
1 of 2
ECA20558
'01 Oct 84
01G·CCA1
pee
Front View
EC A20559
03 Dec 84
EC A20560
18 Feb 85
INST 031
«l CoovriQht IBM Corp. '984
u:zaua:UtiliidliJi! II ill I
:AOll$$ .U." ZIltJ U!iII :::::::::: :i :: iUS.4$!!i! II:: II ill Ii: Iiii :
INST 032
External Cable -- Part 8482931
1. Locate and remove the cover
and
loosening screws
IJ on. gate 01 G by
m·
m
III
2., Connect RSF external cable
shown.
to 01 G-CCA 1 as
II to gate 01 G (as shown).
3.
Connect cable shield
4.
Route RSF external cable through opening adjacent to
gate 01G.
·5.
Install tie wrap (part 5270166) to the external cable,
and fasten it to the adjacent frame support shown at
using screw (part 1621230).
II
6.
7.
Reinstall the cover
m·
a
by tightening screws
•
Set Modem Adapter Card (Japan)
1.
Remove card (part 8564508) from 01 A-A204.
1.
Remove card (part 5688021) from 01 A-A204.
2.
Set all rocker switches to the OFF position.
2.
Set all rocker switches to the OFF position.
3.
Set rocker switch K to the ON position.
3.
Set rocker switches AA, Be, CC, DO, L, M, and N to
the ON position.
4.
Use the Transmit DBM chart to match rocker
switches A through I to levels specified on the
coupler (X=ON).
4.
Use the Transmit DBM chart to match the rocker
switch settings A through Hand R levels shown on
the coupler (X=ON).
5.
If no level is shown, use the -8 dbm settings.
6.
Install the card in 01A-A204.
7.
Go to page INST 045.
5.
If level is not shown, use the -8 dbm settings.
6.
Install the card in 01A-A2Q4.
7.
Go to page INST 045.
II and
Rocker
Switches
B
C_
Rocker
Switches
A
8
C
Transmit DBM
X
X
To connect external cable, part 8482931
(Japan), see B/M 1B64633 contained within
B/M 4143541.
F_
G_
H_
I-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
~
- L . . . - - L-.- - - - _ - -
r.....
H
N
F
E
0
~ GH030
© Copyright IBM Corp, , 984
I
pN 6169595
2 of 2
X
X
On Off
I
X
X
X
H
p
G
N
F
E
M
CC
L
0
K
BB
C
J
8
AA
I
A
Component Side . ," On Off
X
X
X
R
X
X
X
On Off
X
X
X
X
X
X X X X X X
X
X
X X X X X X
X
I
I
B
A
On Off
I!l
rMI
R-.
X
C
I
Component Side
H
G
J
X X X X X X
X
-- '--I..-.
R
P
M
L
K
X
X
X X X X X X
F_
G_
On Off
X
X
X
D_
E_
X
X
X
X
0
E
Rocker Switch
Identification
0·1·2 ·3·4·5·6 ·7·8·9·10·11-12·13·14·15·16·17·18
To connect e~ternal cable, part 8482931
(Canada/U.S.A.), first connect adapter (part
1853134) and then refer to coupler.
4381-3
81M 2676380
Rocker Switch
Identification
Transmit DBM
0- 1 ·2 ·3·4 ·5·6 ·7·8·9·10·11·12·13·14·15·16·17·18
A
Do one of the following to complete the RSF external
cable installation:
•
Set Modem Adapter Card (Canada/U.S.A.)
~l
if~~"J VB~
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
EC A20559
03Dec·84
EC A20560
18 Feb 85
INST 032
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OOOOOOOOQI
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
INST 035
Set Modem Adapter Card (External
Modem)
External Cable -- Part 8482930
(External Modem)
1.
m EJ·a
Locate and remove the cover
loosening screws
and
on gate 01 G by
iii to 01 G-CCA 1
2.
Connect RSF external cable
position.
3.
Connect cable shield
4.
Route RSF external cable through the opening
adjacent to gate 01 G.
5.
Install tie wrap (part 5270166) to the external cable,
and fasten it to the adjacent frame support shown at
using screw (part 1621230).
II to gate 01G as shown.
1.
Remove card (part 5864668) from 01A-A2Q4.
2.
Verify that positions D and F have jumpers installed.
3.
Install the card in 01 A-A2Q4.
4.
Go to pagelNST 045.
•D •E
O·
[I
6.
Reinstall the cover
m·
B by tightening screws mand
m
7.
Connect external cable connector (part 8482930)
to the customer supplied modem.
8.
To complete this cable installation, see your modem
instructions.
4381-3
81M 2676380
I
MI
I
PN 6169596
II
Component Side
EC A20558
L.::;S::;eg~G:.:H:.:.;O::.;3::.;5=----,....;1~o~f.....;:2~_ _........ ' 01 Oct 84
I
A2Q4
(Reference Only)
I ~C
I
A20560
. ' 8 Feb 85 .
INST 035
Cl Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
Ei_Iuau : 2i2i!ili!iiii!iiil::::: II
::
aU$! i$Sl! :
INST 036
External Cable -- Part 8482934
1.
m B.a
Locate and remove the cover
loosening screws
and
Set Modem Adapter Card
on gate 01 G by
m
2.
Place foam pad (part 401478)
shown.
on gate 01G as
3.
Place the RSF external cable assembly
the foam pad in gate 01G.
4.
Install retainer bracket (part 401479)
(part 1621176).
m
II on top of
1.
Remove card (part 5167246) from 01A-A2Q4.
2.
Set all rocker switches to the OFF position.
3.
Set rocker switches I, J, K, P, and N to the ON
position.
4.
Use the Transmit DBM chart to match rocker
switches A through Hand R to levels specified on the
coupler (X=ON).
5.
If no !evel is shown, use the -8 dbm settings.
6.
Install the card in 01A-A.204.
7.
Go to page INST 045.
II using screw
m
5.
Install ground wire
to housing
using screw
(part 1621190) and washer (part 1622346).
6.
Install connector
7.
Route TB 1 cable
through opening adjacent to
gate 01G to location of the telephone coupler.
8.
Install tie wrap (part 5270166) to the external cable
and fasten it to the adjacent frame support shown at
using screw (part 1621230).
II to 0 1G-CCA 1.
13
II
9.
Reinstall the cover
a·
/11
Ii! by tightening screws III and
.
Note: For a detailed description of TB 1 wiring, refer
to Volume A06, Service Aids "Line Plate
Configuration (World Trade)."
1O. To complete the RSF external cable installation,
contact your telephone company representative.
Rocker
Switches
X
A
X
X
B
C
X
X
On Off
R
H
P
G
N
F
E
M
0
L
K
C
X
X
X
X
X
0
E
F
G
Rocker Switch
Identification
Transmit DBM
0-1 ·2·3·4·5·6 ·7·8·9·10·1",2·13·14·15-151718
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X X X X
X
X
X X X X X
H
J
I
X
X
R-
Component Side
I
II
I':
' ...
m~
B
A
II,
I,
I',
1:!t
1
I,'I
On Off
Ii
I
Iii
4381-3
81M 2676380
I
MI
Seq GH035
I
PN 6169596
2 of 2
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
EC A20560
18 Feb 85
I
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
o
0 0' 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
INST 036
000000000
111
008000000000000 0000000000 000000000
INST 041
Set Modem Adapter Card (External
Modems)
External ~Cable -- Part 8482933
rJ on gate 01 G by
1.
Locate and remove the cover
loosening screws
and
2.
Install the RSF external cable assembly
m
EI·
m
into gate
01GIJ·
3.
Route the cable assembly through the opening
adjacent to gate 01 G and then to the location of
telephone coupler.
4.
Install the two mounting screws (part 1621176) and
the two flat washers (part 1622304) shown at [i.
5.
Connect the cable shield
6.
m·
m
to gate
II
01Gsho~n
Remove card (part 5864668) from 01 A-A2Q4.
2.
Verify that positions 0 and F have jumpers installed.
3.
Install the card in 01A-A2Q4.
4.
Go to page INST 045.
at
Connect the ground wire
using the screw (part
162 1190) and washer (part 162346)
to gate
01 G shown at
13
II.
Component Side
m
I
7.
Connect cable
8.
Install tie wrap (part 5270166) to the external cable,
and fasten it to the adjacent frame support shown at
using screw (part 1621230).
m
9.
1.
Reinstall the cover
B·
to 01 G-CCA 1.
a
by tightening screws
A2Q4
(Reference Only)
01 G·CCA 1--..pr.~·.1
II and
10. Connect external cable connector (part 8482933)
to cable connector (part 1727744)
m.
iii
11. To complete this cable installation, see your modem
instructions.
(Female Connector)
(Male Connector)
Modem Side
4381-3
B/M 2676380
I
I
II
I
I
MI
PN 6169597
EC A20558
EC A20560
L...:S:::.;e::.::g;L...:G~H.:.;:0:;...4~0~-...l.. ...;.1...;o;.:.f..;:2=--_ _....._ • 01 Oct 84 _ 18 Feb 85 .
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
INST 041
2aaE:a::a::a:u:i2i!LiiiiiZi Iii Ii hiillm: iii i ; i
.=
$ iZl2i :::liii5tii mil i .Ii; as I*,
INST 042
Set Modem Adapter Card
External Cable -- Part 401441
1.
Locate and remove the cover
mandB·
2. Route cable
a
by loosening screws
OJ through the opening adjacent to gate
Ensure that the 01 G-CCA 1 connector
seated.
4.
Reinstall the cover
B·
Remove card (part 8564508) from 01A-A2Q4.
2.
Set all rocker switches to the OFF position.
,~~
3. Use the Transmit DBM chart to match rocker
01 G and then to the telephone.
3.
1.
switches A through I to the 0 dbm level (X =ON).
II is properly
E1 by tightening screws mand
4.
Set rocker switch J to the ON position.
5.
Install the card in 01A-A2Q4.
6.
Go to page INST045.
~IU
Not Used
/
I
I
Note:
The unpacking, assembly, and connection of
the IBM supplied telephone is TOTALLY the
responsibility of the customer and is NOT to be
performed by the IBM service representative.
5.
""II
Give the customer the box labeled part 4494964,
which contains the IBM supplied telephone.
'i':,.;'
Rocker Switch
Identification
Rocker
Switches
Transmit oBM
0-1 ·2·3·4·5·6 ·7·8 ·9·10·' 1-12·13·14·15·16·17·18
X
X
X
A
X
X
X
X
B
X
X
:: X
C
X
X
X
0
X
X
X
E
X
X
X
F
G_
X X X X X X
X X X X X X
H
X
I-
On Off
Component Side
L.-
R
H
p
N
G
M
L
K
E
0
C
J
I
A
From Pr~so~
F
B
On Off
I
I
1'1
II
1
:1
:!
\",1
,
I,
~
1
~:,
,Iii'
':Ii
,I
I:
4381-3
81M 2676380
(C)
o
I
MI
Seq GH040
Copyright IBM Corp. '984
I
PN 6169597
2 of 2
ECA20558
01 Oct 84
EC A20560
18 Feb 85
INST 042
0 t) O' 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
IOJ
II l,"
'J;.t,'J
OtdN'J,
.... ""'",, m
li
S"I'
",
'I
t
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000
INST 045
MSS Power-On Checks and Diagnostics
Note: If a processor failure occurs while performing the
following instructions, go to Volume AO 1, "Start Repair
Procedure," on page START 001. Once the failure has
been corrected, return to the point in the instructions
from where you left.
Running MSS Extended Diagnostics
Running Additional MSS Tests
1.
Set the CE Mode switch to Normal.
2.
Set the I/O Power Hold switch to I/O Power Hold.
Note: A error message is displayed on the operator
console screen if ports 1, 2, or 3 on gate 01 Fare
unused.
1. Ensure the Unit Emergency Only switch is in the On
3.
Set the Power Off switch to Power Off.
1.
Power on all displays/printers, and ensure that all
device switches are set to the Normal position.
4.
Install the DIAG 1 diskette into diskette drive 1.
2.
Key in the two-digit code for each selected test, and
press ENTER.
position and the customer branch CB is in the ON
position.
2.
Diskette drives 1 and 2 are unloaded.
5.
Set the Power Off switch to Normal.
3.
Ensure that the operator console is powered on.
6.
4.
Set the CE Mode switch to CE Mode, the Power Off
switch to Normal, and verify the following.
Press Power On. The Basic and Extended
Diagnostics (FF) start to run.
3.
Follow the instructions displayed on the operator
console screen.
Notes:
a.
Run Test AO against diskette drive 1 and
diskette drive 2.
b.
Run test EO ONLY if external cable 8482930 or
8482933 is installed.
MSS Test Selection.
a.
5.
6.
CP 1, CB 1, and CB2 are in the ON position at the
pec.
b.
CP2 is in the ON position (all 50 Hz and 60 Hz
Japan machines).
c.
The 5 Volt, 24 Volt, Basic Check, and MBC On
indicators are on.
7.
90
AO
CE
DO
EO
The message MSS EXTENDED DIAGNOSTICS
COMPLETED is displayed when the tests are
completed.
Run Service Panel diagnostics
Run DDA/Drive tests
Test all console/printer ports
Run RSF adapter diagnostics
Run RSF cable wrap test (EIA interface only)
Note: For additional information, see "Optional MSS
Diagnostics," under Diagnostics in this volume.
Note: Errors are indicated by the stop words displayed
on the service panel or by a reference code shown on the
console.
Press Power On at the service panel, and verify the
following:
a.
The Power In Process indicator is on.
b.
After about 30 seconds, 81504 appears in the
MSS Code display indicating the SP ROS
diagnostics ran error free.
Normal
CE
Mode
Press Lamp Test, and verify that the remaining
service panel lights are now on.
Power
On
Normal
Power
Off
Normal
I/O
Power
Hold
B
0
E3
B
CJ
c:::J
Power In
Process
Power
Basic
Complete Check
J Check
Reset
I
Logic
Reset
IIML
CJ
c:J
MBC
On
I
CJ
5 Volt
CJ
CJ
24 Volt
I/O Power
Hold
MSS Code
o
Power
Cede
III
I
Lamp
Test
Unit Emergency Only
~
On
Emergency
Power Off
Service Panel (Front View)
4381-3
81M 2676380
I~~g
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GH045
IPN
6169598
1 of 2
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
EC A20559
03 Dec 84
EC A20560
18 Feb 85
INST 045
INST 046
Running PU Diagnostics Based on Initial
Install or Relocation
Notes:
9.
1.
Ensure that channel 0 is terminated.
2.
If a failure should occur, correct the failure and restart
this test.
3.
8.
Key in QWW, press ENTER.
OCP Checkout
Running Cable Wrap Test (CWT)
a.
1.
Set the Power Off switch to Power Off and then back
to Normal on the service panel.
1.
Ensure that the CE Mode switch is in CE Mode.
2.
Ensure the FUNC 1 diskette is in diskette drive 1.
2.
Set the CE Mode switch to Normal.
3.
Install DIAG 1 diskette in diskette drive 2.
3.
The indicators on the OCP are not on at this point.
4.
4.
Press Power On/IML on the OCP. Enter the needed
information on the Time-of-Day screen. Verify that
the Power Complete indicator is on.
Key in QG, and press ENTER to display the
Diagnostic Mode PU Diagnostic Selection screen.
5.
Select Option C, and press ENTER.
6.
Select PU side O.
7.
Select 02 for Cable Wrap Test after the Channel Test
Selection screen is displayed.
8.
Run CWT on all channels attached to PU O.
The Power Complete indicator is now on.
10. Press MODE SEL.
Perform Language Configuration first, only if
another keyboard other than the U.S. console
keyboard is used. See Volume A06, Service Aids,
"Language Configuration."
General Instructions
11. Key in QG, and press ENTER to display the
Diagnostic Mode PU Diagnostic Selection screen.
12. Select the correct option.
Note: When either option is selected, all available
Basic and MSMD diagnostics are run against PU 1
and PU 0 hardware.
a.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install FUNCl diskette into diskette drive 1 and
FUNC2 diskette into diskette drive 2.
Key in T, and press ENTER.
2)
Key in Y, and press ENTER.
Note:
b.
Press IML at the service panel.
Enter date and time.
Go to Volume A06, Service Aids, and perform
"System Configuration-Service."
Do not terminate this test.
RELOCATION -Option I (Isolate Failure)
1)
Key in I, and press ENTER.
2)
Key in None, and press ENTER.
3)
Key inY, and press ENTER.
4)
To terminate this test, press and hold ALT
and then press MODE SEL.
6.
Press Lamp Test on the OCP, and verify that the
Power In Process, Power Complete, Basic Check,
System, Wait, and Chan-Chan Disabled (if CTCA is
featured) indicators are on.
Press Power Off on the OCP, and verify that machine
powers down.
7.
Set the CE Mode switch to CE Mode. The Basic
Check indicator is now on.
8.
Press Power On/IML on the OCP, and verify that the
processor does not power up.
Note: Detailed run instructions and test options are
displayed on the operator console.
9.
Key in option E.
10. Select Option C, and press ENTER.
11. Select PU side 1.
9.
Press Power On on the service panel, the processor
will now power up. Key in the needed information on
the Time-of-Day screen. When the QWW screen is
displayed, enter UC. Verify that power is complete.
10. Press Power On/IML on the OCP. The processor will
IML and the General Selection Screen appears.
12. Select 02 for Cable Wrap Test after the Channel Test
Selection screen is displayed.
13. Run CWT on all channels attached to PU 1.
Note: Detailed run instructions and test options are
displayed on the operator console.
14. Key in option E.
15. After completing this test, remove DIAG 1 from
diskette drive 2, and install FUNC2 in diskette drive
2.
After· performing •'System Configuration-Service,"
continue with step 8 on this page.
4381-3
81M 2676380
PN 61695981
2 of 2
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
EC A20560
18 Feb 85
ID Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
o o
5.
Note: If Option T is run at this time and
reconfiguration has occurred, a message is
displayed on the operator screen indicating that
the hardware is reconfigured. Run Option I at
this time.
Note: For the correct system configuration
information, use the printout packaged with the
diskettes.
7.
1)
Note: If this machine has the channel to channel
feature, the Chan-Chan Disabled indicator is on or off
as the Channel-To-Channel switch is pressed.
Remove DIAG 1 diskette from diskette drive 1.
Note: If the processor that you are installing DOES
NOT have a printout packaged with the diskettes go
to step 8.
6.
INITIAL INSTALL-Option T
Set the CE Mode switch to CE Mode.
Note: Ignore the message "PORT x CONFIG
ERROR."
5.
Key in UC, and press ENTER.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00- 0 () 0
INST 046
o 000000000 000000000
± ')
'I
,'!!,L
t
"ynw"w'"
fWm'.....·,. .·W ..'t ..
· 'de: "';11##'"
m
t
W' 't tdN
• " .. 'I .. ! •.•
tffig"
tt
eo
-1 ' i
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
INST 051
System Configuration
The following procedures are contained in Volume A06,
Service Aids. Perform these procedures now.
Note: Perform Language Configuration first, only if
another keyboard other than the U.S. console
keyboard is used.
Remote Support Facility Aids
Diskette Aids
Patch Aids
Perform the following RSF procedures at installation:
Perform the following diskette procedures at installation:
Perform the following patch procedure at installation:
•
"Send Service Information (Problem Analysis)"
•
"Language Configuration" (if required)
•
•
"Remote Operator Console Facility (ROCF)" (if
applicable)
•
"Module Transfer."
Running Channel-To-Channel Adapter
(CTCA) Test
•
"Data Bank Initialization."
3279 Display Console Aids
Perform the following procedure if the system has a
3279-2C Display Console attached:
•
"3279 Display Console Adjustment."
Configuration Aids
"Patch Installation" (if applicable).
Note:
Ensure that Channel 0 is terminated.
To run this test, both sides of the CTCA (X and Y) must
be cabled to channels on the same processor. Before
running this test, verify that the channels are operational.
For details on the CTCA tests, see Volume AD6, Service
Aids, "CTCA Tests.
II
Perform the following configuration procedures at
installation:
•
"System Configuration-Customer"
•
I/O Configuration
"I/O Configuration (5/370)" for S/370 mode of
operation.
"S/370XA Installation" for 370-XA mode of
operation.
•
"Customer Data and Security Control (Problem
Analysis)"
4381-3
81M 2676380
I~~q
INST 051
GH050
=:UZilU:Siiaaiii!li "i
$lA".:::::::::
'I
1:0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 () 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
00000000000 00000000000000 000000000
Installing Interface Cables
INST 055
1.
Set the CE Mode switch to Normal. and set the
Power Off switch to Power Off.
2.
Plug the Power Control Interface (PCI) cables into the
010 I/O rack as shown at
a.
a.
Start with position 1 (top left socket) on the PCI
panel located at 01 D.
b.
Remove the yellow wire jumper from its plug
position.
c.
Plug the PCI cables in numerical order until all
PCI cables are plugged.
d.
3.
0
D
1
D 0
0
DO
0
DO
0
D DO
9DO
o
0
Install the yellow wire jumper next to the last
position plugged with the PCI cables.
2
Connect channel cables to gate 01 E as shown at
K01
K02
K03
K04
K05
K06
K07
KOS
K09
K10
Con9
3
m·
4
Notes:
a.
To prevent cable interference. install channel
cables in a left-to-right sequence.
b.
Ensure that ALL channels are terminated with
370 type terminators BUS (part 22B2675) and
TAG (part 2282676).
5
6
PCC
S
II
4.
Connect CTCA cables to gate 01 H as shown at
5.
If the processor has an interrupt cable that must be
connected to the processor. go to Volume A06,
Service Aids, "External Interrupts" for more details.
Al
A2
A3
A4
AS
A6
A7
AS
Bus
In
Tag
In
Bus
Out
Tag
Out
Bus
In
Tag
In
Bus
Out
Tag
Out
X
X
X
X
Y
Y
Y
Y
6. Reinstall gates 01 E and 01 F/01 H covers.
0
ConO
Gate 010
PCI Panel
Gate 01H
(CTCA)
11~------------------------------------------PU1----------------------------~
Channel
o
Channel
1
Channel
Channel
2
3
Channel
4
Channel
5
Channel
6
Channel
7
Channel
8
Channel
o
Channel
1
Channel
2
Channel
C7
C8
C9
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
Tag Bus
Tag
Bus
Tag
Bus
Tag
Bus
Tag
Bus
Tag
Bus
Tag
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
Bus
Tag
Bus
Tag
Bus Tag
Bus
Tag
Bus
Tag
Bus
Tag
Bus
Tag
Bus
Tag
Bus
Tag
Bus
Tag
Bus
Tag
Bus
C6
3
Channel
4
Channel
5
Channel
6
Channel
7
Channel
8
Gate 01 E (Channel Interface)
4381-3
BIM 2676380
MI
I PN 6169600 II EC A20558 .1 EC A20560 I
I,-.;;;.S.;;;.eq~G;;;.;H;..;.O~55____.....1~of~1_ _ _-,.. 01 Oct 84 . 18 Feb 85 .
INST 055
«I Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
aaaasa"", i iii!
Ii i
us
$
::!iii
iii:: ;i; ail $11&1111:: Iii,.
·
._---_._-
i:O 0 0 O· 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
·L.,i"t'"ull'm""''''·v'llI'''rr'",.!'
'w
0000000000000000000000000 0000000.
INST 061
Final System Check
Running System Test/4381
Completing the Installation
System Test/4381 should be run for approximately one
hour (2 passes) with all I/O devices connected. For a
complete description of System Test/4381, see "System
Test/4381" in this volume.
1.
After running System Test/4381, go to Volume A06,
Service Aids, and perform "S/370 XA Installation" if this
is a XA account. After successfully running System
Test/4381, invoke PA Option E (service action complete).
4381-3
81M 2676380
e Copyright IBM Corp.
If you have installed more than one machine, report
your time accurately on each machine.
2.
File all documents, and complete any associated
paperwork.
3.
Turn system and the 4381 Processor Operations
Manual over to the customer.
. Relocation or Discontinuance
Procedure
By using the Processor Installation instructions and the
Unpacking Instructions, you can disconnect the system
for equipment location change or discontinuance.
Note: If this system uses the IBM supplied telephone
(part 4494964) for RSF transmissions, the telephone is
part of the system and must be packaged with the
system. The part number is located on bottom of the
telephone.
MI
/ PN 6169601 ·/1 EC A20558I EC A20562
/L-.=.S.=.eq:L..,;G;:;.;H~0;;..6;;..0~---I....,;1~o.;;..f~1~_ _....... _ 01 Oct 84 _ 30 Aug 85
1984
INST 061
/
;I
1000000000000000000000000000000000
. ",.
'"T
....
,
,
,f'~
... ,.
",·'tN,·r.t'"
Ii,,,
ij"iIx" HtRriN""J ·ijfflr'WWWFt!lt:ffl'rlu'W*%Wm...' .....
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
4381 PROCESSOR SAFETY INSPECTION GUIDE
INSP 001
Table of Contents
Purpose ...•..................•••..••••••••..•..•••
Items Needed ...............••...•••••..•.••. .'......
INSP 002
INSP 002
Line Cord Ground Check ••.•••••••••••••••••....••.•.••
INSP 003
Frame ........•....•••••••••••••.••.•......••.•...
External Check ....•.•.••...•.••.•.••.•......•........••
Internal Check ....••.•.•..•.••....••.•....••........•••
INSP 004
INSP 004
INSP 004
PCC and PS1 04 Fuses .••...•.••••••••..•••.••••••••••
Line Filter •••.•.•••.•.....••......••..•.•••••.•..•••••
INSP 005
INSP 006
Safety Labels .•.•....••..••.••••.•••••••••••••••••••
INSP 007
Gate 01 C .•...•••..••..••••••••.••••••••••••....••.
INSP 009
Diskette Drives. • • . . • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • . . . • • • .•
INSP 010
Gate 01 A .•.••••••••••••••••••••.••••••..••..•.•••. INSP 011
Safety Labels ..••••....••••....••......••......•••.••... INSP 011
Console Devices (3205, 3278-2A. 3279-2C) .••••••••••••••• INSP 013
External Check ..•..........•...•••.••.•••..•••.••..••... INSP 013
Internal Check ...........•..••.•••..•••.•...•..••....... INSP 013
Power OnlOff Check
..•.•••••••••••••••...•....••...•
INSP 015
Safety Labels •.••••••••••••••.••....••••.•.....•....
INSP 017
4381
81M 2676380
I~~g
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GI005
INSP 001
INSP 002
Purpose
To supply a safety inspection procedure for the processor.
This safety inspection should be done:
•
When you inspect a processor for an IBM
maintenance agreement and there is reason to
question the processor's safety.
•
When IBM per call service is requested and no
service has recently been performed by IBM.
•
When an alterations and attachments review is
performed.
If the· inspection indicates unacceptable safety
condition(s), the condition(s) must be corrected before
IBM provides service to the machine.
While performing this inspection, special attention must
be given to these areas:
•
50 to 60 Hz conversions using IBM or non-IBM
parts.
•
Feature/model changes and EC upgrades.
•
Additions of non-IBM power supplies or attachments.
•
Missing safety covers.
•
Removed, faded, or painted-over safety labels.
•
Primary power parts replacement requirements.
•
Other product safety related items.
Items Needed
•
CE tool kit
•
Fluke* 8060A digital voltmeter (part 8496278) or
equivalent.
* Trademark of John Fluke Mfg. Co. Mount Lake Terrace,
Washington
4381
81M 2676380
rMI
~ Gl005
e Copyright IBM Corp. '9B4
PN 6169618
2of2
EC A20558.1
~0~1_0~C~T~8~4~.
__________L -________~________~________~
INSP 002
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000
INSP 003
Line Cord Ground Check
7.
After taping connector or while wearing rubber
gloves. separate connectors.
S.
Carefully meter from ground pin of receptaclA to
building ground for 0 Vac. Do not continue if
condition is not met.
9.
Measure from ground pin of receptacle to the
case of the receptacle for 0 Vac. Do not
continue if condition is not met.
m
DANGER
Use only test probes to touch the exterior shell of
the customer's receptBcl6 until St6P 9.
1.
If processor main power connector is unplugged,
go to step 8.
2.
Press Power Off at the operator control panel or
the service panel.
3.
Switch CB 1 and CB2 off.
4.
Have the customer locate and turn off the branch
circuit breaker to the processor and all physically
attached I/O devices.
5. Use Fluke- S060A meter to check for 0 Vac
a
from the receptacle case
to building ground.
If voltage is less than 1 Vac, the shell can be
touched but not separated.
6.
Phase Pins
10. Measure resistance from ground pin of the
customer receptacle to building ground.
Reading should be less than 1.0 ohm.
Ground
Power Plug
Note: Digital meters may give unstable
readings if leakage current is flowing in the
building ground circuit. If the reading
appears unstable or greater than 1 ohm,
use an ECaS 1020, 1023, or equivalent
to measure ground impedance only.
Customer Receptacle
11. Measure resistance from ground pin of receptacle
Loosen locking device but do not separate
connectors.
to receptacle case. Reading should be less than
1.0 ohm.
Black
DANGER
Do not touch connectors to be sepBrBted.
WrBp connector with e/ectricBI tBpe or weBr
rubber gloves.
12. Measure resistance from ground pin of
disconnected power cord to frame ground. The
resistance should be less than. 1 ohm.
Line
Cord
13. Check main power cord for damaged. broken
Phase 1
2
Blue
Phase
Red
Phase 3
GreenlYellow
Shield
Ground
Blue
Neutral
Black
Brown
1
2
Phase 3
Green/Yellow
Ground
insulation, or arced pins. Ensure the correct
locking plug is used.
DO NOT RECONNECT MAIN POWER CONNECTOR
UNTIL INSTRUCTED TO DO SO.
Line
Cord
Black
Phase
Phase
Shield
For 220V wiring, tie the neutral to the line cord.
4381-3
B/M 2676380
o C~i~t IBM Corp.
I~~g
1984
IpNof 2
6169619
GI010
1
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
EC A20559
03 Dec 84
INSP 003
INSP 004
Frame
External Check
1.
Check for damaged or missing external covers.
2.
Check cover latches for functil),,!j'g correctly.
3.
As doors are opened, check the hinges for
breakage or corrosion.
4.
Check covers for sharp edges.
Internal Check
1.
Check for non-IBM alterations or attachments. If
present. complete form A-009, Non-18M
Alterations/Attachments Survey.
2.
Inspect for smoke or water damage and
presence of rust or other contaminations.
3.
Inspect all cables for damage, correct ratings, all
needed grommets in place at frame
feed-throughs. and tie-downs in place.
DANGER
A shock hazard may exist while plugging or
disconnecting inline or Mate-N-Lok·
connectors because of the connector pin
slipping from its socket. Before working
with any connectors, ensure power is off.
4.
Check that FDS cables are correctly seated and
undamaged.
5. . Check that all covers are correctly i·nstalled and
no screws or washers missing.
!
• Trademark of AMP Inc. Harrisburg, Pennsylvania.
I'
4381-3
81M 2676380
rMI
l.!.!,g
I
pN 6169619
GI010
2 of 2
EC A20559
03 Dec 84 .
INSP 004
e copyright IBM Corp_ 1984
o
0 0--000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1
o
i
()OOOOO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
~
o ~~,
ii,
t
iMt';'{
'r+drt'
''1
i
f"'·'
t
. , ... ,
....
I! ',. 1"110" 'W" "'St-..
'm w
#
"''''''n tt'b 'dWt"t
tIi", , e-tfHtfyeif"¥¥'ti'tf',"M''"#%Whttt ...
f
t
,t
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
INSP 005
PCC and PS104 Fuses
The fuses listed below are for the
pee.1J
Located on the cover of the
F1
4 amps 230 Vac
F2
2.S amps 240 Vac
pee and PS104 only.
Located on PS 104 to the left of the PCC.
F1
15 amps 600 Vac
F2
15 amps 600 Vac
F3
15 amps 600 Vac
F4
15 amps 600 Vac
F5
6 amps 600 Vac
F6
6 amps 600 Vac
F7
6 amps 600 Vac
FS
6 amps 600 Vac
F9
1.6 amps 600 Vac
@
m
AMD 107
PS111
PS112
~
~
'e
'e
•••••••••
~
~
Primary
Control
Compartment
(PCC)
Ensure the following:
II from PCC cover to frame
1.
Green/yellow wire
is tight.
2.
Green/yellow wire
from top rear of
frame is tight. Located near J 14.
m
m
3. Green/yellow wires
tight.
4.
The power strain relief
undamaged.
5. Green/yellow wire
6.
at lower rear of
o
PS104
~
PS105
pec to
PS106
•
•
pee are
~
II is tight and
~
,
m
"-J
II in plug JO 1 is tight.
AMD 102
Meter for less than 1 ohm from the convenience
outlet ground pin
to the frame.
Ii
Left Side View
4381
81M 2676380
o Copyright IBM Corp.
I~~g
1984
GI015
I
PN 6169620
,1 of2
II
EC A20658
I
,L,~0~1~O~C~T~84~,~
Rear of PCC
______~________~________~________~
INSP 005
INSP 006
Ensure the following:
1.
Green/yellow wires from PS104, PS105,
PS106, PSll1, and PS112
to the frame are
tight.
2.
Remove the acoustical barrier
at AMD 102.
Ensure green/yellow wire from motor to frame is
tight. This wire is mounted above the motor on
the blower mounting frame. Ensure
green/yellow wire from the blower mount to the
frame and green/yellow wire in plug are tight.
Install the acoustical barrier.
3.
a
m
Open PCC box cover. Ensure safety covers for
CP 1
CB 1, and CB2 are in place. CB 1 is
rated for 10 amps; CB2 is rated for 25 amps
Ensure green/yellow wires
in all plugs
inside the PCC are tight.
PS112
m
Green/yellow wires
m
D!D
Warning
Label
Hazardous
Label
o
PS104
inside of PCC are tight.
00
00
Line filter is not installed on machines for Japan.
]
Primary
Control
Compartment
II .
Ensure all wires at the line
Remove line filter cover
filter are tight. Install line filter cover.
OJ
(PCC)
Warning
Label
m
III
..
m
II
AMD 102
Left Side View
1M!
l.,§.!g
o Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GIO 1 5
PN 6169620
20f2
EC A20558
O
e4-
e -
o :-4-0
U:~6
Ir-
--------.tIl I
4381
B/M 2676380
c.:J
R-f]
II
Line Filter
Note:
PS111
iii '
m.
4.
AMD 107
w
D m
o e-·-e-t
CJ
Inside PCC
Inside PCC
I
~0~1~O~C~T~84~.~__~__~________~________- L_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _~
INSP 006
000000000000000000 0000000 000000000
....;,''±''ttM'••
'
"
""U'"'''' 'ttt'tt!!&'t rd1'
'?e
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
INSP 007
Safety Labels
Ensure all safety labels as shown are in place and
readable. For safety label part numbers, see page INSP
017.
Item
m
Item
iii is located inside the pce.
is located between CB 1 and CB2 inside the PCC.
Close the cover of the Power Control Compartment
(PCC).
eo...
Fa
EJ
,,
C8·2
,I
D
I
m
I
HAZARDOUS' AREA
TRAINED SERVICE
,
m
•
~
D
I
,,I
,
.,
I
PERSONNEL 'ONlY
f!-
o :-!-O
I
!~
0:+0
t!l!J
.01
i
:
~Q:j
,,,,,A;..
,
PRESENT WITH
,,
,,
,
MACHINE POWER OFF
I
,,
I•
.J
.
PCC Cover
~l
D
0
II
I
OJ
LJ
C!O
,I
LINE VOLTAGE
CJ
0
I
I
m
•
0:-4-0
_.......
/'11
U:fO
PCC
m
CJ
O:f
Rear of PCC
Inside PCC
This unit equipped with line filler circuits:
See installation manual for special
grounding
wi re requirements.
WARNING
High grounding conductor current. Grounding
circuit continuity is vital for safe operation of
machine. Never operate machine with grounding
conductor disconnected.
4381
81M 2676380
I~~g
GI020
I
PN 6169621
.10f1
II
EC A20558I
.~.~0~1~O~C~T~8~4~'________~______~~______- L_ _ _ _ _ _~
«I Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
INSP 007
S"iU:::Sili! ill
a
$
j
i l#iiiS;ISldiiiiiii iii: P : 1ti£12!i$!
'0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 '0 0 0
"
,
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
INSP 009
Gate 01C
Transformer
Grounding Method
iii
Ensure the following:
a
1.
Green/yellow strap
is tight.
from gate 01 C to frame
2.
Green/yellow strap
from PS 107, PS 108, and
PS 109 to the frame is tight.
III
3. Remove the acoustical barrier
B
at AMD 105.
Ensure green/yellow wire to blower cover,
green/yellow wire from motor to blower cover,
and green/yellow wire in plug are tight. Install
acoustical barrier.
iii from AMD 105 to the
4.
Green/yellow strap
frame is tight.
5.
Green/yellow strap
PS 103 is tight.
6.
Green/yellow wire in all plugs is tight.
II from PS101, PS102, and
7. . Green/yellow strap from the service panel to the
frame is tight.
Note: Transformers 104A, 104B, 104C, and CP2 are
for all 50 Hz and Japan 60 Hz machines. If present, CP2
is mounted on the frame of gate 01 Cover PS 101.
2.
3.
4.
~l
Green/yellow wire in plugs for TR 101, TR102,
TR 103, TR 104A, TR 104B, and TR 104C to
transformer case is tight.
PS102
PS PS
105 106
Check for a 3.2 amp fuse in TR 102, a 4.0 amp
fuse in TR 103, and 15 amp fuses in TR 104 if
TR 104 is installed.
PCC
Ensure the DANGER 550V label is in place for
TR 10 1, TR 102, and TR 103. Label is mounted
on the capacitors on the transformers. For
safety label part numbers, see page INSP 017.
4381
I
MI
I
PN 6169622
II
EC A20558
m
m
I,kPS103
,..J..,~ 'I '" I
/~r
'\../
II
81M 2676380
/
1
I..J.,--........ ~-;(,I
I
mountingTR10l, TR102,
Nuts or screws
TR103, TR104A, TR104B, and TR104C are
tight.
l.:t . .k
~~"t
PS101~1
PS
111
Ensure the following:
1.
.
"",-"'~CP2 (If Present)
TR102 ........ ~,-
AMD
107
I
I..:::"
-........ ~....'"
~~ I
I
Gate Ole
Rear View
(lower Portion)
I
J..
TR104B
11',-, ">I
II
II
I
II;~ I ...)
f
If'~/! Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
INSP 009
42Si""" 2
INSP 010
Diskette Drives
Ensure the following:
1.
Diskette drives are correctly installed.
2.
Green/yel/ow wires in plugs for diskette drives
are tight.
3.
Belt safety cover (if installed) is in place.
4.
Green/yellow wire from both diskette drives
to the frame is tight.
5.
m
a
Power cable strain relief for both diskette drives
is tight.
~.b.
m
Diskette Drive
i'
,i:
4381
81M 2676380
1M!
l..!!9
GI025
PN 61 69622
20f2
EC A20558 ·1
~0~1~O~C~T~8~4~.
________~________~________~______~
INSP 010
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 ,0 0 0 0 0
o
0 000 0 0 0 0 "
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
INSP 011
Gate 01A
Ensure the following:
a
1.
Green/yellow straps
from board 01 A-B 1 and
01 A-B2 plenums to the frame are tight.
2.
Swing open gate 01C and ensure the
green/yellow ground straps for boards 0 1A-B 1
and 01A-B2 are tight. The ground straps are
located at the top right corner of the boards.
3.
Remove acoustical barrier
from AMD 101.
Ensure green/yellow wire to blower cover and
green/yellow wire in plug are tight. Install
acoustical barrier.
4.
iii
II
II
Remove acoustical barrier
from AMD 103,
AMO 104, and AMD 106. (AMD 103 located
behind AMD 104). Ensure green/yellow wire to
blower cover, green/yellow wire from motor to
blower cover, and green/yellow wire in plugs are
tight. Install acoustical barrier.
5. Ensure the safety cover over the decoupling
iii
capacitors
are tight. Decoupling capacitors
are mounted at· top of board 01 A-B2 and the
cover is mounted over the capacitors.
6.
PS
105
Green/yellOW wire in plugs at rear of PS 104 and
PS 1OS
is tight. Gate 01 A-B2 must be
swung open to see the rear of PS10S.
II
B2
and
Plenum Gate
Safety Labels
II
Ensure safety label
is in place and readable. For safety
label part numbers, see page INSP 017.
Rear View
iii
:~~ 2676380 I~~9 GI030
o Copyright IBM Corp.
I
6169623
.1PNm1
II
EC A20558I
_________
_L_~O~1~O~C~T~8~4-L
~
____________________________
l
~_
HAZARDOUS AREA
TRAINED SERVICE
PERSONNEL ONLY
INSP 011
1984
1£ SiS
!I :
i !Ii::::
au :
#2iS"iSiiiiAi ilii2: :
0000000000000000000000000000000000
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
INSP 013
CRT YOKE GROUNDING
Console Devices (3205, 3278-2A, and
3279-2C)
External Check
Check all covers for correct latching.
2.
Inspect for sharp edges.
3.
Ensure all feet are present and undamaged at the
base.
• Soldered Ground
f Plug Ground
o Screwed Ground
-<
Video Output RPQ
,.-------------.,
4. Check CRT for cracks, bubbles, or damage.
No smoke, water damage, or foreign substances.
2.
Frayed or broken wiring.
3.
Terminal board covers undamaged; no screws
missing.
Rubber boot over filter capacitor is undamaged.
6.
Correct grounding of CRT yoke
II .
7.
All capacitors for damage, expansion, or leakage.
8.
Verify connections to all capacitors are secure.
9.
Correct grounding of CRT main power cord
frame.
II to
A2
007
B08
I
I
I
I
009
I
I
I __________
Mlc frame ~ B09
L
~-
C:~r-
EJ~I.~
~'
~>
Supply
~+~>----;i-- Card
~)
P3
~,,2 v 4
A3
14-:
008
BOO
~>-<
~,
B10
"">
___
(7.
I
Alarm
Block
30 ".
46
E~I;securit:~., ...
®
I
-E~
r::l
~.
'),
3
MRC ).-......._ _ _ _ _(l'.~,t-t-IIE
Sel
Pen
Power P3
7(
~~>----i-
~
y I ~L
':~
4
E~II lit.
8 ~~
• .
~:
16
r-
1 power Assembly
Potentiometer
Mounting
late
' '1
L.--;::==:::
g~:II:c'ion
CRT Anode Terminal
~
CRT
E~E8'.E9';;
Trav
'f
6 !::P1!12~-=:::;:::::=::
LOPT H.eat ~~ Led
ICo~vergence
Sense Sink
O~
.Purlty
1
C
~;:~09
~ (! Test/Normal
~>-rr-
I
24
P4
.....
Li
~.r-<~ ...A_a_l_a_.......
7>-<£
.'1:
22
'4
P17B
Card
0000/00
Switches
Video
Card
.,
~~
'~ 008
~~
Grounding Wires
Box Metalization E 1
E2
Ground to Prime
.J...J
AssemblY3
/
I
Doc
111~
os
B .
CRT
n
6 s U
Prime
~~ Power·
f7
I~ W~BI:-~ iJ
If
PI
B
¥~91
~,:05 II
AS
iii
V"
7
,--_ _ _~/~01lFr::7 Switch
G5
10. Correct grounding of 3205 or 3278-2A or
3279-2C line cord
CAUTION
Correct ground connections and
routings are essential for effective
lightning and flashover protection.
18-3
Mate-N-Lok plugs for pushed back pins or wires.
5.
Logic
Gate
807
!: 008
:coaXia,_
: Sockets
Internal Check
4.
1
Line Cord Ground
1.
1.
m CRT Socket
LINE CORD GROUNDING (3279-2C)
1
Magnetic
Assembly
C-::>-f--oJ
:~6-..J""--P-1-4~-
/:B~;~,'
Spring tension must cut
into yoke core insulation
LINE CORD GROUNDING (3278-2A)
B08
;~ 810
11. All high voltage, hazardous voltage, fuse size,
and any other safety labels are in place and
readable. For safety label part numbers, see
page INSP 017.
'--
B13
P2
~
·Wires may be connected to
alternative screws
@]
J2
Jl
~
Ferrotransformer
Cord
o
~c
a B
A
OlD/A'·
010 AUl
010/nOlO/C1·
4381
B/M 2676380
I~~g
GI035
PN 6169624
.10f1
I
EC A20558 I
,0
1
.~.~0~1~O~C~T~8~4~.________~________~________~________~
-Grounded only when mounted
and fastened in place.
INSP 013
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
a.JiLi!iiii
ZUlli! ;:
Ii 1\; $1$411111#121 II Ii XU!2$i1)!d IEAJI&iOi Ii
10 0 0 0 0 00 0 0
I
i
I
0 0 0 0 0 0 () 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0
1,
.'
I"! , , :
o
X'
''#'''''*''$1 CU'\W'
IJJ!!_
, "".'1':' ::I""W' , .••• ..,,:l:ti...HI,......!.iih'tU.u
I~"
'gHU' rrrr:rwri'Wi.wi,,,=L(HNlffl' I '_Jr."" "'I'I"W!!!''''''''''.'' rtt l,j"tjl'M'N." .,11 HH",t• • •·wJlie.f:Jil.. I!'!'I lIl, II m'M'twlt'
..
t"r,
t'S"·"'!:tttltl'tWHMti"t'. ·'·"iff" ..... 1£'$"'"
1:
H t
rl'9'
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o o 0 0 0 0.0 0 0
tdWnmtJ:,:,.rr.,.Jtm'wLru'r,'ff,u'''WW
,I
'I
!'II
1I,.WrIrv!i!!i.fI+',t '#tHt
"'."1,, t,':;'t. . . . . .
Ittl'httdV"I""LtfP
.""/tZ"eei,;'C'=\;.i,-l· ,...p'" l£'pwrrrwrnrf")"I'"
INSP 015
Power·OnjOff Check
_
10. At Power Complete. switch the Unit
Emergency On Iy switch
to Power Off.
m
1.
Verify the customer's branch circuit breaker
is off.
_
11. Ensure that the 5 Volt. 24 Volt, and M BC
On indicators at the service panel are off.
2.
Connect the processor power plug to the
customer's receptacle.
_
12. Switch the Unit Emergency Only switch to
On.
3.
Activate the customer's branch circuit
breaker.
4.
Activate CB1and CB2mat the PCC in the
processor.
5.
Ensure the processor console is powered
on.
6.
7.
D on the service panel.
AtPower Complete II ' set the Unit
Note: If the switch fails to reset a
retention spring
is installed. To reset the
switch. push down on the retention spring
behind the switch and push up on the Unit
Emergency Only switch on the service
panel.
a
_
Press Power On
_
Emergency Only switch on the service panel
1
I
14. Ensure processing unit power is off and
AMOs and diskette drives are not running.
ir:l H
!~~
m
I
,
I
l
~
I
I
1
1
I
1
1
16. Switch CBloand CB2 on. -.
01)
_
II
I
the se!vice panel.
·---18. At Power C-omplete, switch CPl off
Rear of Unit Emergency Only Switch
:
I
17. Press Pow~ On
Cover
:
I
1
-15. Ensure that -the 5 Volt 24 -~olt and MBC On indicator.s on the service panel are off..
Ensure thafPS104. AMO 102. and AMO
104 are off. If PS104 is still on, reference
code 11 01160E is displayed on the system
console. If any of these items are on, a
safety hazard exists.
Warning: This condition can only be
cleared by tripping CBl and CB2. These
problems can be caused by binding points
at K02, K03. or K04, binding relay points in
PS101. or a bad card at 01A-A lV2 or
01A-A202 and may be intermittent. The 5
Volt 24 Volt and MBC On indicators Bon
the service panel will be on if CBl and CB2
are on with the Power Off switch activated.
1
~
13. Press Power On at the service panel. At
Power Complete. switch CBl and CB2 off.
...
to Emergency Power Off.
8.
-1
r-
I
I
a.
_t;:;_~1D
. •110'0' ,
19. Ensure no voltage is present at the
convenience outlet.
--~ l.~~.
, f!l!l I'
20. Switch CP1 on.
_ .,,0:.
:1
.
.
:
'.I~,
,,~
t~
/'''i'
...,.....:""'T'
I L..JL-I
,
PCC
Interlock
1
I
I
a
1
9.
I
I
I
Set the Power Off switch to Normal at the
service panel. Press Power On.
~
......
I
1
Chock
Resel
I
:
J
1
10
I
+
LOQ.c
Rote.
IIMl
PCC Cover
I
I I Ila"",
I
Test
Unit
em~,qencv
Only
_-.JII.r--.,.11 On
Emergentv
Power Off
Service Panel (Front View)
4381
81M 2676380
PN 6169625
1 of 1
EC A20558
01 OCT 84
EC A35269
29 Aug 85
INSP 015
e Copyright IBM CorP. 1984
...".::212 ii2Siiii i ,
Slt4 21iiji Mil !Ii " :Ii!iii! iii Ii !; ,,;aii!$I$U4I22lii!2iiiiiliM!;;;;ii i!2!il Ila$!ii¥!! (41 I !
o
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 () 0 0 '0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
"", ______ ," _ _ •
.
I
_ _ _ __
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
INSP 017
Safety label Description and Part Numbers
Description
HAZARDOUS AREA
TRAINED SERVICE
PERSONNEL ONLY
LINE VOLTAGE
PRESENT WITH
MACHINE POWER OFF
DANGER
550 VOLTS
WARNING
High grounding conductor
current. Grounding circuit
continuity is vital for
safe operation of machine.
Never operate machine
with grounding conductor
disconnected.
This unit equipped with
line filter circuits.
See installation manual
for special grounding
wire requirements.
French
French
Dutch
Finnish
6815182
6081052
8326801
984123
6825828
6121851
6825818
4154584
4154583
6825908
4154587
Norweaian
Spanish
Swedish
Brazilian
Portuguese
Ja~anese
Denmark
Dutch
369207
6815180
8551904
6815183
8326797
1806772
369207
138775
4154591
8551903
6815188
6825840
1806773
138775
4154589
4154586
Enalish
German
369207
6815193
138755
6825819
8483959
2582954
5731697
Italian
6825879
5397579
DescriPtion
HAZARDOUS AREA
TRAINED SERVICE
PERSONNEL ONLY
LINE VOLTAGE
PRESENT WITH
MACHINE POWER OFF
DANGER
550 VOLTS
WARNING
High grounding conductor
current. Grounding circuit
continuity is vital for
safe operation of machine.
Never operate machine
with grounding conductor
disconnected.
This unit equipped with
line filter circuits.
See installation manual
for special grounding
wire requirements.
:~~ 2676380 I~~g GI045
Canadian
6815179
and
369207
I
PN 6169626
.1 M1
II
..
EC A20558
I
~.~O~1~O~C~T~8~4~.
5731697
l
________~________~________~________~
__
INSP 017
C Copyright IBM Corp. '984
_
::Lieu i;i
g &££&::2211
i II$S#QAI
0000000000000000000000000000000000
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:56:37 Create Date : 2014:09:19 14:47:49-08:00 Modify Date : 2014:09:19 14:17:05-07:00 Metadata Date : 2014:09:19 14:17:05-07:00 Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.55 Paper Capture Plug-in Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:9aefa9eb-4590-1f49-85cb-17d0088d3b3d Instance ID : uuid:b1657f33-7fe8-c64b-ab6a-6d0df722d1b0 Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseNone Page Count : 224EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools